HomeMy WebLinkAboutProject Manual
o
o
o
D
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
10
o
o
o
o
o
Volume 1
<~
....~
l!tQWED
(. -
j'. .
, "in?
DC~'s
PROJECT MANUAL
ENE R G Y C E- N T E R
Carmel City Center
Architect
6)
CSO SCHENKEL SHULTZ
Contractor:
Signature Construction LLC
21 West Main Street
Carmel, Indiana 46032
Structural Engineering Consultant:
Lynch, Harrison & Brumleve
550 Virginia Avenue
Indianapolis. Indiana 46203
Mechanical/Electrical Engineeri ng Consulta nt
L'Acquis Consulting Enterprises, Indianapolis, LLC
280 East 96th Street, Suite 280
Indianapolis, Indiana 46240
Project No. 25310
January 26, 2007
u
u
u
u
u
o
[j
u
u
u
u
u
u
[J
o
u
u
U
ID
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
00 01 10 - 1
SECTION 00 01 10 - TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
00 00 00 COVER
0001 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
00 21 00
00 42 00
00 43 33
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, AlA - A701, 1997 EDITION
BID FORM AND RELATED INFORMATION (Inserted loose)
SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS, MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
007000 GENERAL CONDITIONS, AlA - A201, 1997 EDITION
00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION
008000 GEOTECHNICAL DATA
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 1000
01 21 00
01 22 00
01 23 00
01 2900
01 31 00
01 33 00
01 33 13
01 40 00
01 50 00
01 60 00
01 73 00
01 73 29
01 77 00
01 78 00
01 78 39
SUMMARY
ALLOW ANCES
UNIT PRICES
AL TERNATES
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SUBMITTAL COVER SHEET
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
NO DIVISION 02 SECTIONS
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033060 CONCRETE FINISHES AND SEALERS
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL
0531 00 STEEL DECK
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 50 00
05 51 00
05 52 00
METAL FABRICA TrONS
METAL STAIRS
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS - STEEL
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY - BLOCKING
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 13 00
07 13 54
07 21 00
07 25 00
07 52 00
07 53 23
07 62 00
078413
07 84 20
07 92 00
SHEET WATERPROOFING
THERMOPLASTIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
BUILDING INSULATION
AIR AND VAPOR BARRIER MEMBRANES
SBS-MODIFIED B!TUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING - ADHERED
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
FIRE~RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
081100
0871 00
08 90 00
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
DOOR HARDWARE - SCHEDULED
LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 50 00
09 67 23
09 84 33
09 91 00
09 97 00
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
RESINOUS FLOORING
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS, METAL
PAINTING
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS. ALIPHATIC POLYURETHANE
DIVISION 10 - SPECIAL TIES
101400 SIGNS
102813 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
NO DIVISION 11 SECTIONS
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
NO DIVISION 12 SECTIONS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NO DIVISION 13 SECTIONS
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
NO DIVISION 14 SECTIONS
000110-2
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
o
u
o
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
DIVISION 20 - MECHANICAL
20 00 10
20 00 30
20 00 35
20 00 42
20 00 50
20 00 60
20 01 00
20 01 20
20 01 25
2001 35
20 01 40
2001 90
20 02 40
20 02 50
u
u
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS fOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
TESTING AND PROOF OF PERFORMANCE
BASIC MECHANICAL MA TERJALS AND METHODS
BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
VALVES
PIPING SPECIALTIES
EXPANSION COMPENSATION
METERS AND GAGES
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
VIBRATION CONTROL
MECHANICAL INSULATION
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 13 00 FIRE PROTECTION
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
u
22 11 16
22 1316
22 13 29
22 33 01
22 40 00
u
U
lJ
U
U
U
U
U
U
I U
I
DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS
SEWAGE AND SUMP PUMPS
COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
PLUMBING FIXTURES
DIVISION 23 -HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
23 05 93
23 09 00
23 11 23
23 21 13
23 21 14
2321 15
2321 23
232502
2331 13
23 33 00
23 34 16
23 34 23
233713
23 51 00
23 52 16
23 57 01
23 64 30
23 65 00
23 82 00
ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
NATURAL GAS PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
BURIED HYDRONIC PIPING
HVAC PUMPS
NON-CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
CENTRIFUGAL FAN
EXHAUST FANS
REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS
BREECHINGS. CHIMNEYS & STACKS
CONDENSING BOILERS
PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGER
WATER COOLED MODULAR CHILLERS
FACTORY-FABRICATED COOLING TOWERS
TERMINAL UNITS
0001 10- 3
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
000110-4
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
260500
260519
260526
260529
260533
260553
260923
262200
262300
262416
262419
262726
262813
262924
263213
263600
264113
264313
265100
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
I DENTIFICA TION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
LOW-VOL TAGE SWITCHGEAR
PANELBOARDS
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
WIRING DEVICES
FUSES
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS INSTALLATION ONLY
ENGINE GENERATORS
TRANSFER SWITCHES
LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
INTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
270500
271100
271500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUN ICA TIONS
COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
280500
280513
283111
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETYAND SECURITY
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
31 20 00 EARTHWORK
31 2319 DEWATERING
315900 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
329300 GRAVEL PAVING
DIVISION 33 -UTILITIES
331000 WATER DISTRIBUTION
333000 SANITARY SEWERAGE
334000 STORM DRAINAGE
334600 SUBDRAINAGE
u
o
[j
u
u
u
u
o
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
(J)
t-
Z
w
:?E
w
0::
-
;:)
a
w
"
C)
z
-
c
c
-
m
u
o
u
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
00 21 00 - 1
SECTION DO 21 00 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section inclL1des the Instructions to Bidders, AlA Document A70i. The Instructions
to Bidders followsthfs page.
u
U
1-'
U
U
o
U
o
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
u
u
_AlA Document A70r" - 1997
u
Instructions to Bidders
u
u
for the following PROJECT:
(Name and location or address):
I lest
u
DEFINITIONS
2 BioDER'S'REPRE$ENT AllONS
BtoDING])(ijCUMENT S
ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS:
The author of this document has
added information needed for its
completion. The author may also
have revised Ihe text of the
original AlA standard form. An
AMnions and Deletions Report
thaI notes added information as
well as revisions to the standard
form text is available trom the
author and should be reviewed
A vertical line in the left margin of
this document indicates where
the author has added necessary
inlormation and where the author
has added to or deleted from the
original AlA text
u
THE OWNER:
(Name and address):
u
THE ARCHITEqT:
(Name and add;ess):
o
u
TABLE OF ARTICLES
4
BIDDING;PROC~OURES
This document has important
legal consequences.
Consultation with an attorney
is encouraged with respect 10
its completion or modification.
u
3
u
5
.. .
CONSIOERAtlON OF Blm~<
POST~BIDINFORMATION
6
u
7
PERFORMANCE B!DNDYANOPA~MENT BOND
. .'''.''1 --"
8 FORM OF AGREEMEN'TSETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
u
u
u
u
u
u
AlA Document A70l rM ~ 1997. Copyright @ 1970; 1974, 1978. 1987 and 1997 by The American Inslitul~ of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:
This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law. and Internalional Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction O~ distribution of this AlA".
Document, or any portion 01 ii, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to ihe ma~imum extent possible under the
law. This document was produced by AIA.soltware al 16:31 :21 on 03!23i20lY-> under Order No.1000162578_1. which explres an 2116/2006. and is not for
resale.
User Notes: ~3038537743i
o
ARTICLE 1 DEFINmONS 0
91.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed ContraCt Documents. The Bidding
Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation io Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions
to'Bidders, the bidJorm, and other sample bidding and contract forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist of 0
the.form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the ContraCt (General"Suppiementary and
other Conditions), OTawings, Specifications and all Addendaissuec.l prior to execution of the ContracL
~4;.2'Definitionsset forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AlA Document A20 I, or in 0
other CcintractDocuments are applicable to the Bidding Documents.
!il.3 Addenda are wriUen,or graphic instmrnents issued by the Architect prior to the execUtion of the Contract which 0
modify or i!Jiefpret ttiel~idding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections.
'!i1;4 A BId is acomplete.and properly executcd proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulaled therein, submitted 0
;iriJ~ccordance 'witlitbe Bidding Documents.
: '9'1'.5 Tl!i:Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work describe.d in the
'Blddi}lg:.:JDocumentsas tbebase, to which Work. may he added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated 0
in Alteh!*B~M
~;~1:6'~ Alternate Bid (or. Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to.or deducted from the amount of 0
'tlie;,Base Bid,i' the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted.
~i1S-7 A Uriil Priceis'an amount SLated in the Bid asa pnceper unit of measurement for materials. equipment or
servic~s(Jrap:ortionofthe Work as described in the Bidding Documents. 0
'gl.8'lk..a;iljder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding
Docuffi~f1~:
~A;!l{\ Sub-,bidder isa person or entity who submits a bid 10 a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a,portion 0
Qf;th~"-Wp..f .
.." .---.- - .
'ABTI~~E:2 ~rDD~i:S"REPRESENT 8IjQN~
',;~j,~;theB'idderby,making a Bid;~~pii~~ilts that:
J~j~"1.t,!~~:Bidd.er ~ read andun9~r#,mds the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents, to Lhe extent that such
. ''documeIiJa.~ion relates;to,the WorkIor which the Bid is submitted, and for other portions of the Project, if any, being
'pi(j;co[]curtenily or'j?resently. under constmction.
.~ 2i1:2"'p'?cJ3idis made incomptja*~~'.Wilh the Bidding Documents.
~;~i,~. tfi~'Bidder h~ visited the site. become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be
....p~~tr~ii!led<ill9 has ~lTela~d,*e Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the pI:Oposed Contract
Documents. '.
..~ 2.1.4 Tl1eBid..isbased upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without
<e;ception.
ARTICLE 3 BIDDING'IDOCUMENTS
~ 3.1 COPIES
~ 3.U,Bi!.lders..may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing 'officedesignated in.the
Adv~rtisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit su~, if any, stated therein. The deposit will be
re'futldeqloBidders who suhmit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten
days after. receipt of Bids, The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the
deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder's deposit will be
refunded<
~ 3.1.2 Bidding DocumenL<; will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the
Advenisement or Invitation to Bid, or in supplementary instructions to bidders.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
AlA Document A7011. - 1997. Copyright @ 1970, 1974. 1978, 1987 aM 1997 by Tlie.American.!nsliluleol Architects. All rights.reserved. WARNING:
This AIA3 Docmllenli$prQt~ledby U.S. CoMrighl Law.and Iniernalional Treaties. Unaulhofized reproduction ordislribVl,ionoJ this AlA"
Document, Dr any portion 0.1 it, may resuit in selfere civil andcrlminat penalties, and will be prosecuted 10 the maliimum'elttent possible under the
law. Thisdocumenl was produced by AlA software al 16:31:21 on 03123/2005 under Order No. 1000162578_ 1 which expires on 2116/2006; and. is not lor
resale<
User Notes: (3038537743)
,
0'
u
u
~ 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect
assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding
Documerits.
u
~. 3.1.4 The Owner and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms for the
purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work. No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding
Documents.
u
u
~ 3.2INTERPRETATIO~([)~ CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
~3~2.1 The Bidder shaWc.arefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other, and with other work
being bid con<;llITentlyYor,presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is
submitted, shall'exarhl~eFtfle site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors,
inconsisteitCies:or arri~jguities discovered.
l'
U
~;3~2.2 Bidders and Suli~bidders requiring clarification or interpreiation of the Bidding Documents shall make a
written request whichshall"reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids.
u
o
~ 3.~~:Interprc~a;ii()ns,'ii()rr~ctions and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum.
lnterpreta1ions,~oorr~ljpiis amI changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding.
and Bidders;shali notf~lyupon:i~em.
u
~c'3:3'SLlBs:rJrunON~.
~~3;;3.1 Thema.lIc:riills:' pr~<!u(';ts;and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of reqUIred
fUncticinydime'nsJon,'#';pe~ance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution.
" - . . ',.:~,' -
u
." . '.',
~ 3,3.2;N(}sUbslitu~ibn,wJIIl1~;Qpnsidered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been
receiv.~a.~~the,Atcht\~~<i!~J;:;iist ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name
of thell:ia~eIlill O[;~qWeWt;ntifor which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution
in.qll1~.ir~']grawi.ng.si~rl'offuance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement
settir\gr[9rth chang~' !JiefmateriaIs, equipment or other portions of the Work, including changes in the work of
otherc(jrifrae!Sfrlalir .' ~.m~tation oftfieproposed substitution would require, shall be included. The burden of proof
orlhe merit()fih~iI!~gsea substitu~9JiIs upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of
a'proplJsedslibsJJtution shall be finaL, .
~. t. "".
u
u
~;3.3,3 Iflhe&c@~t,~pproves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an
Addendum, Bidded s'haIl nottely'upon.approvals made in any other manner.
u
. .
~.3.3.4'.NQ':l;1J~~titUtioW>iwi'lI;be,consiaered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract
. Documents. ,. ....
u
. -
~ 3.4ADDENDA ......
~ 3;:4;~ Addenda willbe'tniusnUtted to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of
B i ddin g pocurJlents.
~ \
U
. . .
~.3.4.2 CopieSof:i\gcl.lenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents arc on file for that
purpose.
u
~ 3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum
withdrawing'tnerequest for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids.
u
~3.4.4.~eh Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the
Bidder shaUacknowledge their receipt in the Bid.
r
U
ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES
.~ 4J PREPARATION OF BIDS
~ 4.1.1 Bids shall bc submit.ted on [he forms included with the Bidding Documents.
u
AlA Document A701'" _ 1997. Copyright @ 1970. 1974. 1978. 1987 and 1997 by The Amencan hislilute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:
This AlA"' Document is prolected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized r!!produclion or distribution of Ihis AlA'
Document, or any portion ant, may result In severe' civil ..no criminal penallies, and will be prosecuied 10 Ihe maximum err!!nl possible under th",
law. This document was produced by AlA software aI16;31:21 on 03123/2005 under Order No.l000162578_1 which expj'!!5 on 2116/2005. and is nm for
resale.
User Notes: (3038537743i
~ 4,1.2 Altblanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed in a nonceiasable medium.
94(1:3 SUins shall be expressed in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount writlen in words shall
govern..
g\~;;h~'interlineations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid.
~4,1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter" No Change."
. ;~'!4';1.6 Wflere;two ormrirf'Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without
f,ofjl'ei,ture oflbe,bid se~~Y. state the Bidder's. refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids
-s.tipulated by.,the.Bidder.:The. Bidder shall make no additional.stipulalions on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any
other mariner. . . ,
.~4A.7 ~h C(lpY'Qf;theiBid'~pall state the legal,name of the Bidder and the nature of legal form of the Bidder. The
:Bjdderl!~anproYi~e,eVide;n~e~of legal authority to perform within the jurisdiction of the Work. Each copy shall be
"sigfl~'bythe personoLp~,sOljs legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall
fuq~.r.,~;ive the#~te ofijncd~ration and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submilled by a,n agent shall have a
cU;l;fe~t"power6fa.ttori1lifY~"*ched certifying the: agenl'S authority tu bind the Bidder.
-'". . - .
'~;4i':l'EnO SECqRITV'
:~~;2,i1 E~9hBid;SI1~llbe.llfc9Il?panjed by a bid security in the form and amount required jf so stipLiiated in the
'in.structlons to''Bl.q~tr']})Uder pledges to enter inlo a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid
. and:WIU~if requireq., onds covering the faithful performance 0f the Contracl and payment of all obligations
.arisiQg.(l:ie[~tirider',.~SliQ .' .' e'Bldder refuse. to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the
, ',amOt.i~t!~t\the I:ij1Y~~yCUril),r~"~h:be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not asa penalty. The amount of
.tht:'!~i~~~!(;iIDtysha1i nQ~\,*',:"oifejted to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 6.2.
~,4;t2~J~;a':surety'bo.O(h.s;required,it shaU be wrillen on AlA Document AJI 0, Bid Bond, unless.otherwiseprovjded
-', ---~''''';.':''-,-'- - '.., "-;~-' -,. . - -
j'ri);tJlelBiqding Qocuro,e!ll$;: i;l,ild the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surely shall affix to the
.b~6:~;'lrcertiflbd;~;pti~~jjt.cOpy of:~;!.power. ofattomey.
"'_ ,'.." ,. ,1"",. _ I,'"
. ;~4;2.3The Owner will have the::rigntto:retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered
until eitbet{a)tbe(j:ont.ract.hastie'en~xecuted and bonds, if required, have been furnished, or (b) the specified time
_hi:i4'~elllpsed'so"thabBii:ls I113'yibe withdrawn or (c) all Bids have been rejected.
: ,~,-..; .~- \
.~ Jt3!SUB!\JIISSIQN OF BIDS., .. .
.~(~,3.1'~il,~\>piesoK.rl:!e Bid;:\~';l>!d.:~efurity, ifany, and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid
:~ti~l,be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope_ The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and
;iSh'~I!;>e identifiedwith:~2P.f9j~ct name, the Bidder's name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of
the )Vorl< for whictiithi~Bi!i;~;-s,'~Prrlltted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be,enclosed in a
sep!:ir1tteinailing envelojie-,"Ii~th2the'notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof
'~;4.3.2 Bid,s shaUbedeposiled at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received
. after the time and,dateJor receipt of Bids will be returned unopened
~ 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids.
~4~~;4'Oral, telephonic, telegraphic. facsimile or olher electronicall y transmilled bids will not be considered.
.~4i4:rVIODlFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID
~4.4J ABid may not be modified. withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated ..time period following
the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submining a Bid.
~ 4.4.2 Prior to lhe time and dale designated for receipt of Bids; a Bid submitledmay be modiJied or withdrawn by
nOlice 10 the parly receiving Bids allhe place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
04
AlA Document A70pu -.1997. Copyrighl @.1970,197.4, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The Amencan Institute. of Architects. All rights r~e.rved. WARNING:
This AlA " Document is protec.ted by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties, Uriilulhor'led reproduction or distribution of Ihis AlA"
Document; or any portion oUt. may result In severecivit.and crimina! pef)allie.s, andwlU.be proseculedlo the maximum.extent possible under the
law. This document was produced by AlA sottware al 16:31 :21 .on'03/2312005 under Order NO.1 000162578_1 which expires on 2116/2006, and is nOl for
resale.
User Noles: (303BS37743)
u
u
signature of the BiddeL Written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be received, and date- and time-
sta~lIped by the receiving party on or. before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as
n<>,tt-o'f~veal the amount of the original Bid.
u
Sc4:.4:::rWithdrawn Bids may be resubmiLted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that
they ~ethen fully in conformance with these Instructions (Q Bidders.
u
fi4i4:4 Bid security, if required, shall be in an amount.sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted.
u
,e.;~TICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS
~;~~1 OPENING OF BIDS
l';dhc discre~on of the OWner, if stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the properly identified Bids
r:e:~ived on time willbe'publicly opened and will be read aloud. An abstract of the Bids may be made available to
,BIdders. '
u
u
~;~.2 REJECTION OF Bibs
The Q~r shan-haye theJight to rejeclany or all Bids. A Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by
-othe(data.required'by the Bidding DOGuments, or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is suhjecl to
rej~tion:
~1~.3\[A.CCE~AtdCEO(~F BlIl(AWARD)
:sj5"3(1Itistheintentofilie Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has been
su!)ffiinechin;accordance witlrthe requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available.
iihe OwnercslJ;jJLhave th-;rightlo waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid
.",,)Uc:;J;gjI~ the;0...mer's jU,dglnem, is in the Owner's own best interests,
u
u
u
.-
, ,~5t~:~.lJ!j~;0\VIJ~rshallhavethe right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically
',pr~Y-i~~~'iiqhe;Bidding,l)ocumen!s, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and
, A!:t~~~JeS;accepted.
u
. - ~:: - ~ "~;~;: '; .;(:: ...
:~~i~~~{~ PQ&T ,BIDJNEPRMA TION
'~1~~1)~eNt~cmOR'SQuAlIFICA TIO!'J.&:r~TEMENT
'jJl~ders tawhom.award"of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request, a properly
execu~ed;'MA..pocumenl A305, Cori1r<lctor' s Qualification Statemenl, unless such a Statement has been previously
requirea;~hg.'suhmittedas a prerequisite .10 the issuance of Bidding Documents.
u
~&.~'~JJ.V~.ER'S':HNANCIAL CApABILITY
.Tfie.~Wit~rshall. at the request of tpeBldder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than
s~x~n;~"i~~pm6r10 the expiration pf the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that
'f~c,iat'arningements have,been made to ful,fiJlthe Owner's obligations underthe Contract. Unless such rea<;onable
.. evid~e is fumished,the'Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor.
u
u
~ 6.,3,$UBMITTALS
. ..~ 6:3.1 Th~J~idder shall, as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents, after notification of
selection"forthe award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing:
.1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces;
.2 names of the manufacturers, products. and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and
equipment proposed for the Work; and
.3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to
a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work.
u
u
u
~,6;3;2Tne Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and
[espensibility af the persons or entities proposed 10 furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding
Documents.
u
96.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract. the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or
Architect, after due investigation. has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder If the
AlA D.ocumentA701n..- 1997. Copyright @ 1970, 1974.1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute 01 Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING,
This A14" Document is prol.eCled by U,S. Copyright law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribulion 01 this AtA"
Document, or any portion oldt, may ,esult in.sellere dllil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted 10 the maximum exlen: possible under the
law; This document was produced bv All'. software at 16:31 '21 on 03/2312005 under Order No, lOOOi62578_1 which expires on 2/1&12006, and is not lor
resale.
User Noles: P038537(43)
u
Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or.entiiy, the Bidder may, at the Bidder's option,
(1) withdraW the Bid or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustmctit in the Base Bid or
Alternate 'Bid, to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may acceptlhe adjusted
bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the eVent of either withdrawal or disqualification. bid security will not be
forfeited,
g:.6;~;4Personsand entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable
objection must be used on the W()rk for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written
consent of the Owner and Architect.
. "ARTlClE 7 iP~FORMft..N(aE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
;~f.7;t eOND{a~QUlREMENl'S .
g~M.1 If sfiprilai:ed in the Bidding DocumenlS, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of
tbe:ContJ;ac~'~nd payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual
sources.
~7.1.21fthe'filfTushiiJ.g ot:such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents, [he cost shall be included in the Bid.
If the (umishing,ofisuch"bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract., the cost of such
bondsshiur ~e'a~4ed to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum.
~H.3'lf th~~WI1er reqllires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder's usual sources, changes in cost will
beadju.sted'~iprovidedin the Contract Documents.
~'7.2TiIQE:0FIliELlYERY Jl;NDFORM'OF BONDS
~7.2;1'The ~.i'dd~r st,-aii,~eliver the required bonds to the Owner not later Lhan three days following the date of
execution of th'e Contract. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder
'~shall,:p.ri()r:.'tb coilliI1encement of the W ork, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds wiJl be
futnished,'~d del i.ve rcdin <lccordance with this Section 7.2.1.
~;7~L2';QllIeSS{)t!!(:rwiseprovided. the bonds shall be wriuen on AlA Document A312, Performance Bond and
Payment'Bond.Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum.
~J~2.3 The'bQfI(Js'shaH be dated on or after lhedaie of the Contract.
~7.2.4Tlie'Bi~~ef"sbalJ requirelhealtomeyciii-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf ofthe'surety'lO affix
lhereto a ceit]fiep,a.nd current copy of the power of attorney.
ARTIClE'8;;F,lDR.!VI OF AGR~EMENtBE:rwEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
tfnless;otli~i.wis~ required in the Bidding Docunients, the Agreement for the Work will be written on AlA
Document A 10 I, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Ba.sis of Payment Is a
StipQla.ted S!lill.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
ALA DocumenI'A701". ~ 1997. Copyright @ 1910. 1974, '1978. 1987 and 1997 by The Amencanlnstitute 01 Architects. AWrights, reserved. WARNING;
This AlA'" Documeni is prole<.:ted by 0.5; Copyright Law and International'Treaties. UnaLithorize~ rep<oduclion or t!islributio!1 onhi~ AlA"
Docllment;.or any ponion of ii, may result in sellNe. Civil 3rld'crllT)inal penalties, and wfH be prosecuted io the maximum extent. possible under the
law, ThiS dOcument was produced by AlA soIrware al 16:31:21 on 03123/2005 under Order No, 1000162578_1 which expires on 2/16/2006, and is not lor
.esale.
User Notes, 13(38537743)
o
01
u
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
00 42 00 - 1
C I
U
SECTION 00 42 13 - BID FORM (INSERTED LOOSE)
FOR (PROJECT): CARMEL CITY CENTER
ENERGY CENTER
CARMEL, INDIANA
u
u
u
u
TO (OWNER): PEDCOR CITY CENTER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY
770 THIRD AVENUE, SW
CARMEL, INDIANA 46032
BY (CONTRACTOR): SIGNATURE CONSTRUCTION LLC
21 WEST MAIN STREET
CARMEL, INDIANA 46032
Pursuant to notices given, the undersigned proposes 10 furnish all material and labor necessary to
complete the work according to Bidding Documents prepared by CSO Schenkel Shultz, 280 E. 96th Street,
Suite 200, Indianapolis, Indiana, for Ihe sum of
BASE BID:
$
(amount in words)
u
ALTERNATE BIDS:
u
u
The undersigned also proposes to furnish or to omit all labor and materials necessary to complete work as
required by the "Alternate Bids", as provided for in the drawings and specifications as follows:
Alternate NO.1 - Thermoplastic Membrane Waterproofing:
Add $
Alternate NO.2 - SBS Modified Roofing:
r- -;
u
U
U
Add $
Alternate NO.3 - Resinous Flooring:
Add $
UNIT PRICE:
, I
U
The undersigned proposes to increase or decrease Work, including all labor and materials, as required by
the unit price allowances provided for in the drawings and specifications according to written instructions
of the Architect and Owner for the amounts as follows:
u
u
u
u
Unit Price NO.1: Earth Removal from Site
$
ICu. Yd.
Unit Price No.2: Compacted Fill from Off Site
$
leu. Yd.
Unit Price NO.3: Geotextile Fabric
$
ISq. Ft.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
00 42 00 - 2
ALLOWANCES:
The undersigned acknowledges that the base bid amount includes the following allowances:
Allowance No. 1 - Record CAD Drawings:
$
(amount in words)
NAMES AND EXPERIENCE:
List names of the following and the years of experience in work comparable to the size and scope of Work
of this Project.
Job Superintendent
Years Experience:
ADDENDA:
The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda and agrees that this proposal includes all
items mentioned in such Addenda:
No.
COMPLETION OF WORK:
The undersigned guarantees, if awarded the contract, to complete the Work required for the Project within
calendar days"
BIDDER'S SIGNATURE:
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the Bidder (an individual) has hereunto set his hand this
day of
,200_"
(Individual)
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the Bidder (a firm) have hereunto set their hands this
day of
,200_"
Firm Name:
By
By
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
f'
U
u
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
00 42 00 - 3
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the Bidder (a Corporation) has caused this proposal to be signed by its
President and Secretary and affixed its corporate seal this
day of
,200_,
Name of Corporation:
President
u
u
u
u
u
u
Secretary
OATH AND AFFIRMATION:
I affirm under the penalties of perjury that the foregoing facts and information are true and correct to the
best of my knowledge and belief.
Subscribed and sworn to before me by
this
day of
,200_
My Commission expires
Notary Public
r
U
u
u
U
lJ
U
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
004316-1
SECTION 0043 16 - SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS. MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
1.01 SUMMARY
A. List Subcontractors, Suppliers or Manufacturers and Products to be employed on the
Project and send to Architect within 48 hours after receipt of Bids.
CONTRACTOR: DATE:
List Subcontractors and others proposed to be employed on the above Project as required by the bidding
documents. (To be filled out by the Contractor and returned to the Architect).
SPECIFICATION SECTION AND TITLE SUBCONTRACTOR, MANUFACTURERI PRODUCT
SUPPLIER
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
0301 00 CONCRETE REHABILITATION
033060 CONC FINISHES & SEALERS
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
042000 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
u
[J
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 12 00
0531 00
05 50 00
0551 10
05 52 00
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
STRUCTURAL STEEL
STEEL DECK
METAL FABRICATIONS
METAL STAIRS
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
06 11 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 13 00
07 13 54
07 21 00
07 25 00
07 52 00
07 53 23
076200
07 84 13
0784 20
079200
SHEET WATERPROOFING
THERMOPLASTIC SHT WATERPROOF
BUILDING INSULATION
AIR & VAPOR BARRIER MEMBRANE
SBS-MOD. BITUMINOUS MEM.ROOF.
EPDM MEMBRANE ROOF ADHERED
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
THROUGH-PENETR FIRESTOP SYS
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08 11 00
08 71 00
08 90 00
( ,
U
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
DOOR HARDWARE - SCHEDULED
LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
u
095000 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 67 23 RESINOUS FLOORING - BROADCAST
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 84 33
09 91 00
09 97 00
METAL ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
PAINTING
HI PERFORM COAT/ALlPH POLYU
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
101400 SIGNS
102813 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
31 20 00
31 2319
31 59 00
EARTHWORK
DEWATERING
EXCAVATION SUPPORT
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33 10 00
33 30 00
33 46 00
33 40 00
WATER DISTRIBUTION
SANITARY SEWERAGE
SUBDRAINAGE
STORM DRAINAGE
00 43 16 - 2
o
o
o
u
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
U en
~
[j z
w
U :e
w
U 0::
-
U :J
0
U w
~
U I-
U
U <t:
D::
U I-
Z
U 0
(J
u
u
u
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
00 70 00 - 1
SECTION 00 7000 - GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the General Conditions. AlA Form A201, General Conditions of the
Contract for Construction (1997) follows this page.
u
U
U
I
U
! \
U
u
U
U
U
lJ
r
J
u
u
u
f t
LJ'
u
u
r \
U
1997 Edition - Electronic Format
AlA Document A201 - 1997
u
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction
TABLE OF ARTICLES
u
I. GENERAL PROVISIONS
2. OWNER
u
3. CONTRACTOR
. [
U
4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
5. SUBCONTRACTORS
6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARA TE CONTRACTORS
u
7. CHANGES IN THE WORK
u
8. TIME
9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
I i
u
11. INSURANCE AND BONDS
10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
u
u
13. MISCEllANEOUS PROVISIONS
11. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
u
u
INDEX
Acceplance of Nonconforming Work
9.6.6. 9.9.}. 12.J
Acceptance of Work
9.6.6.9.&:2. 9.9.}. 9.1O.1.9.1O.}, 11.)
Access to Work
3.16, 6.2.1. 12.1
Accident Prevention
4.2.}. 10
Acts and Omissions
l2. }j.2. ).\2.8. ).18. 4.2.J, 4.3.8.4.4.1; 8.3.1.
9.).1.10.2.),13-4.2,1).7,14.1
u
u
Addenda
I.I.J, ).11
Additional Costs. Claims for
4.}.4. 4.).5. 4.3.6. 6.L1. IO.}
Additional Inspections and Testing
9.8.), 12.2.1.1).5
Additional Time, Claims [or
4.J.4. 4.}.7, 8.).2
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
}.I.). 4,9.4.9.5
Advertisement or Invitation to Bid
1.L1
",-HIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CON5[QUENCES. CONSULTATION WJrH AN
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT'D40I.
This dowment has been approved and
endorsed by The Associated General
Contractors of America.
01997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1991
GENERAL CONDITIONS Of THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
@ Copynghf 1911, 1915, 19l8, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, J967, 1970, 1976, 19B7, J997 by The
Americ'an Imhtute of Arctlifects. Fifteenfh Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotalion of its provisions without wrilten permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Stales and will subject theviolale to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Wa~hing'on, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright Jaws and will subject the violator 10 legal.prosecvtion. This documenl was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and (an be reproduced in accordance with your liceme without violation unlil
the dale of expiriltion as noted below. User DoclJment: 97a201.aia -- lfI1/2oo2. AlA license Number
1004325, which expires on 3131/2003.
u
u
u
Aesthetic Effect
4.2.1),4.5.1
Allowances
3.8
All-risk Insurance
1l.4.L1
Applications for Payment
4.2.5. 7;J.8. 9.2.9.3.9.4.95.1,9.6.3,9.7.1, 9.8.5,
9.10, IU.3, 14.2.4. 14.4.3
Approvals
2-4.3.1.3.3.5.3.10.2, ).12. 4.2.7, 9.J.2, IJ-4.2.
IJ.)
Arbitration
4.J.3. 4.4. 4.5.1,4.5.2,4.6. 8.3,]. 9.7.1, 11.4.9.
U-4-1O
Architect
4. J
Architect. Definition of
4.1.1
Architect. Extent of Autlwrity
2.4,3.12.7,4.;1.. 4.J.6, 4.4, 5.2. 6.}, 7.1.2. 7.}.6.
7-4,9.2, 9.J,i, 9,4. 9.5, 9.8.), 9.10.1, 9.10.), L2.1.
12.2.1.1).5-/, 13.5.2,14.1.2,14.2.4
Architect, Limitations of Authority and
Responsibility
2.1.1. ).).J. 3.12-4"J.12.8, J.I2.IO, 4.1.2.4.2.1.
4.2.2, 4.2.j.4.2.6, 4.2.7,4.2.10.4.2.12,4.2.13.
4.4. 5.2.1,7-4,9.4.2. 9,6.4. 9.6.6
Architect's Additional Services and Expenses
2-4, 1I-4-1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2. I}S]. 14.2.4
Architect's Adniinistration of the Conlracl
3.1.). 4.2,4.3.4.4.4.9.1.9.5
Architect's Approvals
2.4.3.1.3.3.5.1. J.IO.2. 4.2.7
Architect's Authority to Reject Work
3.5.1,4.2.6. 12.1.2, 12.2.1
Architect's Copyright
1.6
Architect's Decisions
4.2.6,4.2.7.4.2.11, 4.2.12, 42.l3. 4.3.4.4-4-1.
4-4.5.4.1.6.4.5,6.3.7.3.6. 7.}.8, 8.1.}, 8.].1, 9.2.
9-4,9.5.1.9.8.4,9.9.1, 13S2. 14.2.2,14.2.4
Architect's Inspections
4.2.2,4.2.9. 4.J.4, 9-42, 9.8.], 9.9.2,9.10.1,1).5
Architect's Instruction.<;
].2.3. ].3.1. 4-2.6. 4.2.7, 4.2.8. 7.4.1.12.1.13.5.2
Architect's lnterpretations
4.2.1l. 4.2.12. 4.].6
Archilect's Project Representative
4.2.10
Architect's Relationship with Contractor
1.1.2. 1.6, }1.3, J2.1, 3:2,2, 3.2.3. 3.3.1, 3.4.2,
3.5.1, ].7.), ).10, }.ll, ].12, }:l6, 3.18,4.1.2.1.1.3.
4.2.4.3.4.4.4.1, 4-4.7. 5.2~ 6.2.2,7,8:].1,9.2.
9.3.9.4.9.5.9.7.9.3,9.9. 10.2.6, 10.].11.],
U.4.7, L2. 13A:2. 1}.5
Architect's Relationship With Subcontractors
1.1.2, 4.,2.3. 4.24,4.2.6, 9.6.J, 9.6.4. 11.4.7
Architect's Representations
9-4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1
Architect's Site Visits
4.2.2,4.2.5.4.2.9,4.].4,9.4.2,9.5.1.9.9.2,
9.10.1.13.5
Asbestos
10.3.1
Attorneys' Fees
].18.1,9.10.2,10.].3
Award of Separate ContracLs
6.1.1. 6.1.2
Award of SubcontracLs and Other Contracts for
'Portlons oftheWork
5.1
Basic Definitions
1.1
Bidding Requirements
1.L1.Ll-7, 5.2.1, 11.5.1
Boiler and, Machinery Insurance
11.4.2
Bonds. Lien
9.10.2
Bonds, Performance, and Payment
7.].6.4.9.6.7. 9.1O.}, L[.49, U.5
Building Permit
],7.1
Capitalization
1.3
Certificate of Substantial Completion
9.3.),9.8.4,9.8.5
Certificates for Payment
4.2.5,4.1.9,9.].3,9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1. 9.6.6, 9.7.1.
9.10.1,9.10.3.13.7, 14.I.L], 14.2.4
Certificalesof Inspection, Testing or Approval
13.5.4
Certificates of Insurance
9.10.2, 11.1.)
Change Orders
1.L1, 2-4-1, 3-4-2, ].8.2.3. ).11.1, 3.12.8,4.2.8.
4.3.4.4.].9.5.2.),7.1.7.2. 7.3.8.}.1, 9.).Ll,
9.10.), 1141.2, 11.4.4. 11.4.9,12.1.2
Change Orders, Definition of
7.2.1
CHANGES IN THE WORK
J.n, 4.2.8, 7; 8.3.1, 9.].LJ, 11.4.9
Claim. Definition of
4.3.1
Claims and Disputes
}.1.3, 4.3, 4.4,4..5, 4.6,6.LL, 6.].7.3.8,9.].),
9.iO.4, ]0.3.]
Claims and Tin)ely Assertion of Claims
4.6.5
Claims for Additional Cost
3.2.],4.J.4. 4.3.5,4.].6,6.1.1,7.3.8,10.3.2
Claims for Additional Time
o
o
o
o
o
THIS DocuMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES: CON,' SUL, TATlON WlfH1J',
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGEDWITH
RESPECT TOm CONtpiH/ONOR
MODfFlCArl.ON, AUTHENrlCATfON OF THIS
HECtRONfCALL I' DRAFTED AlA 0
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT.D40I. .
rhisdocumenl NS been approved and 0
endorsed by The AHodated General
Contractors of America.
o
o
o
o
o
~-.
.i~J.'~
--cr-. - - - _.,....
.".111..
-
o
o
10 1997 AIA\\l
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIO.NS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
o
o Copyright 1911, 1915. t918, 1925, 1937, 1,951.1958. 1961, 1963, 19!i6. 1967. 1970, 1976, 19B7, 1997 by The
American Inslilute 01 Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reprodudionof the material herein or subslantial
quotation of its provisions witho!.!t written permissio!1of the AlA viola II's the copyright laws' of the United
Stales and will sybjecl the violate 10 legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violato'r to legal proseculion. This document was electronically produced
wilh permiHion of the AtA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license wiihout violation un Iii
the dille of expiration as noted below User Document: '973201.aia -- 7111/2002. AlA Liceme Number
1004325. which expires on 3/311.2003.
The American Institute of Architects 0
1735 New York Avenue. NW.
Washington, O.c. 20Cl06~5292
o
1
o
u
u
3.2.).4.3.4,4.3.7, 6.1l. 8.3.2,10.).2
Claims for Concealed or Unknown Cunditions
4.3.4
Claims for Damages
}.2.}. 3.18,4.3.10,6.1.1, 8.}.}, 9-5-1,9.6.7. IO.).},
11.1.I.1I-4.5. 11.4.7, 14.1.}, 14.2-4
Claims Subject tu Arbitration
4.4.1.4-5-1,46.1
Cleaning Up
3.15.6.}
Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period
13.7
Commencement of tht' Work, Conditions
Relating to
LU. }.2.1, }.4.1, }-7-I. }.IO.I, }.12.6, 4.).5,5.2.1.
5.2.),6.2.2, 8.1.2.8.2.2, 8.}.1, II.l, 11.4.1, u-4-6,
11.5.1
Commencement of the Work. Definition of
8.1.2
Communications Facilitating Contract
Administration
}.9.1, 4.2.4
Complt'lion. Conditions Relating 10
1.6.1. }.4.1, 3-11, 3.15,4.2.2; 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2,9.8,
9.9.1.9.10,12.2, 1}.7, 14.1.2
COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND
9
Completion, Substantial
4.2-9,8.1.1.8.1.3. 8.2.),9.4.2, 9.8,9.9.1.9.10.3.
9.10-4.2.12.2, 1}.7
Compliance with Laws
1.6.1, ).2.2, ).G, }.7, ).L2.IO, J.I), 4.1.1, 4.4.8,
4.6.'1,4.6.6.9.6.4,10.2.2, B.I, 11.4. 13.1,1)-4,
1}.).1, 1).5.2, 13.6, l.p.l. 14.2.l.3
Concealed or Unknown Conditions
4.).4,8.).1,10.)
Conditions of the Contract
l.1.l, 1.'-7, 6./.1, 6.1-4
Consent, Wrillen
1.6, ).4.2. ).12.8, ).14.2, 4.1.2, 4.34. 46.4. 9.3.2,
9.8.5,9.9.1. 9.10.2.9.10.3.11.4.1. 1}.2,1)-4-2
CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY
SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
1.1.4,6
Construclion Change Directive. Definition of
7.)1
Construction Change Directives
I.J.l. }.12.8, 4.2.8, 4.).9, 7-1. 7.3, 9.Jl.l
Construction Schedules, Contractor's
1.4.1.2.3.10.3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3-7-2,6.1.3
Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts
5.4, 14.2.2.2
Continuing Contract Performance
4.3.3
Contracl. Definition of
u
u
u
u
u
u
u'
[j
u
u
u
( I
U
u
u
1.1.2
CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR
SUSPENSION OF THE
).4.1.1, 11.4-9. 14
Contract Administralion
).L3. 4, 9.4.9.5
Contract Award and Execution, Conditions
Relating to
3.7.1.3.10.5.2,6.1. ILL}, 11.4.6. 11.5.1
Contract Documents, The
1.1.1.2
Contract Documenls, Copies Furnished and Use
of
1.6, 2.2. 5.5.)
Contract Documents. Definition of
1.1.1
Contract Sum
}.8, 4.34, 4.3.5, 4.4.5, 5-2.3. 7.1. 7.3. 7.4, 9.1.
9.4.2.9.5.1.4,9.6.7.9.7.10.3.2,11.4.1, 14.2.4,
14.}.2
Contract Sum. Definition of
9.1
Contract Time
4.).4, 4.}.7.. 4.4.5. 5.2.}. 7.2.1.3. 7.). 7.4, 8H.
8.2, 8.}.1, 9.5.1.9.7. 10.3.2.12.1.1, 14.3.2
Contract Time, Definition of
8.Ll
CONTRACTOR
3
Contractor, DefInition of
3.1, 6.1.2
Contractor's Construction Schedules
l.,p.2. 3.10, ).12.1, ].12.2, 4.}.7.2. 6.1.3
Contractor's Employees
}.).2, ).4.3. }.8.1, 3.9,3.18.2.4.2.3,4.2.6,10.2,
10.3. H.l.l, 11.4.7, I,P. 14.2.L1.
Contractor's Liability Insurance
11.1
Contractor's Relationship with Separate
Contractors and Owner's Forces
3.12.5. ).14.2. 4.2.4. 6. 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4
Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors
1.2.2,3.).2. }.18.1, }.18.2. 5. 9.6.2,9.6.7,9.10.2.
11.4.1.2, 11.4-7, 11-4.8
Contractor's Relationship with the Architect
1.1.2. 1.6. 3.1.}, ).2.1. ).2.2. 3.2.3. ).).1, ).4.2,
3.5.1, 3.7.). 3.w,.3.n, 3.12, ).16, ).18. 4.1.2.4.1.).
4.2, 4.J.4, 4-4.1, 4.4.7, 5.2,6.2.2.7,8.3.1,9.2,
9.3.949.5,9.7,9.8, .9.9, 10.2.6.10.), 11.3.
11.4.7, 12,1).4.2.1).5
Contractor's Representations
1.5.2.3.5.1, }.12.6, 6,2.2,8.2.1,9.).).9.8.2
Contractor's Responsibility forThose
Performing the Work
}.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.), 4.3.8.5.3.1,6.1.).6.2,6.3.9.5.1.
10
u
rH15 DOCUMfNf HAS IMPORfANr LEGAL
CONSEQUfNCES. CONSUL TAT/ON WIfH AN
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
. RESPECT TO 115 COMPlEf/ON OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
HECTRONlCAU Y DRAFrED AlA
DOCUMENf MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
This document hilS been approved and
endorsed by The Associated General
Contracton of America.
-
~-
......-..~
81'.-'"",
--
019'}7 AlA...
AlA DOCUMENT A101 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
@ COPYrlghr 1911, 1915, 1918. 1915, 1937, J951. 1958, 1961, 1963. 1966, t967. 1970. 1976. 1987, 1997 by The
Amer!can Insfilute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reprodu<tion of the malerial herein or subslanlial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without writt.en permission oflhe AIAviulates the copyright laws of the Uniled 1735 New York Avenue. N.W.
Slales and will subject the violate to legal prosecutioll. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates u.s. Washinglon. D.C. 20006.5291
copyright laws ;lnd will subject the viol.alor to legal proseculion. This document was electronically produced
with permission of Ihe AlA and can be reproduced in .accordance with your license without violalion unlil
the dale of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a20l.aia -. 711112002. AlA license Number
1004325. which expires on 3/3112003.
J
J
3
Contractor's Review of Contract Documents
1.5.2,.3-2, J-7.3
Contractor's Right to Stop the Work
9.7
Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract
4.3.10, 14.1
Contractor's Submitlals
].10,3-11, ).12. 4:2.7, 5.2-1. 5-2.J. 7-3.6,9.2,9.3.
9.8.2.9.8.3.9-9_1,9.10.2.9.10-3, II-l.}. 11.5.2
Contractor's Superintendent
).9; 10_2.6
Contractor's Supervision and Construction
Pmcedures
1-2.2.3.3.3.4. 3.11..10.4.2_2. 4.2.7,4.).],6-LJ,
6.2-4.7-1.3. 7.3.4. 7-3-6, 8~2. to. 12. 14
Contratttialliability Insurance
1i.1.l.8.IU, n.3
Coordination and Correlation
1-2.1.5-2.3.3.1. ),10, 3.12.6. 6.1.3,6.2.1
Copies Furnished of Drawings and
Specifications
1_6.2_2.5. ).11
Copyrights
1.6.3.17
Correction of Work
1..3. 2-4. 3.7-4. 4.2.1, 9-4.2. 9.8.2. 9.8.). 9.9-1.
12_1-2,12.2.13.7.1-)
Correlation and Intent of the Contract
Documents
1.2
Cost. Definition of
7.3.6
Costs
2-4.3.2-3. )I4. 3.8.2. ).15.2. 4-]. 5-4.2. 6.1.1,
6_2.],7.3_3_3,7.).6,7.3-7.7-3-8,9.10.2,10_)_2.
10.5. 11.).11.4.12_1.12.2-1.12.2-4.1)-5,14
Cutting and Patching
6.2.5.3.14
Damage 10 Construction of Owner or Separate
Conlractors
3.14.2,6.2.4.9_2.1.5.10.2.1.2.10.1_5,10.6,11.1,
11.4. 12.2.4
Damage to the Work
].14.2,9.9.1,10.2.1.2.10.2.5,10.6.11-4,12.2.4
Damages. Claims for
3.2.3.3.18,4.).10, 6.Ll. 8.).3. 9SI, 9.6.7. 10.3'3,
11.1-1,11.4.5. 11-4,7. 14.1.), 14.2-4
Damages for Delay
6.1.1,8.).),9-5'1-6,9.7, 10.)-2
Dale of Commencement of the Work,
Definition of
8.1.2
Date of Substantial Completion. Definition of
8.1.)
Day. Definition of
~-1.4
Decisions ofthe Architect
4:2.6,4_2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2-1).4.3.4.4-4.1,
4.4.5,4-4-6,4.5.6.3. 7.J.6. 7.3-8. 8.!.}, 8.3-1, 9.2.
9.4,9_5.1,9.8.;4.9.9.1.1),5.2,14.2.2.I,p.4
Decisions to Withhold Certification
941. 9.5.9.7. 14.1.1.)
Defective or Nonconforming Work. Acceplance.
Rejection and Correctiori of
2.). '2-4.3.5-1,4.1_6, 6.2.5,9.5.1.9-5.2,9.6.6,
9.8.2.9.9.3.9-10.4. 12.2.1. 1).7-1.)
Defective Work, Definition of
}.5.1
Definitions
1:1.2.1.1. ).1, }.5.1, 3.12.1, J.I2.2., 3-12.}, 4.1.1.
4.J.I, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7-2.1.7.).1,7.3-6,8.1. 9.1,9.8.1
Delays and Extensions of Time
3.2.}, ....J-l. 4.3.4. 4.).7, 4.4.5. 5.2.J. 7.2:1. 7.).1.
7-4.1.7.5.1,8.3.9.5.1,9.7.1,10.).1. 10.6.1. 14.J.2
Disputes
4.1.4.4.),4.4.45.4.6, 6.}, 7.)_8
Documents and Samples at the SiLc
3.11
Drawings. Definition of
1.1.5
Drawings and Specifications, Use and
Ownership of
1.1.1..1.),2.2.5; ).11, 5.)
Effective Dale oflnsurance
8.2.2. n.1.2
Emergencies
4.),5, 10.6, 14.1.L2
Employees, Contractor's
3.)_2. ).4.3. 3.8.1. ).9. 3-18.2, 4.2.}, 4.2.6. JQ.2.
1O.).lU.I. tL4.7. 14.1.14.2.1.1
Equipment, Labor, Materials and
1.1.3.1.1.6, }.4. }.5.1, 3.8_2. 3,8.}. J.12, 3.i). ).15.1.
4:1.6,4.2.7.5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.).2.9.3.3.
9.5.1.3.9.10.2,10.2.1,10.2-4.14.2.1.2
Execution and Progress of the Work
1.1.),1.2.1. L2.2. 2.2.).2.2.5. )-1. 3-), 3-4,3.5, }.7.
3.10, ).12, )_14,4:2.2,4.2.), 4.].}. 6.2.2. 7.1.).
7;3.4.8.2,9.5,9.9.1,IO.2,1O.),12.2,14.1,14.}
Extensions of Time
)~2,). 4.3-1. 4.).4. 4.).7. 4.4-5.5.2.3,7.2_1, 7.J,
7_4_1.9.5.1.9.7.1,10_).2,10.6.1,14.).2
Failure of Pay merit
4.3.6,9.5-1.3,9.7,9.10.2.14.1.1.3,14.2-1.2,1).6
Faulty Wbr!<-
(See:Defe~tive or Nonconforming Work)
Final Completion and Final Payment
4.2.1,4-2.9, 4.}.2, 9_8.2. 9.10. 11.1.2, 11.1.3. 11-4,1,
n.4-5. 12.3.1, 1}.7. 14.2.4. 14.4.)
Finaricial Arrangemerls, Owner's
2.2..1. 1).2.2. 14.1.1.5
Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance
11.4
GENERAL PR'OVISIONS
o
o
o
o
o
nus DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT UGAL
CON5E.OUENCfS. CONSULTATION WlrH MO
ATTORNfY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO iTS COMPLH/ON OR "-
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF TI-I/5
fLfURONICAUY DRAFTfD AlA 0
DOCUMENT MAY Bf MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENTD401_ .
This dbwmenthas been approved and 0
endorsed by The Associared General
(ontracton of America.
o
o
o
"
I
U
[
[
[
01997 ^IA~ [
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997 .
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
@ Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963,1966, 1967. 1970, 1976, 19B7, 1997 by The
American Institute at Architects, Fifteenth Edition_ Reproduction of the material here,in or substantial
qlloiation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws oflhe United
States and will subject .he violate to. legal prosecution. WARNING: .Unlicensed phdlocopymg violales U.S.
copyrighllaws and will subject the violator 10 legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
wilh permission of the ALA and {an be reproduced in accordance wilh your license withoul violation until
the date of expiration as noled below User Document: 97a201.aia .. 7/11/2002. AlA license Number
1004325. which expires on 3r3111003_
The American Institute of Archilects [
1735 New York Avenue, N.W. ,
Washington. O.C 20006-5292
[
4
[
u
u
1
Governing Law
13.1
Guarantees (See Warranty)
Hi11'..ardous Materials
LO.2.4. 10.3,10.)
Identification of Contract Documents
1.5.1
Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers
5.2.1
Indemnification
].17.3.18,9.10.2,10.].3,10.5.11.4.1-1.11.4.7
Information and Services Required orthe Ovmer
2.1.2,2.2, ].2.1, J.I2.4, } 12.10, 4.2.7, 4.].J, 6.L],
6.1.'4,6.2.5,9.3.2, 9,6.J, 9.6.4. 9.9.2. 9.JO:],
10;].], 1l.2, 11.4.1].5.1,1].5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4
Injury or Damage to Person or Property .
4.3:8, 10.2. 10.6
Inspections
].1.], ).3.3. 3II, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9. 94.2. 9.8.2.
9.8.3.9.9.2,9.10.1,12.2.1.13.5
Instructions to Bidders
1.1.1
Instructions to the Contractor
3.2.],3.].1, ].8.1, 4.2.8,5.2.1.7,12. 8.:u. 13.5.2
Insurance
3-18.1. 6.1.1,7.3.6,8.21.9.3.2,9.8.4, 9.91,
9.10.2. 9.10.5, 11
Insurance, Boiler and Machinery
11.4.2
Insurance, Contractor's Liability
11.1
Insurance. Effective Date of
8.2.2,II.L2
Insurance, Loss of Use
11.4.)
Imurance, Owner's Liability
n.2
Insurance, Project Management Proteclive
Liability
II.]
Insurance, Property
10.2.5. 11.4
Insurance. Stored Materials
9.3.2.11.4.1.4
INSURANCE AND BONDS
11
Insurance Companies, Consent 10 Paltial
Occupancy
9.9.1,1).4.1.5
'Insurance Companies. $elllement with
11.4.10
Intent of the Contract Documents
1.2.1, 4.2-7. 4.2.12l 4.2.1]. 7-4
tnterest
u
u
u
u'
u
u
[ ,
J
u
u
I I
U
u
u
u
u
13.6
Interpretation
1.2.], 1.4, 4.l.I. 4)1, 5.1.6.1.2.8.1.4
Interpretalions.W rinen
4.2.11,4.2.12,4.).6
Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required
4.6.4
Judgn1.ent on Final Award
4.6.6
Labor and Materials. Equipment
LI.). 1.1.6, 3.4. ].5.1, 3.8.2. 3.8.]. J 12. ].1],
).15.1.42.6,4.2.7.5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.).
9.5.1.}, 9;10'2. 10.2.1, 10.2.4.14.2.1.2
Labor Disputes
8.3.1
Laws and Regulations
1.6, }.2.2. ).6. ).7, ].12.10, ].I}, 4.1.1. 4.4.8,4.6.
9.6.4.9.9.1,10.2.2.11.1,1).4.13.1, 13.4.1)'5.1..
1].5.2, 1):6. 14
Liens
2.1.2,4.4.8,.8.2.2. 9.}.). 9.10
Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder.
4.6.4
Limitations, Statutes of
4.6.), 12.2.6,1].7
Limitations of Liability
1.], ).2.1.3.5.1. )1-3.3.12.8, ).12.10, ].17, 3.18.
4.2.6,4.2.7,4;2.12.6.2.2.9-4.2.9.6-4, 9.6.7,
9.10.4,10.3.3,10.2.).11.1.2. IL2.1. 11.4.7. 12.2.5,
13-4.2
LimLtations of Time
2.Ll, 2.2. 2-4. 3.2.]. ).7.3.3.10, J.1I, ].12.5. ).15.1,
,1.2.7,4.),4.4,4.5.4.6,5.2,5.3, 5.4.6.2-4,7.3,
7.4,8.2.9.2. 9.J.I, 9.3.). 9.4.1, 9.5.9.6,9-7.9.8,
9.9.9.10, 11.l.]. IL4.1.5. 11.4.6. 11.4.10, 12.2,1).5,
13.7,14
Loss of Use Insurance
11.4.3
Material Suppliers
1.6. ).12.1. "1-2.4, 4.2.6.5.2.1.9.],9.1.2,9.6.
9.10.5
Materials, Hazardous
10.2.4, 10.). 10.5
Materials, Labor. Equipment and
I.I.J, 1.1.6. 1.6.1, 3.4, ].5.1, ].8.2. J.8.2), ).12, ].1],
).15.1,4.2,6.4.2.7. ).2.1. 6.2.1. 7.].6.9.).2,9.3.3,
9.5.1.3.9.10.2.10.2.1,10.2.4,14.2.1.2
Means, Methods, Techniques. Sequences and
Procedures of Construction
).3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2-7.9-4-2
Mechanic's Lien
4-4-8
Mediation
4.4.1,4-4.5.4.4.6,4.4.8, 4.5, 4.6.1, 4.6.2, 8.3.1,
10.5
Minor Changes in the Work
THIS DOCUMfNT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEOUfNCES. CONSULT AT/ON WITH AN
ArTORNEY is ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO irS COMPUTlON OR
MOD/FiCATION. AUTHENTICATION Of THIS
ELECTRONICALi Y DRAFTW AlA
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMfNT 0401.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodaled General
Conlr Jctors of America.
4) 1997 A1A(Il
ALA DOCUMENT A20l . 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
u
'" Copyrighl 1911. 1915. 1918. 1925, 1937. 1951, 1958. 1961, 1963, 1966. 1967. 1970, 1976. 1987, 1997 by The
American Instilule of Archilecis. fifleenth Edition. Reproduction of the millerial herein or substantial The American Institule of ArchiteC15
quolation of ils provisionswithoul wrilten permission of Ihe AlA violateslhe copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Slates and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violales U.S. Washington, D.C 10006-5292
copyrighl laws and will subject Ihe violator to legal prosecution. This documenl was electroriically produced
with permission of Ihe AlA aud can be reproduced' in accordance with your license without violation until
the dale of expiration as no led below. User Document: 97a20l.aia -~ 7!llnC)()2 AlA license Number
100'\325, which expires on 313lf2003.
u
u
5
I.U, ].12.8, 4.2.8. 4.3.6, 7.1. 7.4
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13
Modifications. Definition of
LLI
Modifications Lo the Conlract
I.Ll. LI.2, 31), Jll, 4.U. '1.1.1, 5.1.), 7.8..'1.1.
9.7, 10.).1. 11.4.1
Mulual Responsibility
6.1
Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of
9.6.6. 9.9.), 11.3
Nonconforming Work. Rejection and
Correction of
2.). 2.4d.5.1.4~1.6. 6.1.5. 9.5.1,9.8.2.9-9.),
9.10.4, 12.2.1, 1)11,)
Notice
1.2.1.2.).2.4, ).2.3.3.).1, J-7-2. )-7.4..).12.9. 4.3.
4.4.8,4.6.5. );2.1,8.2.2.9.7.9.10.10.2.2. 1t.1.).
11.4.6,12.2.2,12'.2.4. I).J, 1)-5-1. 1).5.2,14.1.14.2
Notice. Wrillen
2.),2.4, JJ.l. J9,):12.9. J.12.IO, 4.), 4+8.
4.6.5,5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7.9.10,10.2.2,10.), 11.1.3,
U.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2-4, 13.3, 14
Notice of Tesling and Inspections
13.5,1,ly;.2
Notice to Proceed
8.2.2
No~ices. Permits. Fees and
2.2.2,3.7, 3.1).7.3.6.4,10.2.2
Observations, Contractor's
L 5.2, 3.2, 3-7-3, 4.).4
Occupancy
2.2.2,9.6.6,9.8, II.4.1.5
Orders, Written
1.1.1,2.), ).9,4.3.6, 7, K:L2, IL4.9. 12.1, 12.2.
1).5.2, 14.).1
OWNER
1
Owner, Definition of
2.1
Owner, Information and Services Required of
the
2.1.2.2.2.3.2.1,3.12.4. ).12.10,4.2.7.4.)..3.6.1.3,
6.1.4. 6.2.5, 9.}:2. 9.6.L, 9.6-4. 9.9.2,9.10.3.
10.).3.11.1,11.4.1).5.1. 1).5.2. 14.LI-4. 14.1.4
Owner's Authority ,
1.6,2.1.1, 2.), 2.<~, 3.4.2, .3.8.1, } 12.10. J.14.2.
4.1.2,4.1.).4.2,4.4.2.9,4.).6.4.4.7. ).2.1. ).2.4,
5-4.1.6.1,6.), 7.2.i. 7-).1.8.2.1.8.).1.9.).1.9.).2,
9.5.1.9.9.1.9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 1I.}.I. 11.4.),
11410,12.2,2.12,].1,1].2.2,14.3.14.4
Owner's Financial Capability
1.2.1.13.2.2.14.1.1.5
Owner's Liability Insurance
11.2
Owner's Loss of Use Ins.urance
11.4.)
Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors
1.\.2! 5,2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4. 9.10.2, 14.2.2
O~ner's R,ghtto Carry Out the Work
2.4.11;2.4. 14.2.2.2
Owner's Right 1.0 Clean Up
6.]
Owner's Right to Perform Construction and La
Award Separate Contracts
6.1
Owner's Right .10 Stop the Work
2.3
Owner's Right to Suspend the Work
14'3
Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract
14;2
Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications
and Olher Instruments of Service
1.1.1. t6. 2.2.5. }.2.1. J.11.1. ).17.1, 4.2..12, 5.J
ParlialOccupancy or Use
9.6.6.9.9,1L4.1.5
Patching. CuLting and
3.14, 6.2.5
Palents
).17
Payment. Applications for
4.2.5,7.].8,9.2,.9.3,9.4,9.5.1.9.6.,3.9.;;1.
9.8.5,.9.10.1,9.10.).9.10.5, II.L3. 14.2:4. 14-4.J
Payment, Cert'ificates for
4.2.5,4.2..9; 9.3.3. 9.4.9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1.
9.10,1, 9.10.3,1).7,14.1.1.3.14.2.4
Payment, Failure of
4.].6. 9SI.). 9.7.9.10.2,14.1.1.3,14.2.1.2. 13.6
Payment,. Final
4.2.1,41.9.4.].2, 9.8.2.9.10, n.1.2, 1.1.1.),11.4.1,
11.4.5. 12.3.1. 13-7. 14.2.4, 14-4.}
PaymenlBond. Performance Bond and
7.].6.4,9.6'],9.10.3.11.4.9. 11.5
Payments, Progress
4.3.3; 9.3. 9.6,9.8.5.9.10.],1).6,14.2.3
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9
Payments to Subcontractors
5-4'2,9.5.1.3.9.6.2.9.6.3.9,6.4.9.6-7,11.4.8,
14.2.1.2
PCB
10'].1
Performance Bond and Payment Bond
7.).6-4,9.6.7,9,10.3.11-4.9, 11.5
Permits, fees and Notices
2.2.2,3.-7.3.13.7.).6.4,10.2.2
PERSONS Arm PROPERTY, PROTECTION
@ COPYright }91l. 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966. 1967, 1970. 1976, 1987, 1997 by lhe
American IhslitvteofArchitecls. Fifteenlh Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substanlial
quota/ion of its prc.visions without written permiSSion of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
Slates and, will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates V.S,
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document wa.s electronically'produced
wilh permission of the AtA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license wi!hout violation until
the dale 01 expiraliorl as noted below. User Dowment: 97a201.aia c_ 7/11/2002, AlA license Number
1004375, which expire>; on 3/3112003.
o
o
o
o
o
HilS DOCUMENfHASJMPORTANT LEGAL
CON5EOUENC,ES, . ca,' N5ULTA, nON WITH AiD
ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPfCT WIts COMPlETION OR -
MODIFICATION. AUTHENrlCATlON OF rHls
ELECTRON/CAli Y DRAFim AlA 0
DocuMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING NA
DOCUMENT 0401. .
This document has been approved and 0,',
endorsed by rhe AssocialroGener al
Contractors'oF'America.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
019'17 A1A0
AlA DOCUMENT A101 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
o
The Americanlnstitule'of Architecls 0
1735 New York Avenve, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006.5292
o
6
o
u
u
OF
u
10
Polychlorinated Biphenyl
10.J.1
product. Data. Definition of
].12. 2
Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings
).11. 3.12. 4.2.7
Progress and Completion
4.2.2, 4.J3. 8.2. 9.8. 9,9.1, 14.'-4
Progress Payments
4.].].9.3. 9.6,9.8.),9.10.3. 1].6, 14.2.3
Project. Definition of the
L1.4
Project Management Protective Liability
Insurance
n.3
Project Manual, DefUlition of the
1.1.7
Project Manuals
2.2.)
Project Representalives
4.2.10
Property Insurance
10.2.5. 11.4
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND
PROPERTY
10
Regulations and Laws
1.6,3.2.2, ).6. ].7. ].12.10, ].IJ, 4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6,
9.6-4,9.9.1.10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1. 13-4. 13-5-1,
13.5.2, 1].6, 14
Rejection of Work
].5.1,4.2.6, 12.2.1
Releases and Waivers of Liens
9.10.2
Representatiuns
1-5-2. ).5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.].], 9.4.2.9.5.1,
9.8.2,9.10.1
Representatives
2.1.1,3.1-1, J.9, 4.LI, 4.2.1, 4.2.10, 5.1.1. 5.1.1,
1].2.1
Resolution of Claims and Disputes
4.4,4.5,4.6
Responsibility for Those Performing the Work
3-3.2.3.18, 4.2.3.4.3.8, 5.3.1,6.1.3. 62. 6.J, 9.5.1,
IO
Retainage
9.3.1.9.6.2, 9.S.5! 9;9.1, 9.10.2. 9.IO.J
Review of eon tract Documents and Field
Conditions by Contractor
Lp, 3.2, 3.7.], J.12-7, 6.13
Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and
Architect
].10.1.3.10.2,3.11, ].12. 4.2. 5.2, 6.1.). 9.2. 9.8.2
j'
U
u
u
r I
U
u
u
u
u
,
.U
u
u
r I
U
u
Review of Shop Drawings. product Dala and
Samples by Contractor
).12
Rights and Remedies
1.1.2, 2-J. 2.4. ).5.1. ).15.2.4.2.6, 4.J-4. 4.5. 4.6,
5.).5.4,6.1.6.3.7.).1.8.),9.5.1.9.7, 10.2..).10.),
12.2-2, 12.2.4. 13.4. 14
Royalties, Patents and Copyrights
3.17
Rules and Notices for Arbitration
4.6,2
Safety of Persons and Property
10.2, 10.6
Safety Precautions and Programs
J.J.I, 4.2-2. 4.2.7. 5.J.I, 10. t 10.2. 10.6
Samples. Definition of
J.12.]
Samples. Shop Drawings. Producl Data and
3.11. 3.12. 4.2.7
Samples althe Site, Documents and
3.11
Schedule of Values
9.2.9.].1
Schedules. Construction
1.4.1.1. ].10, ].12.1,3.12.2,4.].7.2, 6.1.]
Separate Contracts and Contractors
1.1.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,4.2.7.4.6-4, 6. 8.3.1.
11.4.7, 12.1.2,12.2'.5
Shop Drawings, Definition of
].12.1
Shop Drawings, producl Data and Samples
3.11, 3.12,4.2.7
Site, Use of
].1], 6.1.1, 6.2.1
Site Inspections
1.2.2.3.2.1. ].).3. 3.7.1, '1.2. 4.3.4, 9.4.2. 9.10.1,
1].5
Site Visils,ArchitecL's
4.2.2, 4.2.9.4.3.4.9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5
Special Inspections and Testing
4.1.6.12.2.1,1].5
Specifications, Definilion of the
1.1.6
Specifications. The
1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.l.7. 1.2.2, 1.6.3.11,3.12.10,3.17
Statute of Limitations
4.6.3, 12.2.6,137
Stopping the Work
2.],4.].6, 9.7, 1O~3, 14.1
Stored Materials
6.2.1, 9.].2. 10.2.1.2. 10.2-4, 11.4.1-4
Sulxonlractor, Definition of
5.1.1
SUBCONTRACTORS
5
THl5 DOCVMENT HAS IMPOIlTANT UGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CON5lJLTAfiONWITHAN
MTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF Tl-nS
ELECTRON/CAllY DRAFTED MA
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY U5/NGJlJIl
DOCUMENT OWl.
fNs document has been approved and
endorsed by The Associated General
Contractors of Americi1.
~
01997 AIACI.l
AlA DOCUMENT A10I - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
@ CopYright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937,1951, 1958, 1961. 1%3, 1966, 1967, 1970. 1976. 1987, 1997 by The
American Instilute 01 Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the malerial herein or substantial The American Institute of. Architects
quotation of its provisions without wriiten permission 01 the AlA vio.lales the copyright laws ofll!e United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Slates and will subjecI Ihe violate to legal prosecution, WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, o.c. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the dale of expiration al noted below. Uler Document: 97a201aia -- 71l1/2002. AlA License Number
1004315, which expires on 3/3111003.
u
u
u
7
Subcontractors. Work by
1.2.2, ).}.2. F2-l, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.), 5.4.9.3.1.2.
9.6.7
Sulx:ontractual Relations
5.3, 54,9.].1.2,9.6, 9.10 10.2.1, 11-4.7. 11.4.8,
14.1,14.2.1.14.].2
Submillals.
1.6, ].10, ].11. ].12,4.2.7. 5.2.1, 5.2.],7.].6,9.2.
9.],9.8,9'9.1,9.10.2,9.10.), 11.1.3
Subrogation. Waivers of
6.1.1,11-4.5. 11.4.7
Substantial Completion
4.2.9, 8.u.8.1.], 8.2.J, 9-4.2,9.8,9.9.1.9.10.],
9.10.4.2.12.2, 13.7
Substantial Completion, Definition of
9.8.1
Substitution of Subcontractors
5.2.), 5.2.4
Substitution of Architect
4.1.]
Substitutions of Materials
342. ].5-1, j.3.7
Sub-subcontractor. Definition of
5.1.2
Subsurface Conditions
4.].4
Successors and Assigns
13.2
Superintendent
3.9,10.2.6
Supervision and Construction Procedures
1.2.2, 3.3, ).4, ).11.10,4.2.2,4.2.7.4.].),6.1.3,
6.2.4,7.1.3,7.].6,8.2,8.]1,9-4.2.10, 12,14
Surety
4.4.7,5.4.1.2,9.8.),9.10.2,9.10.],14.2.2
Surety. Consent of
9.10.2, 9.10.]
Su rveys
2.2.)
Suspension by the Owner for Convenience
14.4
Suspension of the Work
5.4.2,14.}
Suspension or Termination of the Contract
4.).6, 541.1, llA.9. 14
Taxes
3.6. ).8.2.1, 7.3.64
TerminaLion by the Contractor
4.3;10, 14.1
Termination by the Owner for Cause
4.].10. 5.4.1.1, 14.2
Termination of the Architect
4.1.)
Termination of the Contractor
14.2.2
o
TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE
CONTRACT
14
Tests and Inspections
3.1.3,3.3.].4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.).9.9.2.
9.10.1.10.].2, !l.4.1.1, .12.2.1,13.5
TIME
8
Time, Delays and Extensions of
).2.3,4.3.1.4.3.4.4.3-7,4.4.),5-2.3.7.2.1.7.].1,
7.4.1,7.5.1,8.3,9.5.1.9.7.1, 1O.}.2, lO.6.J.14.];2
Time Limits
2.1.2, 2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3.3.10, ).ll, }12.5. 3.15.1.
4.2, 4.]. 4.4. 4.5,4.6, ).2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.},
7.4,8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.].],9-4-1,9.5, '].6, 9.7, '].8,
9.9,9.10. ll.I.), 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4-10,12.2, 1}.5.
13-7,14
Time Limits on Claims
4.3.2,4.3-4.4.3.8,4.4.4.5.4.6
Title to Work
9.].2..9.].3
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF
WORK
11
Uncovering o(Work
12.1
Unforeseen Conditions
4.]:4, 8.].1, 10.3
Unit Prices
4.].9, 1.3.].2
Use of Documents
1.1.1, 1.6, 2.2.5, ].12.6, ).)
Use of Site
3.13, 6.1.1,6:2.1
Values. Schedule of
9.1, 9.31
Waiver of Claims by the Arch itect
1}.'4.2
Waiver oCClaims by the Contractor
4.).H), 9.10.5, 11-4-7, 1).4.2
Waiver of Claims by the Owner
4.).10. 9.9.),9.10.],9.10.4.11.4.],11.4.5, 11.4.7,
12.2.2.1, 13-4.2, 14.2.4
Waiver of Consequential Damages
4.3,10,'14.2.4
Waiver of Liens
9'10.2, 9,10.4
Waivers.of Subrogation
6.q. 11.4.5, 11.4.7
Warranty
3.5,4.2.9, 4.3.5.}, 9.}.}, 9.8-4, 9.9.1. 9.10.4,
12.2.2. 1).7.1.3
Weather Delays
4.).7.2
o
o
o
o
THIS DOCUMENr HAS IMPORTNtlT LEGAL
C. ONSEQU.ENCE5' CONSULfATlONWfTH MO.
A TrORNfY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO tTSCOMPUTIONOR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ELECTRONICALLY.DRAFTfD AlA 0
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT D401. "',
This document has been approved and 0
endorsed by The Associared General
Conrradors of America.
o
o
o
o
o
o
--
... . ."
...... -.......
-' . . .'-
.Al'~1II,.....
~
o
C1991 ASAtO
AIA.DOCUMENT A201- 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS Of THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
o
@ Copyright 191.1, 1915. 1918., 1925. 1937. 1951. 1958. 1961. 1963, 1966. 1967. 1970,1976. 1967. 1997 by The
American Instilute of Archirects. fiheenlh Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or svbslantial The American Instilute 01 ArchileclS 0
quotation of irs provisions wilhour written permission of the AlA violaTes rhe copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the vlolafe 10 legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed phofompying violate.s U.S. Washinglon, D.L 10006-5192
copyright laws and will subject Ihe violator to legal proseculion. This document was electronically produced
wi,h permission 01 the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until 0
,he date 01 expiralionas noted below. User Document: 973101.aia u 7/1112001. AlA license Number
1004315, which expires on 313111003.
8
o
@ Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1?87. 1997 by The
American Institute of Architecrs. Fifteenth Edition.. Reproduction of the rnaterial herein or subslantial The American 'Institvte 01 Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permissio!l ollhe AlA violates the copyright laws'ol the Unired 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will suhjeO the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S. Washinglon,O.C.10006-5291
copyright laws and will subject the violator t91egal prosecution. Tlii~document was electronically produced
wilh permission of the AlA and (an be reproduced in accordance with your jjcense without violation until
the dale 01 expiration as noted below. User Document: ,97a10Laia -, 711112001. AlA License Number
iOO4325, which expires on 3/3112003
u
o
Work. Definition of
1.1.3
Written Consent
1.6. ].4.2.3.12.8. ].14.2,4.1.2, 4.}.4. 4.6.4, 9.J.1,
9.8.5.9.91.9.10.2,9.10.3.11.4.1, 1).2,13-4-2
Written Interpretations
4.2.11, 4.2.12.4.3.6
Written Notice
2.). 2.4, 3.3.1, 3-9. 3-12.9, ].12.10, 4.3, 4-4.8.
4.6.5, ).2.1,8.2.2.9.7.9.10.10.2.2, LO.], 11.1.3.
11.4.6,12.2.2.12.2.4. 13.3,14
Wrillen Orders
1.1.1,2.3. ].9. 4.].6, 7, 8.2.2, 1'-4.9. 12.1, 12.2,
1).5.2,14.).1
u
u
u
ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 BASIC DEfINITIONS
1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor
(hereinafter the Agreement). Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other
Conditions). Drawings, Specifications. Addenda issued prior to execution of tIte Contract,
other documents listed in the Agreement and Modificalions issued ;liter execution of the
ContracL A ModifiGalion is (I) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2)
a Change Order. (3) aConstructjon Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change
in the Work issued by the Architect. Unl~ specifically enumerated in the Agreement. the
Contract Documenls do not include other documents such as bidding requirements
(advertisement or invitaLionlo bid, Instructions to Bidders. sample forms, the Contractor's bid
or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements).
u.
u
u
u
1.1.1 THE CONTRACT
The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the
entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations.
representations or agreements; either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or
modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a
contractual relationship of any kind (I) between the Architect and Contractor, (2) between the
Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub~stibcontractor. ()) between the Owner and Architect or (4)
between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. The Architecl shall,
however. be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contracl
intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's dutie....
u
IJ
, \
U
1.1.3 THE WORK
The lerm "\\lork" means the construction and services required by the Contrad Documents,
whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor. materials, equipment
and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.
The Work may conslilute the whole or a part of the Project
u
1.1.4 THE PROJECT
The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract
Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or
by separate conLractors.
u
u
1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS
The Drawings are th,e graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the
design. location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections,
details, schedules and diagrams.
u
1. 1.6
THE SPECIFICATIONS
\ '
U
u
u
THIS DOCUMENT HAS iMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
A rrORNEY is fNCOURAGED WiTH
RESPECT TO Irs COMPlfTrON OR
MODIFiCATiON" AUTHENTlCArJON OF THIS
fLfOROMCAl1 Y DRAfTED AlA
DOCUMENT MAr' BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT D401.
Thi~ documeni has been approved and
endorsed by The Auociared General
ContraCTOrs of America.
~.
,;,~~:.,
-". .- ......
, I." ...
--
01991 AlA'"
ALA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDIllONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
9
OWNEBSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER
INSTRUMf.NTS OF SERVICE
1.6.1 The DraWings, SpeciJications and other documents, includillg those in electronic
form. prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service
through which the Work tQ be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may
reLain one recoid set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontraclor, Sub-subcontractor or
materialor equipment supplier shalLoWll or daim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications C11997 AIA@
and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless AlA DOCUMENT AWl - 1997
otherwise 'indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authorS of GENERAL CONDITiONS OF THE
CONTRACT .FOR CONSTRUCTION
The Specifications are Lhat portion of the Contract Docunlents consisting of the written
requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and
performance of related services.
1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL
The ProjecLManuat is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding
requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications.
1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.2.1 The inlentof the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper
execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are
complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all;
performance by the ConLractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the ConLract
Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated
results.
1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and ,articles. and
arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in diViding the Work among
Subcontractors or in estabHsJling the extent of Work to be performed 'by any trade.
1,2.3 Unless otherwise state~ in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known
technical or construction industry meanings are used in the'Contract Documents in accordance
with such recognized meanings.
1.3 CAPITALlZA nON
1.3-.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (I) specifically
defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles ami identified references to ParagrapQs,
Subparagraphs and Clauses in the document or (J) the titles of other documents published by
the American Institute of Architects.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents, frequel'itly omit modifying words
such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," Dut the fact that a modifier oran
article i.~ absent from one statenienL and appears in another is not intended Lo affect !.he
interpretation of either statement. '
1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor. If either the
Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall
identify such unsigned Documents upon request.
1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor
has visited the site, becomegeneraHy familiar witklocal conditioils under which the Work is to
be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.6
o
o
o
o
o
T/-USlXXUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
C.ONSfOUENCES. CONS, ULTA rJON WITH AND
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TenS COMPLETION DR '
MODlHCArlON.AUrHfNfICArlONOf THIS
ELECmONICAU Y DRAFTED AlA 0
DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
This document has been approved and O.
endorsed by The Associafed General
Contractors of America.
o
o
o
o
o
~.
--
1L. . J"
~. ~..
--,;..II....~--
-..Il
o
o
o
@ Copyright 19 t 1" 1915,1918, 1915.1937, 19S1. 1958. 1961, 1963, 1966. 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The 0
American Institute of Architects. ,Wteenth Edition. Reproduction 'of the material herein orsubslantiat The American; Institute of Architects
quotation 0'( its provisions wit!1olJt written permissI9n of the AlA violates the copyright laws of ihe United '1735 New York AvelJue, N.W._
Stales and will subjeCt the violate 10 legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates US Wa.shington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the, violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronicaUy. produced 0
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in acmrHimce with your liCEnse wirhout violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97 a20l,aia -- 7fIl/2002. AlA License Number ..
1004325, which expires on 3/3l12003_
10
o
u
u
Ihem and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to Ihe
copyrights. All copies of Instrumenls of Service, except the Contractor's record sel, shall be
returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on requcst, upon completion of the Work
The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the
Architect's consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with
respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub-
subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this
Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific wriUen consent of the Owner,
Architect and the Architect's consultants. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors
and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce a.pplitable portions of
the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Archi.lect and the
Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the
Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory
copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other do<;umenls prepared
by lhe Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official
regulatory r~quirelllents or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be
construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's COllsulLanL'i' copyrights
or other resenred rights.
{ \
U
u
u
u
[j
ARTICLE 2 OWNER
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred
to througholltthe Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in
writilig a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect 10 all
maLlers requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in
Subparagraph 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term .Owner" means the
Owner or Ihe Owner's authorized representative.
u
u
2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the COil tractor within fifteen days after receipt of a
written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice
of or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such infmmation shall indude a correel statement of the
record legallille to the property on which Ihe Project is located, u.'iually referred 10 as Ihe site,
and the Owner's interest therein.
u
u
2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
2.1.1 The Owner shall, at the written requcst of the Contractor, prior to commencement of
the Work and thereafter, furnish to Ihe Contractor reasonable evidence that financial
arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Furnishing
of such evidencc shall be a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the
Work. After such evidence has been furnished, the Owner shall nol malerially vary such
financial arrangements without prior notice to lhe Conlraclor.
.u
u
2.2.1 Except for permits and fees, indudinr. those required under Subparagraph 3-7-1, which
arc the responsibility of Ihe Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure
and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for conslruclion,
use or occupancy of permancnt struc1ures or [ur permanent changes in existing facilities.
u
2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations
and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of Ihe sile. The
Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but
shall exercise proper precautions relating 10 the safe performance of Ihe Work.
u
2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contracl Documents shall be
furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness. Any olher information or services
relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work under the Owner's control shall be
I ..
LJ
Ul
@ Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937,1951. 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966. 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by the
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without writlen permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNiNG: unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subjecl the violator to legal proseculion. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the ALA and can be reproduced in accordance wilh your license without violation unlil
the dale of expirarion as noted below. User Document: 97a 20Laia -- 7/l1f2002. ALA License Number
1004325, which expires on 3f3112003.
lJ
r i
u
THl5 DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULT A nON WfrH AN
ArTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MOD/FICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
fLEemON/CAUY DRAFTED NA
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 040'.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Assod<lted General
Contradors of America.
~~.
~~.
---...............
--
C 1991 AlA""
AlA DOCUMENT AWl - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Archilecls
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
II
furnished by the Owner after receipl from the Contractor of a written request for such
information or services.
2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be
furnished, free of charge. such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals ilJ:j are reasonably
necessary for execution of the Work.
2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is. not in accordance with the
requirements orthe Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently [ails to
carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a wrillen
order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof. until the cause for such order
has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a
duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any
other person or entity. except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.l.J.
2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
2.4.1 If tlie Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with Ihe
Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from
the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and
promplness, the Owner may after such sevencday perio.d give the Contractor a second wriUen
notice 10 correcl such deficiencies within a three-day period. If the Contractor within such
three"day period after receipt of such second notice fails 10 commence and continue 10 correct
any defici!;ncies, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have,
correct such defieienvies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting
from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such
deficienCies. including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additioljal
services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by lhe Owner and
amounts charged to the COlltracl.or are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If
payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are hot s!Jfficienl to cover such amounts, the
Conlractor shall pay the difference to lhe Owner.
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity .identified as such in the Agreement and is
referred Lo throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term
"Contraclor" means the Contractor or lhe Contractor's authorized representative,
3.1.2 The Conlractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligalions to perform the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of Ihe Architect in the Architecl's
administralion of the Contract. or by tests. inspections or approvals required or performed by
persons other than the Contractor.
3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY
CONTRACTOR
3.2.1 Since theContracl Documents are complementary. before starting each portion of Ihe
Work, tbe Contractor shaU carefully study and compare the various DGlwings and other
Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work. as well as the informal ion furnished
by the Owner pursLiant to Subparagraph 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing
conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site
affectingiL These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction I>y the Contractor
and are. hot for the purpose ,of discovering errors, omissions; or inconsistencies in IhcContract
Documents; however, any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor
@ Copynght 191\, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937. 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970; 1976, 19B7, 1997 by the
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of The material herein or substantial
quotation of its,provisions wilhout written permission of the AlA violates The copyrf.ghr laws of the United
Slates and will subject the violale to legal prosecution. WARNING; Unlicensed pholocopying violates U.S.
copyrighf laws and will subject thevialalor to legal prosecution. lhis documenl was f'lectronically pfOduced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license wilhoutviolation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document- 97a20l.al3 .- 71l1/2002 AtA license Number
1004325, which expires on 3131(2003.
o
o
o
o
o
THfSaocUMENT HAS fMPORTANTLEGAl
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATJON WITH AD.
AnORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR .
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTlCATJON Of THIS
mCmOM~YDRMITD~ n
DOCUMEf'/T MAYBE MADE BY USING AlA~
DOCUMENT 0401.
This document has been approved and O.
endorsed by rhe Associated General
Con/radars of America.
o
o
o
o
o
-
~.
....... . :-". ......
,8""11"",
--
o
o
C1'l97 AJA@
AlA DOCUMENT A20l - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute 01 Archifects 0
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
.0
o
12
o
u
u
shalllJe reported pmmpLly to tbe Architect as a request for information in such form as the
Architecl may require.
u
3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be
reported promptly 10 the Architect, bul il is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in
the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless
otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is not required to
ascertain that the Contract Documents. are in accordance with applicable laws. statules.
ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations, but any nonconformity discovered by or
made known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect.
u
u
3.2.3 If the Contractm believes that additional cost or time is involved because of
clarifications or instructions issued by the Architect in. response to the Contractor's notices or
requests for information pursuant to Subpar~graphs 3.2.l and }.2.2. the Contractor shall make
Claims as proyided in Subparagraphs 4.3.6 and 4.37. If the Contractor fails to perfoflli the
obligations OfSubpar~graphs 3.2.1 and p.2. the Contractor shaH pay such costs and damages to
the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations_ The
Contractor shaH nol be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting fTOm errors,
inconsistencies ur omissi.ons in the Contract Documents or for differences between field
measurements or conditions and ll;e Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized
such error, inconsistency, omission or difference and knowingly failed to report il 10 the
Architect.
u
u
u
3.3 . SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
3.3.1 The Conlractor shail supervise and direct the Work. using the Contractor's' best skill
and attentloll.The Contractor shall be solely responsihle for and have control over construction
means, meLhods, techniques. seque"nces and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the
Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions
concerning these matters. I f the ContracL Documents give specific instructions concerning
construction means, methods. techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall
evaluate the jobsite safely thereof a[)d, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely
responsible for the jobsite safety ofsuch means, methods. techniques, sequences or procedures.
If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures
, may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and
shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further wrinen instructions from the
Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the
Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage.
r- 0
U
u
u
u
3.3.2 The Contraclor shall pc respunsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the
Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees; and other persons or
entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of lheContractor or any ufits
Subcontractors.
u
3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions uf Work already
performed to determine thaI such portions are in prop!:r condition to receive subsequent Work.
u
3.4 lABOR AND MATERIALS
3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide
and pay for labor:. materials. equipment. tools, construction equipment and machinery, water.
heat. utilities, fransportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution
and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not
incorporated or to he incorporated in tbe Work.
u
u
3.4.1 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consenl of the Owner, after
evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order.
u
u
@ Copynght 1911, 1915, 19t8, 1925. 1937, 1951. 1958. 1961.. 1963, 1966. 1967. 1970, 1976, 1987. 1997 by The
American Institute of ArchileCts. Fifteenth Edilion. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of ils provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws. of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal pr.osecuti6n. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
wpyrighf laws and will subject rhe violator '10 legal prosecution. This documenl was ele(tfonically produ(ed
with permission of the AlA and can be. reproduced ih ,lCcordance with your license w,lhouf violation until
Ihe dafe of expiration as noted below, User Document: 97a20Laia -- 711112002. AlA license Number
1004325, which expires on 3/3112003.
u
nos DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED W/TH
RESPECT rolTS COMPLITlONOR
MODIFICATION. AUTf/ENT/CATlON OF THIS
ELECTRON/CAli Y DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
This document has been,approved and
endorsed by The Assodated General
Con/raetors of AmeriQ,
-
:~.
~'J:':,..
....-. . -........
"4lJlll"i1lo
--
(:)1997 "'I^~
AlA DOCUMENT A10l - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The Americafi Institute of Archifecfs
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington. D.C 20006-5292
13
3.4.3 Tile Conlractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contraclor's
employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit
employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned,t() them.
3.5 WARRANTY
35.1 The Contractor warrants to Ihe Owner and Architect that malerials .and equipment
furnished under the Contract will be (If good quality and new unless otherwise r~uired or
permilled by the Contract Documents, that the Work wiJI be free from defects not. inherent in
the qualily required or permilled, and that the Work will coilform to the requirements of Ihe
ContraGl Documents. Work not conforming to these requirerilcllts, including substitutions not
properly approved and authorized, may be consid.ereddefeclive. The Contractor's warranty
excludes remedy [or damage or defect catlsed by abuse, modifiCations not executed by' the
Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and
tear and normal usage. [f requited by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory
evidence as 10 the kind and quality of materials and equipment.
3.6 TAXES
3.6..1 The Contractor shall paysales, consume~, use and similadaxes for the Work provided
by the C{lnlractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negoliations concluded,
whether ornot yel effective or merely scheduled 10 go intoef(ecl. ~
3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES
3.7.] Unless otherwise provided in the Contract bocuments, the Contractor shall secure
and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and
inspections necessary for proper execution and completio!,\ofthe Work which are customarily
secured after execution of the Contract and wh'ich are legally required when bids are received or
negoliations concluded.
3.7.1 The Contraclor shalt comply with and give notices required h'y laws. ordinances, rules,
regulalions and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.
3.7.3 It is notlhe Contractor's responsibility to, ascertain that the Contract Documents are
in accordance with applicable laws, statutes., ordinances, building codes. and rules and
regulations. However, if the Contraclor observes that 'portions of the Contract Documents are
at variance therewith. the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing.
and necessary changes shall he accomplished by appropriate Modification.
3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws. statutes.
ordinances. building codes. and rules and regulations ~thout such notice to the Architect and
Owner, the Contractor shall assume appropriate resp.onsibility [or such Work and shall bear the
costs attributable to correction,
3.8 ALLOWANCES
3.8.1 The Conlractor shall indude in the Contract Sum aU allowances stated in the
Contract Documents. Hems covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by
such persons or. entities as the Owner may direct. but Ihe Contractor shall not. be required to
employ'persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection.
3.8.2
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents:
.1 allowances shall cover the cost 10 the Contractor of malerials and equipment
delivered.at the sile and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;
@ CopYright 1911; 1915, 1918. 1925, 1937, 1951. 1958, 1961, 1963. 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The
American Institute of ArchileOs. fifleenth Edition. Reprodl)ction of the m,alerial herein or svbstanlial
quotation of its provisions without wrillen permission of the AIA.violales the >copyright laws of the Uriiled
States and will subject the Violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlieef:]sedpnolocopying violates US
copyright laws and will subject fhe violator to legal prosecution, This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be rep.foducedin aCcordance with your Hc-ense without violation until
the dale of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a20l.aia -- 711112:002. ALA License Number
1004325, which expires on 3f31f2003.
o
o
o
o
o
TlU5DOCUMfNTHAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
0.''0 fiSEOUENCfS.CON5ULTATfON WITH AD.
ATTORNEY,IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TOnS COMptfflON OR
MODIFlCAf/ON. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ELECTRONICALLY DRAfTED /VA 0
DOCUMfNT MAY Bf MADE BY USING /VA ,
DOCUMfNT D401.
rhisdocument has beM approved and
endorsed by The A.5Jodated Geoerill
ConfradofScof America.
o
,0
o
o
o
o
~
o
o
101991 AIAq,)
AlA DOCUMENT Al01 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT fOR CONSTRUCTION
n
U
The American Institute of Architects 0
1735 New York Avenue. N.W.
Washinglon, D.C. 20006-5292
o
14
o
u
u
.2 Contractor's costs [or unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation .costs,
overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts
shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances;
.3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances. the Conlracl Sum shall be
adjusled accordingly by Change OrdeL The amount of the Change Order'shall
reflect (l) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Clause
3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under CLause 3.8.2.2.
u
u
3.8.3 Materials and, equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner III
sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work
u
3.9 SUPERINTENDENT
3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendenL and necessary assistants
who shan be in attendance at the Project siLe during performance of the Work. The
superinLen~ent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given Lo the
superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications
shall be confirmed in writing. Other communicalions shall be similarly conflfnled on written
request in each case.
u
rr
u
3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit
for the OWller'S and ArchitecL'sinformatioll a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.
The schedule shall not exceed time linlits currenL under the Contract Documents, shall be
revised at appropriate interVals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be
relaled 10 the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall
provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work.
u
u
3.1O~2 The Cuntractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval. a
schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the' Contraclor's construction schedule and
allows the Architect reasonable tinie to review submittals.
u
3.10.3 The Contractor shaJI perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent
schedules submitted to Ihe Owner and Architect.
u
3,1'1 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
3.11.1 The Contractor shall Il)aintainat the site for the Owner one record copy of the
Drawings. SpeciflCalions, Addenda, Change Orders and olher Modifications, in good order and
marked currenlly to record field changes and seleclionsmade during conslruction, and one
record copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data. Samples and similar required
submillals. These shall be available to the Architect and shaH be delivered to the Architect fw
submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work.
r
,U
u
3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data 5pecially prepared
for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor. Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier
OJ distributor t.o illustrate some'portion of the Work.
u
3J2.2 Product. Data are iIlustralions, standard schedules, performance charts, inslruclions,
brochures. diagrams and other information furnished by the Contraclor to illustrate malerials
or equipment for. some portion of the Work.
U
I '
U
3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials. equipment or workmanship
and establish standards by which the Work wilt be judged.
u
u
@ Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925,1937, 195t1958, 1961,1963,1966. 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987-, 1997 by Ihe
Ameri~an .Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein Of substantial
quotation .of its provisions withoul written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States ,ano will subject the violate to. legal prosecution. WARNlf-lG: Unlicensed photoc:opying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal proseculion. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of eKpiration as noted below. User Document' 97a20l.aia -- 7/1112002. AlA License Number
1004325, which expires on 3/31/2003,
I U
THIS DOCUMENT HASIMPORfANT lfGAl
CONSEQUENCES. CONSUlTATION INlTH AN
ATTORNfY /S ENCOURAGED WITH
RfSPfCT fO /TS COMPLEr/ON OR
MODIF/CArtON. AUTHfN fiCA flON OF THIS
HECfRON/CAUY DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMfNr MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMfNr D401.
This dowmenr has been approved and
endorsed by rhe A5SCxiafcd General
Conrractors of America.
~...
l'J:f"
....." - - -, ......
......~
-
1:l1~~7 AIAI8l
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT fOR CONSTRUCTION
rhe American Institule of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, NW.
Washington, D.c 20006.5292
15
o
3.11.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submillals are not Contract
Documents. The purpose oflheir submiLtal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work
for which submillals are required by the Contract DocumenL<; the way by wnich the Contractor
proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the
Contract Documents. Review by tne Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph
4.2.7. Informational submillals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive
action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submillals which are not required by
the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.
o
o
3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve
and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submillals
required by.the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to
cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors.
Submillals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance wi~h the Contract Documents
and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action.
3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and simil.ar
submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified
materials, field measurernentsand field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and
has checked and coordinated Llle information contained within such submittals with the
requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.
o
o
3.12.7 The Contractor shall perfortI1 no portion of the Work for which the Conlracl
Documenls require subniittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar This document has been <lpprQved and
submiUals until the respective submittal has been approved by tlie Architect. endorsed by The AssociaJOO Genera!
Coritradors of America.
3.11.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor
shall not be relieved of responsibility fQr de\'iatiolls from requirements of the Contract
Documents by lhe Architecl's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar
submillals unless the Contractor has specifically informed lhe Architecl in writing of such
deviation at the time of submillal and (1) the Architect has given wriLLen approval to the
specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction
Change Directive has been issued authorizing the devbliori. The Contractor shall not be
relieved of responsibility [or errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or
similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof.
rHlS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUWCES.CON5ULrATJON WITHNO
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WHIi
RESPECT TO./TS COMPtLTlON OR -
MODIFICATION. AUTHENrlCAffON OF THIS
ELECTRON/CAll. Y DRAFTED AlA 0
DOCuMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT D401. . ..
o
o
3.11.9 The Contractor shall direct specific aUenlion, in writing or on resubmitted Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submiLtals, to r.evisions other than those requested
by the Architect on previous submiUals. In the absence of such wrillen noLice the Architect's
approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.
o
o
o
3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required Lo provide professional services which consLitute
the practice of architecture or engineering unless such servkesare specifically required by the
Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless tbe C.ontractor needs to provide such
services in order to carry outtheContractor's responsibilities for copstruction means, methods,
techniques, sequences and procedures. The ContraGtor shall not be required Lo provide
professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or
certificatiofJ;s bra design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically
required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the (')wner and the ArchiLect will
specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shaH
cause such services or certificaLions to be provided by a properly lil.'ensed designpro[essionaI.
whose signature and seal shall appear 011 all drawings. caJculatiolls, specifications, certifications,
Shop Drawings and other submillals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other
submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared b)' others,
shall bear such professional's wriUen approval when submiUed to the Architect. The Owner
and the Architect shall be enLitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the
o
-
o
o
(I CopYright t911, J9IS, 1918, 1925,1937. J951, 1958, 1961, t963. t966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by .The
American Institute cif Archilecls. Fiheenth Edilion. Reproduction of Ihe malerial herein Of- mbslanlial
quolalion of its provisions wi'hCluf writt~n permission of. the AlA violates ihe copyright laws of the United
Stales and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNtNG: Unlicensed photocopying vioJales' U.S.
copyright laws and will subjecl the viola lor 10 legal prosecurion. This doculT)ent was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA andean be reproduced in accordance Wilh your license wifhoul violation until
the dale of expiration as noled below. User Document: 97alO1.aia u 71lVW01. AlA License Number
1004325, which expires on 3/3112003.
101997 AIA~
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - t997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
o
The American Institute of Archilecls
l735New Yor~Avenue, N.W.
Washington. D.C. 20006-5.292
o
o
16
o
u
11
services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided the
Owner and Architecl have specified to Ihe Contractor all performance and design criteria thai
such services musl satisfy. Pursuant to this Subparagraph 3.12.10, the Architect will review,
approve or lake olher appropriate action on submiltals only for the limited purpose of checking
for conformance wilh informalion given and the design concept expressed in the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shaIl'not 'be responsible for the adequacy of lhe performance or
design criteria required by the Contract Documents.
u
u
3.13 USE OF SITE
3.13.1 The, Contractor shall confine operations at Ihe site to areas permitted by law,
ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site
with materials or equipment.
lJ
3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, filling or patching required to
complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly.
u
3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a porlion of the Work or fully or
partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by culling, palching or
otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or
otherwise alter such construction by lhe Owner or a separate contractor except with wrillen
consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably
withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate
contractor the Contractor's consentlo culling or otherwise altering the Work.
u
u
3.15 CLEANING UP
3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation
of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the
Work. the Contractor shall remove from and about the Projecl waste makri31s, rubbish, the
Conlractor's tools. construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials.
u
u
3.15.2 If Ihe Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner
may do so and Ihe cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor.
.Q
3.16 ACCESS TO WORK
3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work 111
preparation and progress whereverlocaled.
'"
.-1U
3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS
3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend
suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and
Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense
or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or
manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are
contained in Drawings, SpecificatiQlls or other documeniSprepared by the Owner or Architect
However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is
an infringement. of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss
unless such informalion is promptly furnished to the Archilect.
u
u
u,
3.18 INDEMNIFICATION
3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or
expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by
the Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 11.3, the Contractor shall inQ,emnify and hold
harmless the OWller, Architect, Architect's consut'tants, and agents and employees of any of
them frum and against claims, damages> losses and expenses, including but not limited to
iU
I
ft
o
@ Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The
Americanlmtitute of Architects. FiFteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of- its provi~ions without writlerl permission of'the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate 10 legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying viOlates US
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia n 7/1If2002~ AlA license Number
1004325, whii:h expires on 3/31/2003,
'U
u
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEOUENCes. CONSULTATION WITH AN
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO fT5 COMPlETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
fUCffiOMCAUYD~ITDNA
DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401,
This dowment has been approved and
endorsed by The Associated General
Con'raclors of Americil~
~.
~,.~
....... .-... .......
.,......
--
~1991 AIA(!.l
AlA DOCUMENT A10l - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Archilecls
1735 New York Avenue. N~W.
Washington. OL 20006.5292
17
aLlorneys' fees, arising out of or resulLing from performance 01 the Work. provided Lhat such
claim, damage, loss or expense is atLribuLable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or Lo
injury to or destruction of tangible property (oLher tban the Work itselO, but only to theextcnL
caused by the negligenL acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or
indiredly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether
or noL such claim, damage, loss (lr expense is caused in part by a party indemnified h,ereunder.
Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations
of indemnity which would othelWise exist as to a party or persoll described in this Paragraph
).18.
3.18.2 In claims against any person or clltiW indemnified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an
employee orthe Contractor, a SubconLractor. anyone directly or indirectly employed by them
or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnificatiun obligation under
Subparagraph 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages,
compensation or benefits payable by or for LheCont,ractor or a Subcontra.ctor under workers'
compensation acts; disability benefit acts or other etnployee benefit acLs.
ARTICLE 4 .ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.1 ARCHITECT
4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity
lawfully pr<icticing archiLecture identified as such in the Agreement and is reFerred to
throughout Llie Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Arcbitecl~ means the
Architect or the Architect's authorized representative.
4.1.'2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the
Contract Documents shall not be restricled, modified or extended without written consent of
the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shan notl>e unreasonably withheld.
4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a new
ArchiLect against who111the Contractor has no reas6nableobje<::tion and whose status under the
Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect.
4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OFTHE CONTRACT
.4.2.1 The ArchitecL will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract
Documents, and will be an Owner's representative (I) during construction, (2) until final
payment is due and (J) with the Owner'sconwrrence, from time ~o time during Ihe one-year
period for correction of Work described in Paragraph 12_2_ The Architect will have authority to
act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless
otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions o( the CunLract.
4.1.2 The ArchiLect, as a representative of Ihe Owner, will visit the Stle at intervals
appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's operations (1)to become generally familiar with
and to keep the Owner informed about the progress a.ndquality of the portion' of the Work
completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the O\Yher against defects a.lid deficiencies in the Work,
and (3) :to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicaLing thattbe
Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However,
the Architect wilt not -be required to make exhau,stive or contihuous on-site inspections to
check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or
charge of, !lor he responsible for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures, or. for the safety precautions and programs i!l connection with the Work, since
these are solely the Contractor's righLs and responsibilities under the Contract Documents,
except as provided in Subparagraph 3-3-1.
4.2.3 The ArchitecLwill not be r.esp{lIlsible for the Conlrador's failure to perform the Work
in accordance WitJI the requiremenLsof the Contraci Documents. The Architect will not have
control over or o:;harge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissiOns of tile Contractor,
@ C6pynght1911. 1915, 1918, 1925. 1937, 1951. 1958. 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970. 1976, 1987, 1997 by The
Amei-ican Instituie of Archiiects. Fiftee-nlhEdiriori. 'Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quota lion of its provisions without wriuen permission of I~ AlA violate,S the. copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution_ WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This doC\!m-enl was e!ecironicallyprodvced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license withou.tviolation unlil
the date of E>xpiralion as noted below_ User Doctllnenf: 97a201.31a -. 7111f2002 AlA license NiJmber
1004325, which expires on 313112003.
o
o
o
u
o
fl-ilS'DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANrtfGAL
CONSEOUENaS, CONSULrAnON WITH A.O
ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH ,
RE5PEGT TO(T5COMPUTfON OR .
MODIF1GA TION. AUTHENTICA nON OF THIS
ELECTRON/CALL Y DRAFrfD AlA n
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY U51NGAlAU
DOCUMENT 040', . .
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Associated General
Con/rado(5 of America.
o
o
o.
0,
,0
0,
~~.
~'.'f.~
........ ..:. - -..-.....
...1\1........
-
o
,0
131991 AIAIIil
AlA DOCUMENT 'Al0r - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS Of THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Architects 0
1735 New York Avenue, N.W. '
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
o
o
18
o
u
Q
Suucontraclors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or cntilies performing
portiolls of the Work.
u
4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise
provided in the Contracl Documents or when direct communications have been specially
authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through
the Architect about maLters arising out of or relating to the ContracL. Communications by and
with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with
Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor.Commullications by
and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner.
u
u
4.1.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the
Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for
Payment in such amounts.
u;
4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the
Contract Documents. Whenever the Architecl considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect
will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance ....'ith
Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and L).5.}, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
However, neither this authorily of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to
exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the
Archilect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or
employees, or other persons or enlities performing portions of the Work.
u
u
4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the
Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings. Product Data and Samples, but only for the
limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept
expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable
promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or
separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the ArchilecL'sprofessional judgment to
permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is nol conducted for the purpose of
determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities,
or for substanliating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of
which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The
Architect's review of the Contractor's 5ubmillals shall nol relieve the Contractor of lhe
obligations under Paragraphs D, J5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not constitute
approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any
conslruction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval of
a specific item shall not indicale approval of all assemhly of which the item is a component.
u
u
.u
u
4.2.8 The Architect Mil prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and
may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4.
u
4.2.9 The Architect will conducl inspections to determine the date or dales of Substantial
Completion and the date of final completion, Mil receive and furward to the Owner, for the
Owner., review and records, wrillen warranli~s and related documents required by the Contract
and assembled by the Contractor. and will issue a final Certificate for P.ayment upon
compliance Mth the requirements of the Contract Documents.
U
f
U
4.1.10 If tbe Owner and Archilect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project
representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities al lhe site. The duties,
responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth
in an exhibit 10 be incorporated in the Contract Documents.
u
4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide malters concerning performance under and
requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or
u
@ CopYright t911, 1915, 1918. 1925, 1937. 1951,1958; 1961, 1963. 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976. 1987. 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects, Fifteenth Edition, Reproduction of the material herein or subslantial
quotation 6f its provi~ions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
Stdtes and will subject the violate to legal pros.ecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying .violates us
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal proseculioll_ This document was electroniCally produced
wilh permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
Ihe date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia -- 711111002. AlA License Number
1004325, which expires on 3f3112003.
u
!"
U
THIS DOCUMEffT HAS rMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEOUENCES. CONSULTATION WIfH AN
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RfSPEcr TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIfiCATION. AUTHfNTICATlON Of T/-I/5
El.fcrRONICAU Y DRAfTED AlA
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMfNr 0401.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Associated General
Contrdclors of America.
01997 AlAe
AlA DOCUMENT A20l - 1997
GE.NERAl CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W,
Washington. D.C 10006-5292
19
Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time
limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable prompt.ness. If no agreement is made
concerning .the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in
compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by
the Architect to furnish such inLerpreLaLions until L5 days after wriuen request is made [or
them.
4.1.11 fnLerpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and
reasonably inferable from the ConLract Documents and will be in writing or in Lhe form of
drawings. When making such interpretations and initial decisions, the ArchiLect will endeavor
to secure faithful performance by both Owner-and Contractor. will not show partiality to either
and win not be liable for resu.lts of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith.
4.2.13 TIle Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effec.t will be final if
consistent with the inLent expressed in Lhe Contract Documents.
4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
43.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or asserLion by one' of the parties seeking, asa
matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension
of time or oJher relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim ft also includes
other disputes and mailers in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or
relating 10 the ConLract Claims must be initiated by written notice. The responsibility to
substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim.
4.3.2 TimeUmits on Claims. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after
occurrence of the event giving rise to such Cla.im or within 21 days after the claimant first
recognizes the condition giving rise toLhe Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be initiated by
written notice to the Archilect and the other party.
4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending firiai resolution of a Claim except as
otherwise agreed in writing Qr as provided ill S\.lbparagraph 9.7.1 and Article 14, the Contractor
shall proceed diligently with performance of the 'Contract and the Owner shall continue to
make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4.3.4 Claims for concealed or Unknown CO(l~itions. If conditions are encountered at
the site which are (I) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ
materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical
conditions of an unusuaL nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist
and generally recognized as inherent ill construction activities of the character provided for in
the Contract Documents, I hen notice by the observing party shall be given to the ot her party
promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after frrst
observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly illvesiigaLe such conditions and, if
they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time
required for, performance of any part of the Woik. will recominend an equitable adjustment in
the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at
tbe site are not materially different from Lhose indicated inlhe Contract Documents and that
no change in Lheterms of the ConLract is justified, the ArchitecL shall so notify the Owner and
Contradorin writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party in opposition to such
determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision.
If the. condilions encounlered are materially different, the Contract Sum amI Contract Time
shall be equitably adjusted, but if Lhe Owner and,Contractor cannot agree on an adjusLment in
the Contr~ct Sum or Contract Time, the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial
determination, subjecLlo further proceedings pursuanL to Paragraph 4-4.
4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cmt. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an
mcrease in the ContracL Sum, wriLlen notice as provided herein shall be given before
@ Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958; 1961, 1963, 1966. 1967, 1970, 191f>, 1987. 1997 by The
American Institute of Architecls. Fifteenth Edilion. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its. provi"siom without written permission of the AtA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution', WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.. This doc.umerir was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced Tn accordance with your liceme without violalion uhtil
Ihe date of expiration as noled below, User Document: 97a201:aia n 7/1lI2oo2 AlA License Number
1004325, which expires on 313 1/2003.
o
o
u
o
o
THIS DOCUMENT HA5IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSf.OUENCf.5. CON.. 5ULTATfON WITH AND
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WlTH
RESPECT ro ITS COMPLETfON OR . ,
MODIHCATlON, AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ELECTRONICAll Y DRAFTED AlA 0
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
This documenl has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodaled General
Cont! acton of America.
o
o
o.
o
,0
o
-
-
o
o
01997 AIAIi>
AtA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
o
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
o
o
20
o
u
-...
u
proceeding 10 execule lhe Work. Prior nolice is nol required for Claims rdaling to an
emergency endangering life or properly arising under Paragraph 10.6.
u\
4.3.6 If lbe Conlrador believes additional cost is involved for reasons including bul not
limited Lo (1) a WTiLteh interpretation from the ArchitecL, (1) an order by Lhe Owner Lo slop the
Work where the Contraclor was notaL faull, (3) a wriLten order for a minor change in the Work
issued by the Architect, (4) failure of paymenL by the Owner, (5) termination of Lhe ContracL by
Lhe Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) oLher reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in
accordance wilh Lbis Paragraph 4.3.
u
4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time
4.3.7.1 I f the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in:lhe Contracl Time, wriLLen
nolice as provided herein shall he given. The ConLractor's Claim shalt include an eslimale of
cost and of probable effecl of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a. continuing delay
only one Claim is necessary.
[J
u
4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim fur additional time, such Claim
shall be documenLed by dala subsLanliating that weather condilions were abnormal for the
period of Lime, could nol have been reasonably anLicipated and had an adverse effect on the
scheduled construction.
u
4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers
injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of Lhe other party, or of
others for whose acls such party is legally responsible, written notice of such 'injury or damage,
whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party wiLhin a reasonabLe time not exceeding
21 days after discovery. The nolice shaH provide sufficienL detail Lo enable Lhe other party to
invesligate the matter.
u
u
4.3.9 If uniL prices are stated in the'Contracl Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and
if quantities originally conlemplatcd are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or
ConslrucLion Change Directive so thai application of such unit prices to quantilies of Work
proposed will causesubstanlial inequily tu the Owner or CurHractor, Lhe applicable unit prices
shall be equitably adjusted.
u
.U
4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contraclor and Owner waive Claims
against each olher for consequential damages arising out of or relating to Lhis Contract. This
mulual waivcr includes:
.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income,
peofll, financing, business and repuLation, and for loss of management or
employee produCtivity or of lhe services of such persons; and
.2 damages incurred by the ConLractor for principal office expenses including the
compensation of jJersonnel stationed there, for losses of fmancing, business and
repuLation, and for loss' of profit except anlicipaled profit arising directly fiom
the Work. .
.~J
lJ
U
U
This mutual waiver is applici'-ble, without limitation, to all consequential damages due Loeither
party's terminalionin accordance With Article 14' Nothing contained in this Subparagraph 4.3.10
shall be deemed 10 preclude an award of liquidated direct damages, when applicable, in
accordance with the requiremenls oflhe ConLract Documents.
4.4 RESOLUTION Of CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
4.4.1 Decision of Archifect. Claims, including Ihose alleging an error or omission by the
Architect but excluding those arising under Paragraphs 10.3 through 10-5, shall be referred
initially to lbe Architect for decision. An initial decision by the Architect shall be required as a
condition precedent to mediation, arbitration or litigation of aU Claims beLween the Contractor
u
u
U'
!
I
@ Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925. 1937, .1951.,1958. 1961, 1963, 1966,1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The
American Inslltute of Ardiitects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quolation of ils' provisions without writtenpermission of the AlA violates the copyrighl laws of the United
Slates and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates US
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronkaUy produced
with permission of the AlA and call be repmduced in accordance with your license without violation unlil
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97alOl_aia -- 7/11/2002- AlA license Number
lOO4l25, which expires 011 l/3111003.
u
THIS DOCUMENT HAS JMPORTANT LEGAL
CQNSEOUENCES. CONSULTATION WlfH AN
A HORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT ro ITS COJllfPUnON OR
MOD/FiCATlON. AUTHENTICATION Of THIS
ELEGTRON/CAll Y DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Associated General
Contractors of America.
--
,~.
~'~V~
-arD. . - .......
,'.1I'i1o
.....
01991 MAW
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS Of THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
ThE Americanlmlitute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue. N.W-
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
21
al1~ Owner arising prior tQ the date final payment is due, uriless ]0 days have passed after the
Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered by the
Architect. The Architect win not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or
entilies other than the Owner.
4.4.2 The Architect Will review Claims and within teildays oUhe receipt of the Claim take
one or more of the following actions: (J) request additional supporting data from the claimant
or a response with supporting data from the other party, (i) .reject the Claim in whole or in
part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise,or {5~ advise the parties that the
Architect is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate
the merits of the Claim or if the ArchitecL concludes that, in the Architect's sole discretion, it
would be inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim.
4.4.3 In evalualing Claims,lhe Architect may.bULshall not be obligated to, consult witl1 or
seek inform,!-lion fconI either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who
may assist the Architect in rendering a decision. The Architect may request the Owner to
auth(uize relention of such persons at the Owner's,expense.
4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish
additionalsupporling data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such
request, and shall either provide a response on the requested supporting data, advise the
Architect when the response or supporting datawiU be furnished or advise the Architect that no
supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt ofthe responsem supporting data, if any, the
Architect will either rejecl or approve the Claim in whole or in parL
4.4.5 The Architect will approve or rejeel Claims .by WriLLen decision, which shall state the
reasons therefor and which shall notify the parties of any change in (he Contracl Sum or
Contracl Time or both. The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architecl shall be final and
binding onlhe parties bul subject to mediation and arbitration,
4.4.6 When a wrillen decision of the Architect states that (I) the decision is final but subject
to mediation and arbitration and (z) a demand for arbitration of 'a Claim covered by such
decision must be made within ]0 days after the date on which the party making the demand
receives the final wrillen decision, then failure to demand arbitration within said JO days'
period shall resull in'the An:;:hitect's decision becoming fmal and binding upon the Owner and
Contractor. 'I f Ihe Architecl renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated,
such decision may be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings
unless tbe decision is acceptable to aU parties conce~ned.
4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim againsl the Contractor or at any time thereafter, the
Architect or the Owner may, but is not obligated to. nolify the surety, if any, of the n~turc and
amount of the Claim. If the Claim relales to a possibility Qf a Contractor's default, the Architect
or the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety 31ld request the surely's assistance
in resolving the conlroversy.
4.4.8 If a Claim relales to or is the subject ofamechanic!s lien, Ihe party asserting such
Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply wilh the lien notice O[ filing
deadlines prior tOJesolution of the Claim by Ihe Architect, by mediation or by arbitration.
4.5 MEDIATION
4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, excepl Claims relating to aesth~tic
effect and except those waived as provided fOLin Subparagraphs 4.}.1O, 9.JO.4 and 9.]0.5 shall,
after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect,
be subject to mediation as a condition precedeni to <.1rbilration or the institution oLlegal or
equitable proceedings by eilher parly.
f) Copynght 1911,1915. 1918, 1915, 19J7, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963; 1966,. 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987. 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the maferial herein or subsfantiaJ
quotation of its provisions withoul written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
Stales and will subject the violate to legal prosecution, WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates u.s.
copyright laws and will subject the vio/"tor to legal prosei::utiqn. This document was electronically produced.
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in <lrccordancewith your license wllhoUI violarion until
.he dale of expiration as nored below, User OocumenL 97a201.;oiia -~ 7/Il/l002. AlA License Number
1004325, which expires on 3131/2003.
o
o
o
g
o
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEOL!ENCf5. CONSU./.TATlON WITH A.D.
ATTORNEY /S fNCOUfMGED WITH ,
RESPECT TO /TS COMPl.fTlON OR
MoOIFICATJON. AUrHENT/CATlON OF THIS
ELEqRON/CALLY DRAFTfDAlA 0
DOCUMENTMA Y BE MADE BY USiNG AlA.
DOCUMENT 0401.
this docume1Jf has beep approved and 0
endors/:!d by The Assooalfff General
Contractors of Amffica.
o
o
,0,
o
o
~-.
~,.
........ - -'.-..
&1'Zi$lllr,.
:-
0,
o
o
01997, AIA~
AlA DOCUMENT AlOl. 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The Americanlnstirute of Architecls o.
1735 New York Avenue. N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
o
22
o
~ C()pynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961. 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976. 1987, 1997 by The
American Instituie of Anhitects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the malerial herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions withoul writlefl permission of Ihe AlA violates Ihe copyright laws of the Uniled 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to'legal prosecution WARNING: Unlicensed pholocopying violates U.s. Washington. DL 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution, This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license wilhovl violation until
the date 01 expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a101.aia -- 7/1112002. AlA License Number
1004325, which expires on 3/3112003.
u
u
4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which. unless the
parties mutually agree otherWise, shall be in accordance with the ConsLruclion IndusLry
Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request fur
mediation shall be filed in writingwilh the other parly Lo the Contract and with the American
Arbitration Association. The request may be made concurrently with Ihe filing of a demand for
arbitration but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of arbilration or legal or
equitable proceedings. which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from
the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order.
[j
u
4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation
shall be held in the place where the Projecl is located, unless another location is mutually
agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as seUlemenl agreements
in any courL having jurisdiction thereof.
u'
r
u
4.6 ARBITRA liON
4.6: I Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims rel<iting to aestheric
effed and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3-10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5, shall.
after decision by the Architect ,or 30 day~ after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be
subject to arbitration, Prior Lo arbitration, the parties shall endeavor to resolve disputes by
mediation in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 4.5.
( \
U
4.6.1 Claims not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration \.;hich, unless the
parties mutually agree otherwise,sQall be in accordance with the Construction Industry
Arbitrati.on Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. The demand for
arbitration shall be filed in writing with lhe oLher parly to the Contracl and with the American
Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed wiLh the Archilect.
u
u
4.6.3 ^ demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in
Subparagraphs 4-4.6 and 4.6.1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonalJleLime after the
Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after lhe date when inslilutiop of legal or
equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable sLat ute of
limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph l3.7.
u
,U
4.6.4 limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating
to the Contract shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, the Architect,
lhe Architect's employees or consultants, except by written consent containing specific
reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect, Owner, ConLractor and any other
person or enlity sought to be joined. No arbitration shall include, by consolidation ur joinder or
in any other manner, parties other than the Owner. ContracLor, a separate contractor as
described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or
law whose presence is required if complete relief is 10 be accorded in arbitration. No person or
entity other than the Owner, Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall
be included as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest
or responsibility is insubstanlial. Consent toarbilration involving an additional person or cnLily
shall not constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or
entity not named or described therein. The foregoing agreement to aruitrate and other
agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented 10 by parties to the
Agreement shall be specifically enfoiceable under applicable law in any court having
jurisdiction thereof.
.U
u
C.,
I )
U
IU
U
4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a'noLice of demand for
aroiLralion must assert in the demand all Claims then kntJwn to that party on which arbitration
is permitted to be demanded.
U
I
IU
/
U
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSUL1"ATlON WITH AN
A fTORNEY-/5 [NCOURAGfD W/TH
RESPECT TO mCOMPLETJON OR
MOD/FICA TION. AUTHENTICATION OF Tt-nS
EUCmOMCAUYD~ITD~A
DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING ~A
DOCUMENT D401.
Thi~ document has been approved and
endorsed by The Assaaaleel General
(on'raClors of America.
0199/ AIA0'
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS Of THE
CONTRACT fOR CONSTRUCTION
23
4.6.6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators
shal.1 be fmal, and judgment may be entered upon it in .accordance with applicable law in any
court having jurisdiction thereo[
o
.0
ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
5.1 DEFINITIONS
5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who. has a direct contract with the Contrac.tor to
perform a portion of the Workat the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout
the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized
representative of the Subcontractor. The lernl "Subcontractor" does not include a separate
contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.
o
'0
5.1.2 ASub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a
Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is
referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub- THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPoRTANT LEGAL
subc.ontractor.or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. CONSEOUE.NCES.CONSULrATlON WITH A(l
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH U
5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF RESPECT TOJT5 mMPLETIOfoJOR "
TH E WOR K MoviFlLA TlON. AUTHfNTICArlON Of THIS
5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, tbe ELECTRONICAllY DRAFTWJlJA 0
Contractor, as soon as practicable after awar,d of the COf).tf:!ct, shaH furnish in writing to the ~~~~Z~ ~:,~. BE MADE BY USING AlA .
Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities {including those who are to
furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design} proposed for each princiPal
portion of the Work. The Architect will promptly r~ply to the Contractor in wriling'slating
whether or. not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to
any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Archilect to reply promptly shall
constitute notice of no reasonable objection.
o
This document has been approved and
endorsed'by The Associated General
Contractors of America.
o
5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the
Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The ConLractor shall not be
required to contract with anyone to whom Lhe Contractor has made reasonable objection.
o
5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity ProP9sed by
the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect bas no
reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of
performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by
the difference, iLany, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be
issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However, no increase in
the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless Lhe Conlrador has
acted promptly and responsively insubrnitting names as required.
o
o
o
5.1.4 The Contractor shall nol.change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected
if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute.
5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAl RELA nONS
5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor
shall. require each Subconlractor, to the extent of the Work lobe performed by the
Subcontractor, Lo be bound to \be COli tractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to
assume towa.i.d the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the
responsibility for .safely of the Subcontractor's Work, which the Contractor, by these
Documenl<;, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall
preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under Lhe Contract Documents with
respect t6 the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will
not prejlJd~ce such rights, and shall allow to the Sulx.ontractor, unless specifically provided
otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all righls, remedies and redress against
-
o
o
o
19 CopYright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925. 1937, 1951, t9S8, 1961. 1963; 1966. 19'&7, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Ediiion. Reproduction of tbe mate rial herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violat'es the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate 10 legal prosemtion. WARNtNG: Unl icensed photocopying violates us
copyright laws and will subject the viola lor to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance wilh your licen~e without violario!1 until
the date of expiration as nored below. User Document; 97a201.ai,1 -- 7/1112002. AlA licellSe Number
1004325. which expires on 3/3112003
01997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A2<H - 1991
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
o
The American Institute df .ArchiteclS
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C 20006-5292
o
o
24
o
@ Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, \987, 1997 by lhe
Americanlnstilule of Architects. fifh:enth 'Edition, Reproduction of the materia! herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotaiion olils provisions Without written permission of the AI^ violates Ihe copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Stales and will subject the violate to I~gal prosecution, WARNING: Unlicensed phoiocopying violates U.S. washington, D.C 20006-5192
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. rhis document was eleclrol)ically produced
with permission 01 the AlA and can berepwduced in. accordance with your license without violation until
the date 01 expiration as noted below, User Document: 97a20Laia -- 7111/2002, AlA license Number
1004325, which expires on 3/31/2003.
I .
U
o
the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where
appropriate. the Contractor shall require ea<:h Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements
wilh Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to ea<:h proposed Subcontractor,
prior to the exewtion of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to
which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon wriLlen request of the Subcontractor.
identify to the Subcontractor lerms and conditions of the proposed suhcontracL agreement
which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Sulxontractors will similarly make
wpies of applicable portions of. such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-
subcontraclors.
o
u
u
5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT Of SUBCONTRACTS
5.4.1 Each subcontracl agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to
the Owner provided thal:
.1 assignment is effective only after termination of tbe Contract by the Owner for
cause pursuant lo. Paragraph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements
which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in
writing; and
.2 assignment is subjecito (he prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond
relating to the Contract.
I"
tJ
o
5.4.2 Upon such assignment. if the Work has been suspended for more than ]0 days, the
Subcontractor!s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for im:reases in cost resulting from
the suspension.
lJ
ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTJON BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD
SEPARA TE CONTRACTS
6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right toperfQrm construction or operations related to the
Project wilh the Owner's own forces, a.nJ to award separate contracts in connection with other
portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the
Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insuran<:e
and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved
because of sllch action by the Owner, the Contractor shall Inake such Claim as provided in
Paragraph 4.3.
u
,
U
u
6.1.2 When separate contracls are awarded for different portions of the Project or oLher
construction or operations on the site, 'tbe term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in
each case shall mean the Contractor who executes ea<:h separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.
lJ
6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces
and ofea<:h separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shaH cooperate with
them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contra<:tors and the Owner in
reviewing their wnstruction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any
revisions to the construction $<:hedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual
agreemenl. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the
Contractor, separate contractors and the Other until subsequenLly revised.
/
U
u
6.1.4 Unless otberwise provided in the CorHracl Documenls. when the Oymer performs
construcLioIl or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall
be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and lo have the same rights which apply to the
Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including. without exduding others, those
stated in Article ), this Article 6 and Artid~ 10, 11 and 12.
i i
U
u
6.2
MUTUAL RESPONSIBILlTY
r )
U
u
c
THJ5DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT lEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSUlTATION WITH AN
A HORNE y 15 ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPlETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENrtCATfON OF THl5
Elf CmON/CAll Y DRAFTED AfA
DOCUMfNT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AfA
DOCUMENT 0401.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Associaled Gefler af
Contracforsof America.
~-.
~Y"'~
......... 4 _ ......
:RllllJlll '"
-
01997 AIA<>>
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAlCONDlTlONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUClION
25
6.2.1 The Contractor shaH afford lhe Owner and separate contractors reasonable
opportunity for introduction and storage of their,materialsand equipment and performance of
their activities, and shall connect and coordillale the Contractor's con:Slruclionand~ operations
with theirs as required by the Contract Documents:
o
o
6.2.2 If part of the Conlrador's Work depends for proper execution or results upon
construction or operations by the Owner or a sep_araLecontraclor, the Contractor shall, prior to
proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent
discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such
proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an
acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor's GOmpleted or partially completed
construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, ,except as to defects not then
reasonably discoverable.
o
o
6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner
which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timedaclivilies or
defective construction of the Contractor. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for
costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays,'improperlylimed activities. damage to the
Work or defective construction of a separate contractOL
o
6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy. damage wrongfuUy caused by the Contractur
to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate
contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5-
THJ5DOCUMENT flA5lMPORTANT LEGAL
CON5EOUENCES.. . CONS. ULr'Ar/ON WJTH A1U'l..
ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED wm-,
RESf'fCT TO ITS COMPLETION OR '
MODIFICATION, AUTHENrlCMION OF THIS
HECTRONicAU Y DRAFTfD AlA D'
DOCU/'<1ENTMAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT D40L .
This document has been approved and
6.2.5 The Owner and each separale conttac.lor shall have the same responsibilities for endorsed by The Associated General
cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Subparagraph 3,14_ColI/raaon of Amer;cil_
o
6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP
,6.3.1 If a dispute arise, among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the
responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrQunding
area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and lhe ArchileCt will
allocate tbe cost ainong lhose responsible.
o
ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and
wilhout invalidating the Contract, by Change Order; Construction Change- Direct.ive or order
for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations staled in this Article 7 and elsewhere
in.theConlracl Documents,
o
7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and
Architecl; a Construction. Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect
and mayor maynol be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work
may be issued by the Architect alone.
0,
o
o
7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract
Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the
Change Order, <::onstruction Change Directive or ordct fora minor change in the Work.
-
o
7.1 CHANGE ORDERS
7.2.1 A Change Order is a wtillen instrument prepared by [he Archiled and signed by the
Owner, Contractor and Architect. staling their agreement upon all of the following:
o
.1 change in the Work;
.2 the amount orthe adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and
@ COPYright 1911. 1915, 1918, 1925. 1937, 1951,1958; 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967. 1970. 1976, 19B7, 1997 by The
American Institute of Archite<l:i, Fifteenth Edilion. Reproduction 01 the material herein Or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws oF-the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution_ WAR'NING: Unlicensed photocopying violates ,US
copyright laws and will subject the violalor to legal.prosecution, Till's document was electronically produced
with permhsion of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with' your license withoul violillion until
the date of expiration as noled be low_ User Document: 97a20Laia - 7/lii2002 AlA ticense Number
100.1J315. which expires on 3/3If2003,
Cll'191 AlAI!)
ALA DOCUMENT AWl - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
o
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N,W,
Washington. D.C 20006-5292
o
o
26
o
u
u
u
u
u
[J
o
lJ
u
-........
u
u
u
U
\ '
U
u
u
[I
LJ
Q
U
.3 the extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.
7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those
listed in Subparagraph n.3.
7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECnVES
. 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive .is a writLen order prepared by the Architect and
signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on
adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both, The Owner may by
Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work
within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions. deletions or other revisions,
the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.
7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on
the terms of a Change Order.
7"3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustmentlo the Contract Sum,
the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods:
.1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient
substantiating data to permit evaluation;
.2 unit prices stated in the Contnlct Documents orsubsequently.agreed upon;
.3 cost tu be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually
acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or
.4 as provided in Subparagraph 7,}.6.
7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shan promptly
proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's
agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change
Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
7.3.5 A Construction Change Dire<;tive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of
Ihe Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract "rime or the
method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be
recorded as a Change Order.
7.3.6 If the Contractor docs not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for
adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be delermined by the
Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work
attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable
allowance for oyerhead and profit. In such case, and also under Clause 7.3.3.}, the Contractor
shall keep and present, in slIch form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting
together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents, costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph 7-3,6 shall be limited to the following:
.1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance,
fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' cumpensation
insurance;
.1 costs of materials, supplie5 and equipment, including cost of transportation.
whether incorporated or consumed;
.3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand looIs, whether rented
from the Contractor or others;
.4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and saleS, use or
similar taxes rela~edto the Work; and
.5 .additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to
the change.
~. CopYflght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951,1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The
AmeriCan Institute of Architects. Fifteenlh Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation or its provisions without wrilten permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of .the United
States and will subject the violaie 10 legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates us
copyright laws and will subject theviolalor to legal prosecution. This document was eledronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violarion unlil
the dale of expiration as noled below. U~er Document: 97a201.aia -- 7/1112002. AlA License Number
100<1325, which expires on 3/3112003
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT UGAl.
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
AfTORNEY /S ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLEr/ON OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHfNTlCA T10N OF THIS
ELECTRON/CAll Y DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
This. document has been approved and
endorsed by The. Associated GeneT" aI
Contradors of America.
-
01997 AlA!!)
AlA DOCUMENT A2m - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Archilects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington. D.C. 20006-5292
27
8.2.2 The Contractor shall 1101 knowingly, excepl by agreement or iJistruction of the Qwner
in writing. prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective
dale of insurance required by Article II to befumishe.d by the Contractor and Owner. The date
of commencemenLof the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance,
Unless the date of commencemen~ is established by ~be Contract Documents or a notice to
.proceed given by the Owner. the Contractor shan notify the Owner in writing not less than fiVe
days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of <<:)1997 AIM)
mortgages; mechanic's liens and other security interests. AlA DOCUME.NT A201 - 1997
G.ENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or
change which resulls in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed
by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are
involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of lIet
increase, if any, with respcclto that change.
7.3.8 Pending fimil determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to
the Owner, amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in
Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indi{;ating the parties' agreement
with part or all of such cosK For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute, the Architect
will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certifkation for payment for those
cosls. That determination of cost shall adjusttheContraCL'Sum on the same basis as a Change
Order, subi~ct to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with
Article 4,
7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect
concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach
agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effeclive immediately and shall be
recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate "Change Order.
7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.4.1 The Architect will havealithorily to order minor changes in the Work not involving
adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and nol inconsistent with
the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall
be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such wrilten orders
promptly.
ARTICLE 8 TIME
8.1 DEFINITIONS
8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized
adjustments, allolled in the Contract Documenls forSubslantial Completion of the Work.
8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in tbe Agreemenl.
8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance
with Paragraph 9.8.
8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless
otherwise specifically defined.
8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
8.2.1 Timelimils stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By
executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms -that the Contract Time is a reasonable
period for performing tbe Work.
~ CopYright 191\, 1915, 1918, 192~, 1937, 1951, 1958; 1961, 1963, 1966; '1967., 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction ot the material herein or substantial
quolation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA viQlates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violale to legal fJrosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violales U.S.
copyright laws and will subjecl the violator 10 legal prosecution. Thi s. document was ele<lronically produced
with permission of .rhe AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with yo.ur license. without violation unlil
the date of expiration as noted below. USer Document: 97a101.aia ~- 7111f2001. AlA License Number
100431S, which expires on 31311200].
o
o
o
o
o
THIS DOCUMENT HASJMPORTANT LEGAl
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULT AT/ON WITH Alii
ATTORNEY/S ENCOURAGED WITH W
RESPECT ro ITS COMPUTlON OR
MOD/fiCA flON. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA .0.
DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT D401. ; -
This document has been approved and 0
endorsed by The Associated General
Contradors.of America. ,. .
o
o.
o
o
'0
-
~-.
~'-l~~
..".~_. - ........
....111...
--
o
o
'1
U
The American IMtitute of Architects 0 .
1735 New York.Avenue, N.W. .
washington, D,C. 20006"5192
,0
28
o
u
('
J
u
Q.
o
ri
'u
o
u
o
u
u
u
u
!U
(';
U
u
u
o
10
I
8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve
Substantial Completion within the Contract Time,
8,3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work
by an ad or neglect oCthe Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate
contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in tbe Work, or by labor disputes,
fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's
control, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration, or by other
causes which the Architect detetmines may' justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be
extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.
8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of
Paragraph 4.3.
8.3.3 This raragraph 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party
. . under other provisions ofthe Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COM,PLETION
9.1 CONTRACT SUM
9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including autborized adjustments,
is the total alJ.lOunt payable by the Owner,to the Contractor for performance of the Work under
the Contract Documents. .
9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
9.2.1 Before the first Application forPaymenl, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect
a schedule of values allocated to variouspotlions of the Work, prepared in such form and
supported by such data tosubslantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. T~is schedule,
unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
9.3 APPLICATIONS fOR PAYMENT
9.3.1 At least ten days before the date eslablished for each progress payment, theConLractor
shall submit to the An:hitecl an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in
accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and
supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right 10 payment as the Owner or
Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material
suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents_
9.3.1.1 As provided in Subparagra'ph 7:3-8; such applications may iriclude requests for
payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by
Construction Change Directives; or by Ullerim determinations of the Architect. but not yet
included in Change Orders.
9.3.1.2 Such applications may not jnclude requests for payment for portions of the Work for
which the Contractor does not i.ntend to p;.jy loa Subcontractor or material supplier, unless
such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay_
9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on
account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for. subsequent
incorporation in the Work If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be
made for materials and equipment s.uitably stored off the sile at a location agreed upon in
writing. Payment for materials and c<J.uipmenl stored on or off the site shall be conditioned
upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures. satisfactory to the Owner to establish the
Owner's tiilc to such materials and equipmenl Of otherwise protect tbe Owner's interest, and
@ CopYright '1911, 1915, 1918. 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, .1987, 1997 by The
ArT)crican Institute of Architect~. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the malerial herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without writtenpermission of ,he AlA violates Ihe copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.s.
cqpyright laws and will subject the violator to leeal prosecution This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AtA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation unlil
the dale of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia -- 7/lIf2oo2- ALA License Number
1004325, which expires on 3/3112003.
THIS DOCUMENT HA5/MPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEOUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
ATTORNEY /5 ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO If5 COMPLETION OR
MOD[fJCATJON. AUfHENTJCATIONOF THIS
flECTRONICAU Y DFlAfTED AlA
DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY U5ING AlA
DOCUMENT D401.
rros dOCllment has been approved and
endoned by rh€ Associated General
Con/rae/on of America_
~-.
},.~
..",-. . -.-.......
.... ".111 ..
--
Cl19'11 AIAoIl)
AlA DOCUMENT A20l - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS Of THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Architects
Ins New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C 10006-5291
29
shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such
materials and equipment stored off the site.
9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment
will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that
upon submittal Qf an Applicati~n for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment
have been previously issued and. payments received from the Owner shaU, to the best of the
Contractor's knowledge, jnformatic;m and belief; be, free and clear of liens, claims, security
interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or
other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and
equipment relating to the Work.
9.4 CERTIFICATES fOR PAYMENT
9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days afLer receipt of the Contractor's Application for
Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate forPaymcnt, with a copy 10 the Contractor, for
such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner
in writing of the Architect's reasons [or wiihholding certification in whole or in part as
provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1.
9.4.1 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the
Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data
comprising the Application for Payment, Lhatthe Work has progressed to lhe point indicated
and that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the
Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject
to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Sub~Lantial
Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor devi~tions
from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed ~y
the ArchitecL The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation
that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the. amount certified. However, the issuance of a
Certificate for Payment will not be a representallonLhat the Architect has (1) made exh,:\ustive
or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of
requisitions received from Subcontractors and malerial suppliers and other data requested by
the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment, or (4) made examination to
ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid 011 account
of the Contract Sum~
9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION
9.5.1 The Architect may witllllOld a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the
extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect'~ opinion the
representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9-4-2 cannot be made. If the Architect
is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notifY the
Contractor and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4:1. If 'the Contractor and Architect
cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment
for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The
Architect may also withhold.a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered
evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Paymentprevio~sly issued, to such
extent as milY be necessary in the Architect's opinion tQpr.otecl.the Owner from loss forwhjch
the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in
Subparagraph 3-3.2; because of:
.1 defective Work not remedied;
.1 third party claims flied or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such
claims unless security acceptable La the Owner is provided by the Contractor;
.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly La Subcontractors or for
labor, materials or equipment;
@ Copyrrght 1911. 1915, 1918. 1925, 1937. 1951. 1958. 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967. 1970. 1976. 1987, 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provi'sions without written permission of the ALA v!olates the copyright laws'of the United
States and will subjecl the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photqcopyillg violates U.s.
copyright laws and will subjecl the violator to legal prosewtion. This document was el(~ctronically produced
with permission of Ihe AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with'your license without vi~la;ion unlil
the dale of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a101.aia -- 711112002. AlA License Number
1004325. which expires on 313112003.
o
o
o
o
o
rHlS DOCU!v1ENr HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CO.NSEOU. ENCES; CONSUL. TATfONW{TH~i
ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WIrH LY
RESPfCT TOITS COMPLETiON OR .
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTfCATlON Of THl5. .
flfCTRONICAll Y DRAf'rED AlA 0'
DOCUf!4ENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUME~TD401.
This dotument has been approved am 0
endorsed by The Assodaled General .... .
Contradorsof America.
o
o
D.
o
o
-
o
o
el1991 AIA~
AlA DOCUMENT A20l - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
o
The American Institute of Architects
J73S'New York Avenue. N.W.
Washington. D_C. 20006-5291
o
o
30
o
'U
."
u
L\
-
u
u
U
D
u
o
'.
u
.U
o
n
~
U.
0'
u
o
'0
o
.4 rea'ionable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of
the Contract Sum;
.5 damage to the Owner or another contractor;
.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contr~ct
Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or
liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or
.7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will
be made for amounts previously withheld.
9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make
payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so
notify the Architect.
nns DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LfGAL
CONSEQUErICES. CONSULTATION WrTH AN
ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO /TS COMPUTlON OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ELECTRON/CALl Y DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING NA
DOCUMENT 0401.
9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Suhcontractor. upon receipt of payment
from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's
'portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting per<;entages
actually retained from payments to' the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion
of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require
each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner.
rhis document has been approved and
endorsed by The Associated Gener at
Contractors of America.
9.63 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor. if practicable, information
regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action
taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such
Subcontractor.
9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to payor to see to the
payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law.
9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in
Subparagraphs 9.6.2, 9.6.) and 9.6.4.
9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of
the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
9.6.7 Unless the Contraclor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum
of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by
Subcontractors and suppliers shall be 'held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or
suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under wntracl with the
Conlraclor for whidl payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require
money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor,
shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of ~
trust or shan enli.tle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the II....
Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. .
..... ."
9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT ~" . - ..::
9.7.1 If the Archilect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the -=
Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if
the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the 01997 A'AIll
Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the AlA DOCUMENT A201-1997
Conu-aclor may. upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
@ Copyright 1911. 1915. 1918. 1925, 1937, 1951. 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The
American Instilule of Archilects. Fifreentn Edilioil. Reprodvdion of Ihe malerial herein or substantial The American Inslitute of Architects
quotation of its provisions WIthout wriiten permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subjecl Ihe violate 10 legal prosecuti?n. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and wiU subject the viola lor 10 legal prosecution. This document was eleclronically produced
with permission of Ihe AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your licensewithoul violalion unlil
Ihe dare of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a20Laia ~- 7111/2002. AlA License Number
1004325, which expires on 3f31/2003.
31
the Work until payment of thearnount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be
extended appropriately and the Contracl Sum shall l>e incre~ed by the amount of the
Contractor's reasonabJ~ costs of shut -down. delay and start -up, plus interest as provided for in
the Contract Documents.
9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or
designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance With the Contract Documents
so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.
9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the OWner
agrees to accept separately. is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit
to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to fU}al
payment Failure to include an item on such .list does not alter the responsibility of the
Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Conti'ad Documents.
9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list. the Architect will make an inspection to
delermin~ whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the
Architect's iilspe<.'tion discloses any item. whether or' not "included on the Contractor's list,
which is .notsufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the
Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the
Contractor shall. before issuance of the Certificate of SubstantiaJ Completion, complete or
correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then
submit a request for anolher inspection by the Architect to deterini'ne Substantial Completion.
9.8.4 When the Work or designaLed portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect
will prepare a Certificate ofSuhstantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial
Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security,
maintenance, heat, utilities, damage Lo the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within
which the Contractor shall finish all items on the lisLaccompanying the Certificate. Warranties
required Ly the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of
the Work or designated portion lhereof unless otherwise provided in the CertificaLe of
Substantial Completion.
9.8.5 The Certificate of Slibstantial Complelion shall be submilled to the Owner and
Contractor for their wrillen acceptance of responsibilities assigned t<:l"them in such Certificate.
Upon such acceptance and consent of surely, if any, the Owner shall make payment of
retainage applying to such Work or designated podion thereof. Such payment shaH be ~djusted
for Work that is incomplele or not in accordance wilh the requirements of the Contract
Documents_
9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR ,USE
9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the
Work at ,my stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor,
provided such occupancy or use, is consented to by the insurer as required under Clause 1l.4.1-5
and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy
or use may commence whelher or not the portion is substantially complete, provided th~
Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them
for payments. retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and
insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and
commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor
considers a portion substantiaUycomplete. the Contractor shall prepareapd submit a list to th~
Architet;t as provided under Subparagraph 9,8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial
occupancy or use sball not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work
shall be determined by wrilten agreement, between the Owner and Contractor or, if no
agreement is reached, by decision ofthe Architect.
19 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1%7, 1970, .1976, 1987, 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. fifteenth Edition, Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U_S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator 10 legal prosecution. This documenf was eteclfonically produced
with permission of the AlA andean be reproduced in acmrdance with your 'license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below_ User Document: 97a20l.aia - 7nll1001 AlA License Number
1004325, which expires on 3/3112003.
D
D
o
o
o
,-,
THIS DOCUfV1fNT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSeQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH ALJ:\
ATTORNEY ISENCOURAGEDWlTH I
RESPECT TO JJ5 COMPI.ETlON OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF ri-ilS
mCTRO,!ICAU Y DRAFTEDAlfl. {J ,
DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AI
DOCUMENT 0401. '
This document has been approved and 0
endorsed by The Associated Gener at
Contractors of America. . .' '
o
o
o
o
LJ
~~.
~,~V~
~.,- ..~
.Ji',,- 'lb
-
o
o
Ot997 AIA0
AlA DOCUMENT AlOl - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS Of THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Architects pr
1735 New Yqrk Avenue, N.W. LJ
Washington, o.c l()()(}5...5l92
o
31
o
'0
u
u
r\
lJ
Q
u
u
D
u
o
,0
'-
u
u
;0
( ,
LJ
o
u
(1
U
(
Ul
10
9.9,1 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and
Architect shall jointly inspect the area to b~ occupied or portion of the Work to be used in
order to determine and record the condition of the Work.
9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or pOl'tionsofthe
Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAl PAYMENT
9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready fO,r fIllal inspection and
acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application f9r Payment, the Architect wj.ll promptly
make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the ConlJ'act
Documents arid the Contract fully performed, the Architect will prt;>mptlyissu~ a final
Certificate for Payment stating that to the be~t of the Architect's knowledge. information and
belief, and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been
completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the
entire balance found to be due the Contractor' and noted in the final Certifitateis due and
payable. The Architect's final Certificate for l'ayment will <.:onstitute a further ,representation
that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.1O.2 as. precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to
final payment have been fulfilled.
9.10.1 Neither final payment nor any remaiiling retained percentage shall become due until
the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for malerials and
equipment. and other indebtedness connected With the Work for which the Owner or the
Owner's property might be responsible or encu_mbered (less amounts withh'~ld by Owner) have
been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the
Contract Documents tu remain in force after final payment is curr~nlly in effect and will notbe
canceled or allowed to expire unLil at least }o days' prior written notice has been given to the
Owner, (3) awritlen statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason thal the
insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4)
consent of surety, if any. to ,final paymeI).t and (5), if required by the Owner, other data
establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of
liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract. to the extent and
in such form as may be designateq by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release
or waiver required by the Owner. the Conlractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to. the Owner
to indemnify the Owner against such lien. Ifsuch lien remains unsatisfied aner payments are
made, the Contractor shall refu nd to the Owner all money thallhe Owner may be compelled to
pay in discharging such lien, includingall costs and reasonable allorneys' fees. '
9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially
delayed through no faull of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affect log fInal
completion, and the ArchitecLso confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the
Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating theConttact, make
payment of-the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepte& [f the
remaining balance for Work 1I0t fully completed or correcled is less than retainage slipulated in
the Contract Dqcuments, and if bonds have been furnished, the wriUen consent of surely to
payment of the balarice due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be
submitted by the Conlractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such
paymenl shall be made under Lerms and conditions governing final,payment, except that it
shall not constitute a waiver of c1aims_
9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except
those arising from:
.1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and
unsetlled;
(Q Copynght 1911. 1915, 1918. 1915. 193i. 1951,1958, 1961. 1963, 1966. 1967. 1970, 1976. 1987, 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fiheenth Edition. Reproduc;ion of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laY.Js of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license withoyt violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97alOl.aia '-- 7/11/2001. AlA license Number
1004325, which expires on 3/3111003
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSCOUENCES. CONSULTATION WJTHAN
ATTORNfY/5fNCOIJRAGW WITH
RESPECT TO fT5 COMPLETION OR
MOD/FICA TION. AUTHENT/CA f/ON OF THIS
ELECTRONICALLY DRAfTED AlA
DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
This document has been approved and
endorsffi by The Associaled Genera!
Contractors of America.
01'197 AIM,
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American tnstitvte of Architects
1735 New York Avenue,N.W.
Washington. D.c 10006-5292
33
.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract DocumenLs;
or
.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.
9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or malerial supplier
shall constitute a waiver of claims hy that payee excepl those previously made in writing and
idenlified by that payee as unsetlled at the time of final AppliCation for PaymenL
ARTiClE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
10.1 J The Contractor shall beresponslhle for initiating, maintaining and supervising all
safety precautions and programs in connection with'the performance of the Contract.
10.2 SAFETY Of PERSONS AND PIlOPERTY
10.2.1 TIle Contractor shall take reasonable precaotions for safety of, and shall provide
reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:
.1 ,employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;
.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporaled therein, whether in
sldrageon or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the
Contractor's Subcontractors or Suh-subcontractors; and
.3 other property at the site or adjacent therelo, such as Irees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
pavements, roadways. structures and utililies not designated for removal,
relocation or replacement in the course of conslruction.
o
o
o
o
D
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CO~f(jIiENC. fS.CO.NSUlTATlON WITHAUG
ATTORNEY IS ENCpURAGED WITH I
RE$,PECT TO ITS COMPI.HJON OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHfNrlCAr/ON OF TH/5-
EUCTRONlCAUY DRAFrED AlA 0
DOCUMENT MA Y8E MADE 8YUSING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401. -
This document has been approved and
endor~ed by the ~soc;ared GeneriJ!
10.2.2' The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, Contractors of America.
regulations and lawful orders of public authorIties bearing on safety of persons or property or
their protection from damage, injury or loss.
10.2.3 The Contraclor shall ereet and mainl<Iin, as required .by existing conditions and
performance of the Contract; reasonable safeguards for safety and protection! including posting
danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgatihgsafety regulations and notifying
owners and users of adjacent siles and ulilities.
10,2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or
unusual methods are necessary for execution oftheWork, the Contractor shall exercise utmost
care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel.
10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss
insured under property insurance required by the Contracl Documents) to property referred 10
in ,Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in .part by the Contractor, a SubContrador, a
Sub-subcontractor,. or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for
whose acts they may be lia~leand for which the Conlractorjs responsible under CiaUSe!ilo.2;1.2
and io.2.1.}, except damage or loss aUributableJo act~ or omissions of the Owner or Architect or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of lhem, or hyanyone for whose acts either of
them may be liable. and not allributable to the fault or negligence uf the Contractor. The
foregoing obligations of the Contractor are 'in additiol1 to the Contractor's obligations under
Paragraph 3.18,
10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization
at the site whose :duly shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's
superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and
Architect.
@ Copynght 1911, 1915. 1918, 1925,1937,1951, 1958, '1%1, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The
AmeriCan Institute of Architects_ Fifteenth Edition, Reproduction of the malerial herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions wilhoul written permission of the AlA violates 1he copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicerised photocopying violillesU.S,
copyright laws, and will subjecllhe violator to legalproseculion. This document was electwnidlly produced
wilh permiSSion of the AlA and [an be reproduced in accordance with YOUT license without violation \.lnlil
the dale of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a.20l.aia -- 71111200.2, AlA license Number
1004325, which expires on 3IJln003.
o
o
o
~,
o
.0
.....~..
"..;,. . ,.,..go'
-' ....-
,lI'.:-'llo.
-
o
."
o
u
e 1997 A(A~ 0
AlA DOC.UMENT AWl - 1997 .
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
T~. American Inslitule 01 Architecls '0'
Ins New, York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C .20006-5292
o
34
o
u
o
10.1.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be
loaded so as to endanger its safety.
G\
10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent fOl:eseeable bodily injury or
death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or
polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), ~ncounlered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor
shall, upon re<:ognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report
the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing.
u
u
10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verity the presence or
absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event.such material
or substance is found to be present, to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Unless
otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the
Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to
perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or wbo are to
perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor
and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has
reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor
or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall
propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection.
When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall
resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. The Contract Time shall be
extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the
Contractor's reaSonable additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, which adjustments
shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7.
.0'
o
u
o
.U
10.3.3 To the fullest extenl permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless
the Contractor, Sulxontractors. Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of
any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited
10 attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area
if in fact the material or subslance presents the risk ofbodily injury or death as described in
Subparagraph IO-J.I and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss
or expense is. attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or
destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) and provided that such damage,
loss or expense is nol due to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity.
.U
IJ
~
10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Paragraph 10.3 for materials and subslances
brought to the site by the Contractor unless such 'materials or substances were required by the
Contracl Documents.
G\
U
10.5 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held.liable for
the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason Of performing
Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all
cost and expense Ihereby incurred.
:l
U
10.6 EMERGENCIES
10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safely of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at
the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional
compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor <:In account or an emergency
shall be determined as provided in Paragraph4.J and Article 7.
u
ARTiClE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
n
U
u
iQ Copyright 1911. 1915. 19'8, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The
American Institute of Archilects. Fifteenth .Edition. Repmduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of irs provisions withou'wriW~n permission of the AlA violates the mpyrightlaws .of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and Gin be reproduced in accordance with YOUD" license without violation until
the .date of expiraliun as noled below. User Document: 97.i110I.aia - 7/1112002. AlA License Number
1004325, which expires on 3/3Jn003.
o
T/-05 DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITff AN
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO irS COMPLETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUrHENT/CATION OF THIS
ELECTRONIC AU Y DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
fhis document has been approved and
endorsed by The Associated General
Con/radors of Amerka.
'!!!!!!I
01991 AIAfD
AlA DOCUMENT AWl - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS Of THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue. N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
3S
11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from,and maintain in a company {)f cornpaJIies
lawfully authorized 10 do business in !he jurisdiction in which the Project is located such
insurance as will proted the Contractor from claims set forth below which Illay arise out of or
result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may
be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Cont~actor or by a Subcontractor or by
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them. or by anyone for whose acts any of
them may be liable:
.1 claims under workers' compensation. disability benefit and olher similar
clllployee benefit acts which are, applicable to the Work to be performed;
.2 cla.ims for damages because ofhodily injury, occupational sickness or disease. or
death of the Contractor's employees;
.3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease. or dea!h of any
person other than the Contractor's employees; ,
.4 daims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;
.5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself. because of injury to or
destructiOIl of tangible property, including loss Muse resulting therefrom;
.6 claims for damages because of bodIly injury, death of a person or property
damage arising out of ownership. maintenance or use ora motor vehicle;
.7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations;
and
.8 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Conlractor's
obligations under Paragraph 3.18.
o
o
,0
o
o
THIS DOCUMENT HA5/MPORTANT LEGAl.
CONSEO.UENCES_CONSULfA. 710NWIfHA~.~ i
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH LV
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLfTlDIY OR
MODIfICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ELECTRON/CAll Y DRAFTED AlA 0'
DOCOMENT MAY BE MADE BY USlNGJlJA
DOCUMENT D4OI.
This document has been approved and 0
11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph iHI shall be written for not less than limits endofsed by The Associated General .
of liability specified in the Contract DocumentS or required by law. whichever coverage is Confiado{S of America. .
greater_ Cove'rages. whethetwrilten on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained
without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final paymenl and '0
lerminal.ionof any coverage required to be maintained after fmal payment _. .
11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner,shall be filed with the Owner prior
to commencement of the Work. These certificates and the insurance policies required by thi.s 0
Paragraph u.t shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will. not be . c '
canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to !he
Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final
pa)'ment and are reasona\)ly available, an additional czertificale evidencing continuation of such 0
coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by '.
Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information com:erning reduction of coverage on account of revised
limits Of claims paid under the General Aggregate, or bOlh. shall be furnished by the Contractor o. .
with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Conlractor's information and belief
11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and ,maintaining the Owner's usual
liability insurance.
11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE
11.3.1 Optionally, the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project ~
Management Proteci.ive .Liability insurance fr.om th. ec.o.n.lr. ac t.or's usual sources as primary II
coverage for, the Owner's, Contractor's and Architect's vicarious liability for construction
operalions under the Contract. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Doczumenls, the .... ,.II
Owner shall reimburse ibe Contractor by increasing tbe Contract Sum to pay the cost of ~';'ll.lI.;':
purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage, and the C{\ntractor shall not be --
responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of Ihe Owner. The minimum
limits of liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits
required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under Clauses 11.1.1.2 through ILl.l.S.
o
o
o
Cl1997 AIAO>>
AlA DOCUMENT A20\ - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
o
() Copyright 1911. .1915; 191B, 1925.1937; 1951, 1958, ,1961. 1963, t966. 1967, 1970, 1976. 1987, 1997 by The
American Institule of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the matcrial herein or subst~ntial
quotation of its provisions withoul written permission of the AlA violates Ihe copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate 10 legal prosecution, WARNING: unlicensed phot()copying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosC'(:ution, This document was electronically produced
with permission of Ihe AlA and can be reproduced in iKcotdance with your license without violation unlil
the date of expiration as noted below. User DOCument: 97a201.ala .. 711111002. AlA License Number
1004315, which expires on 3f3111003,
The American Ins.,itute of Architects O'
In5 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D:C 20006-5192
o
36
u
u
u
11.3.2 To the extent damages arc covered by Project Management Protective Liability
insurance, the Owner, Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other fQr damages,
except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance. The policy shall provide
for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise_
u
11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor Lo include the Owner, Architect or other
persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under
Paragraph ILl.
u.
11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE
11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase arid rilainLain, in a company or
companies lawfully authorized lo do business:in the jurisdiction in which the Project is.located,
property insurance wrillen on a builder's risk "all-risk" or equivalenl policy form in the amount
of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of
materials supplied Of installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site
on a replacementc()St basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be
maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherWise, agreed in
WIiting by aiL persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, untilfimil payment
has been made as provided in Paragraph 9.10 or until no person or entityother than the Owner
has an insurable interest in the properly required by this Paragraph 11.4 to be covered,
whichever is lat.er. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor,
Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Project
u
~u
u
u
u
u
o
u
o
11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shaU
indude, wit.hout limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and
phy:sicallossor damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious
mischief, collapse, earthquake,nood. windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, ~emporary
buildings and debris removal incl~ding ~emolition occasioned by enforcement of any
applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensalion [or Architect's and
Contractor's services and expenses requ.ired as a result of such insured loss.
11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the
Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so
inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor .may
then effect insurance which will prolect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and
Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost Ihereof shall be
charged to the Owner. If the ContraCtor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner lo
purchase or main lain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Conlractor in
writing, then the Owner shall bear allreasonab1e costs properly altribulable therdo.
11.4.1.3 If the propertyinsurancc' requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not
covered because of such deductibles.
11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also
portions of ihe Work intrahsiL.
u
11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance wilh Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence
until tbe insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to
such partial occupancy or uSe by-endorsement 'or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor
shall take reaso"nable steps to obtain consent-of the insurance company or companies and shall.
without mutual weiHen consent, take no action with respecl to partial occupancy or use that
would cause cancellation, lapse oCreduction of insurance.
q
U
u
11.4.1 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler
and machinery insurance required hy the' Contract Documents or by law, which shall
specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceplance by the
o
[]
@ Copyrighl 1911, 1915, 19]8, 1925, 1937, 1951,1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation o'Hts provisions without wrillen permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the l!niled
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying, violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator '0. legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission 01 the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license withoul violation unlil
the dale of expiration as noted below. User Document: 91a101.aia ". 7/llf1002. AlA License Number
1004325, which expires on 3/3112003.
n
u
THIS DOCUMENT HAS/MPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULT A nON WITH AN
ArrORNEY IS ENCOURAGEDWITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPlETlPN OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHfNTlCATION OF THIS
ELECTRONICAlLY DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The II5socia/oo Genera!
Con/radors of America.
1:1 1997 Ali\o&l
AlA DOCUMENT A201 " 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Architecls
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20005-5192
37
Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Conlr;lctor. Subcontractors and
Sub-subcontractors inlhe Work, and lhe Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds.
o
o
11.4.3 loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, al the Owner's option, may purchase and
maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use.of the Owner's property
due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the
Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property; including consequential losses due to fire or
other hazards however caused.
o
o
11.4.4 If the Contraclor requests in wriLing Lhat insurance for risks other than those deScribed
herein or other special causes of loss be induded in the property insurance policy, the Owner
shall, if possible, include such insurance. and the.costthereofshaU be charged to the Contractor.
by appropriate Change Order.
o
11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties. feal or ..
personal 'or both, at or adjacent to the site by property .insurance under policies separate from THIS DOCUMfNfHAS IMPORTIWT LEGAL"
those. ins. uring-the.Project, or if afler final paymentpnj,perty insurance is to be provided-on the CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTA.TION WITH NU' I
I _-1 P - .. h h' I' I"' h h h . . Lh p' d' ll' ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
comp et~ . roJec~ t roug a po Icy or po ICI~ ot er ~ an, t " ose msurmg e. rolect unng' lCRESPECT TO ITS COMPUTJON OR
construcllon penod, the Owner shall waIve all r~ghls In accordance With the. terms of MODlf1CArJON: AUTHENTICATION OF THIS.
subP.. aragraph JL4.7. for damages caused by fire or. other c.ausesof loss covered by thIS separate EUCT.RONlCAll Y DRAFTf.D AlA 0
property irisurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by DOCUMENTMAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
endorsement or otherwise. DOCUMENT'D40I.~.
11.4.6 BefQr~ a!l exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with tbe C.onlractor a copy
of each policy that inG/udes insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11;4- Each policy
shall contain all generally applicable conditions. definitions.. exclusions and endorsements
related 10 this ProjecL. Each policy shall contai!'l a provision that the policy will noL be canceled
or allowed to expire, and thai ils limiLs will nol be reduced. until al least 30 days' prior writlen
nOLice has been given 10 the Contractor.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Anoria/eel General
ContraCtors of America.
A'
o
o
o
-~~
H.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (I)
each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of
the other, and (2) Ihe Architect. ArchiteCt's consultants, separate contractors described in
Article 6, if any. and any of their subcontractors, sub~subcontractors, agents and employees, for
damages caused by lire or olher causes of loss Lo Lheextent covered by property insurance
obtained .pursuant to this Paragraph 1'-4 or other properly insura!lCe applicable 10 the Work,
except such rights as they have Lopmceeds of'such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary.
. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate. shall require ofibe Architect. Architect's consultants,
separate contractors described in Article 6, if any. and the subconLractors, sub-subcontractors,
agents and employees of any of Ihem. by appropriate agreements, wrilLen where legally
required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of oLherparties enumeraLed herein.. The
policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of
subrogation shall be effective as toa person or entity even though that person or entity would
otherwise have a duLy of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay tbe insurance
premium direcLly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable
interest in the properly damaged.
o
o
o
11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as
fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their inLerests may
appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11.4.10.
The Contractor shaU pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the
ContraCtor, arid by appropriate agreements, vniLlert where legally required for validity,shall
require Subcontractors Lo make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner.
l!!!!!!!I
o
o
11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interesL, the Owner as fiduciary shall.up~n
occurrence of an insured loss. give bond for proper performance of the Owner's dULies. The
CI 1991 A'A~
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
Th~ American Institute of Architects 0
1735,New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C 20006-5292
o
to Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1915, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The
American Institute of ArchireCTs. Fihe~mth Edilion. Reproduction of the material herein or suoslanlial
quotation of i1s provisions without written permission of th~ ALA violates Ihe copyright laws of the United
States and will subject Ihe violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.5_
copyright laws and will subject ,he violator 10 legal proseculion. This document was elecrronically produced
with permission of Ihe AlA and can be r~produced in aCl'ordance wilh your ricens~ withoUI violalion unlil
the date of expiration as noted b~low. User Document: 97a201,aia -. 7/1112002_ AlA License Number
10001325, which expires on 3/3112003
JB
o
u
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CON5ULTATlON WITH AN
A HORNE y IS fNCOURAGED WITH
RE5PfCT TOJr5 COMPLETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHfNrJCATJON OF THIS
ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT MAY Bf MADE BY USING AlA
11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of DOCUMENT 0401_
bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall
promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made.
u
-...
u
cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall
deposit in a separate actount proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in
accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an
arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4_6. [f after
such Loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for
conveniencc, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after
notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7.
D
r;
U
11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless
one of the parties in intcrest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to
the Owner's exercise of this power; if such objectio.n is made, the dispute shall be resolved as
provided in Paragraphs 4.5 and 4.6. The Owner as fiduciary shall, in the case ofarbitration,
make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators. Ifdistribution of
insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct such distribution.
I \\
~~
U
D
11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering
faithful performance of the Coritract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as
stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the
date of ex.ifculion of the Contract.
D.
ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered wntrary to the Architect's request or to
requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Ducuments, it must, if required in writing
by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the
Contractor's expense without change in tht" Contract Time..
D
U
o
12.1.2 If a port ion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically
requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work
and it shaU be uncovered by thc Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with 'the ContraCt
Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be at the
Owncr's ex.pense_ If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correc~ion
shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner ora separate
contractor in which event the O...mer shall be responsible for payment of such costs.
u
o
(J
12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to
conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after
Substantial Completion and whether 0[ nol fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of
correcting sl)ch rejecled Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation
for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's
expense.
f
U
12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
12.2.2.1 In addition Lo Lhe COlltraclor's obligations under Paragraph 3-5.if. within one year
after the date of Substanlial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the
date for commencement of warranties established under Subparagraph 9.9.1, or by terms of an
applicabLe special warr;mty required by the Contract Documents. any of the Work is found to
be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shaH
u
n
u
D
@ CopYright 1911. 1915. 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958. 1961; 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970,1976, 1987, 1997 by The
American In~titute of Architects. Filleenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of ifs provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
Stales and will subjecJ the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed phQtocopyir\g violates u.s.
cClPyright laws and will subject the violator to legal proseculion. This document was; electronically produr.ed
wilh permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license wilhout violation unlil
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 91il20J.aia -- 7111nOO2. AlA License Number
1004325, which expires on 3131/2003.
o
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Anodated General
Con/radon of America.
.
..... . -- "......
...11110
--=
C1997 AlA'"
AlA DOCUMENT A10I - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS Of THE
CONTRACT fOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Archill:.cls
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washinglon, D.C. 20006.5292
39
correel it promptly after receipt of wriuennotice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner
has previously given the Contractor a written ilcceptance of such condition. The Owner shall
give such notice promptly after disCovery of the condition. During the one-year period for
correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give theContraelor an
opportunity to make the correction; the Owner waives the fights to require correction by the
Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct
nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, during that period after receipt of notice from
the Owner or Architect, the Owner, may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2.4.
~
o
o
12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to
porlions of Work fust performed after Substanti31 Completion by the period of time between
Substantial Completion 3ndthe actual performance onhe WOlk
D
12.2.2.3 The one-ye3r period for correction 9f Work shal) not be extended by corrective
Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Paragr3ph 12.2.
fl
,(j
12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by tbe
Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT lEGAl
CONSEOUENCfS. (:DNSULTATfON WITH AiD
ATTORNEY IS fNCOURAGED WITH
RESPfCf TOITSCOMP/.ETfONOR
MODlFlCA TlON. AUTlifNTlCA TlON OF THIS
[tfCTRONlCAU Y DRAFTED AlA '0'
DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401. '
12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction,
whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the
Contractor's correelion or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract DocumenLs.
D
This document has been.appmved and
endorsed by TIle Associafed Genera!
12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 1.2.2 shall be construed to establish .a period of Contractors of America.
limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the
Contrad Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described
in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only 10 the specific 9bligation of the Contractor to correcL the
Work, and has no relationship to the time within which t~e obligation to comply with the
Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to, the time within which proceedings
may be commenced Lo establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's
obligations other than specifically to correeL the Work.
o
o
o
o
12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK
12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and
correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be ieduced as appropriate and equitable. Such
adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.
ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13.1 GOVERNING LAW
13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place ,where the Project is located.
13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
13.2.1 The OWner and Contractor respectively bind .themselves, their partners, successors, _.
assigns and legal 'representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns _.
and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and
obligations contamed in the Contract Docurrients~ Except as provided in Subparagraph 1}.2.2, . . ..
neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contrad as a whole without writLen consent of ;..._,..:;::
the other. If either party allempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party ~...
shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.
o
~
LJ
13.2.2 The Owner may. without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to an
institutional. lender providing construction financing for the Project. In such event, the lender
Cll991 AIAlPl
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT fOR CONSTRUCTION
o
fJ Copyright t9t!. 1915. 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966. 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of i1s provisions without written permission oftne AlA violates the copyright laws of the Unit.ed
States and will subjed the violale to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced. in an:ordance with your license wilhout violation until
the date of expiration as noted below., User Document: 97a201.aia -- 7/1111002, AtA license Number
1004325. wllich expires on 3/31/2903.
The American Insf.itute of Architects 0-
17J5.New York Avenue, N,W.
Washington. D,C. 20006-5292
u
40
o
u
u
shall assume the Owner's rights and obligalions under the Contract Documents. The
Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment.
o
13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE
13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed LQ have been duly served ifdelivered in person to the
individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was
intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address
known to the party giving notice.
u
13.4 R.GHTS AND REMEOIES
13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed hy the Contract Documents and rigl.1ts,and remedies
available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties,ouligations, rights
and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.
L~
o
13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner. Architect or Contractor shall constitute a
waiver of a right or duly afforded them under the.Contract, nor shaU such action or failure to
act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as "may. be specitically
agreed in writing.
o
u
13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract
Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having
jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor
shall make arrangements fot such tests; inspections and approvals with an independent testing
laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner. or with the appropriate public authority, and shall
bear all related costs oC tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect
ti mely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may
be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or .approvals
which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded.
D
-'1\,
'"^ ,;
U
13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction d~lermine that
portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not inCluded under
Subparagraph 13.5.1, the Architect will, upollWTitlen authorization from the Owner, instruct the
Contractor to make arral!gemenls for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an
entity acceptable to the Owner. and.tbeCol}traclor shall give timely notice to the Architect of
when ,and where tests and inspeCtions are to be made so that the Architect may be present for
such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3. shall be at the Owner's
expense.
[}~
u
13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 1).5.1 and
13.5.2 reveal failure of the .portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the
Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated
procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
o
u
13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall. unless otherwise required
by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the
Architect.
EJ
13.5.5 I f the Architect is to observe te.sts, in~pections or approvals required by the Contract
Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and. where practicable, at the normal place of
testing.
u
13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made
promptly to'avoid unreasonable delay in the Work.
~
U
8
@ Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937,1951. 1958, 1961, 1963, )966. 1967, 1970. 1976, 1987, 1997 by The
American Instil ute 01 Architects. Filleenlh Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
<:Juotalion of ifs provisions without written' permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws 01 the United
5ta.le5 and will subject life violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violales U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator' to legal prosecution. This document was dectron.ically produced
wilh permission 01 the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance wilh your license withovt violation until
the date 01 expiration ilS noted below. User Documenl: 97.1201.o3ia -- 7111/2002. AlA license Number
1004325, which expires on 313112003.
o
rHIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT UGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTArJON WITHAN
AHOllNEY JS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPI.ETlON OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION Of THIS
fUCTROIV/CAUY DRAfTfDAlA
DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY U51NG AlA
DOCUMEIVT 0401.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Nsociated General
Contractors of America.
---
01991 AIA4il
AlA DOCUMENT AWl ~ 1997
GENERAL (ONOmONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute 01 Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington. DL 10006-5292
41
13.6 INTEREST
13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bearintetest from the
date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the ~bsence
thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from lime to time at the place where the Project is located.
o
o
13.7
13.7.1
COMMENCEMENT Of STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD
As between the Owner and Contractor:
o
.1
Before Substantial Completion. As to acls or fallures to act occurring prior
to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of
limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be
deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of
Substantial Completion;
.2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificat.e for Payment. Iv;
to acls or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial THI500cUMEIVT HA5JMPORTANT LEGAL
'Completion and prior to issuance of the final CertiHcate for Payment, any CONSEOUENCE5, CON5Ul.TATIONWITHAO
'ap~licable statute of limitations shall conynence to run and any alleged cause o'f ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH .
acllon shall be deemed to have accrued In any and aU events not later than the RfSPEq TO. /[SCOMPl.fJlONOR
date of issuance of the Hoal Certificate for Payment; and MODIFICATION. AUTHENTfCATlON OF rHIS
Aft~r Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring ELECTRONICALLY DRAHEDAlA 0
after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment any DOCUMENT MAY BEMADf BY U51NG AlA
applicable slatute;of limitations shall commence to ~un and any alleged ca~se of DOCUMENT D401.
action shall ,be deemed to have accrued in anv and all events not later than the TtJi".d . ,. L" b. ed .J
. 1 .. ..... I, 5 acumen ridS eenapprov allU 0
date. of any act or fallure to act by the Contractor. pursuant to any Warranty endorsecf'by The Associated General I.. .
proVIded under Paragraph 3-5, the date ahoy <<;orrectlOn of the Work or failure.to Contractors of America.
correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2, or the date of actual
commission of any other act or failure to' perform any -duty or obligation by the
Contractor or Owner, whichever occurs last.
o
o
.3
ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR
14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period or 30
consecutive days through no act or fault of tbe Contractor or a Subcontractor; Sub-
subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions
of the Work under direct or indirect contract withtbe Contractor, for any of the following
reasons:
.1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which
requires all Work to be stopped;
.2 an act. of government, such as a declaration of national emergency which requires
all Work to be stopped;
.3 because the Architect has not issljed a Certificale for Payment and has not
nOlified the Contractor of the reason for; withholding certificaiion as provided in
Subparagraph 9-4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Cerlificate
for Payment within the time staled m the Contract Documents; or
.4 the Owner has failed to filrnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the
Contraclor'srequest, reasonable evidence as tequiredby Subparagraph 2.2.],
o
G
14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the
Contractor or a Subcontractor. Sub-subcontractor or their agents or e!llployees or any other
persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direCt or indirect conlract with the
Contractor. repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as
described in Paragraph 14-3 constitule in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total
number of days scheduled for completion, or,120 days inaflY36s-day period. whichever is less.
o.
0
U
- 0
,~
<i:l Copynght 19n, 1915,1918, 1925,1937, 1951. 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966. 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997' by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Repro9uction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA' violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution, WARNING:Unlicemed photocopying violales us
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document. was e1eclronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance wilh your license without violation until
rhe date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia -- 7111/2002. AlA Lil:eose Number
1004325, which expires on 313J/1003.
01997 AIAolll
AlA DOCUMENT A101 - 1997
GENERAL.CONDIlION5 OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Architects n
1735 New York Avenue, N.W. U
Washington, D.C. 20006;5292
o
8
41
0'
u
[j
14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Subparagraph 14.U or 14.1.2 exists. the Contractor
may, upon seven days' wrillen noLice to the Owner and Architect. terminate the Contract and
recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to
materials, equipment, tools. and construction equipment and machinery. including reasonable
overhead, profit and damages.
u
14.1.4 [[ the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no ael or fault of
the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing
portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently
failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to malters
important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days'
written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the
Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.3.
u
o
o
14.2
14.2.1
TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE
The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor:
.1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skiUed
workers or proper materials;
.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labot in accordance with
the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;
.3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public
authority havingjurisdi<:tion; or
.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract
Documents.
n.
u
u
14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Architect
that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or
remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any,
seven days' written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any
prior rights of the surety:
.1 take possession of the site and of aU materials, equipment. tools, and construction
equipment and.machinery thereon owned by the Conlraclor;
.2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.4; and
.3 finish tbe Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.
Upon request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a.
detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Worle
u
o
.u!
14.2.3 When the Ovmer terminates the Contract for one of the reaSons stated in
Subparagraph 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the
Work is finished.
D
14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work,
including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby. and
other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the
Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the
difference to lhe'Owner. The amount to be paid to Ihe Contractor or Owner, as the case may
be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall
survive termination of the Contract.
u
u
143 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or
inlerrupl the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.
u
u
u
c1;) CopyrIght 1911, 1915. 1918, 1925, 1937,1951, 1958. 1961, 1963, 1966, )967. 1970, 1976, 1987. 1997 by The
AmeriCan' Institute of Architects. Fifteenth EditiOfl. Reproduction of. the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without wriltenpermission of rhe AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to Iegal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and cim be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date or expiration as noted below. User Document: 97alO1.aia -- 7111f2oo2. AlA license Number
1004325, which expires on 3/3112003.
u
THIS DOCUMENTHAS/MPORTANT.lfGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSUI1ATJON WITH AN
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLlTION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ElfCTRONICAUYDRAHED AlA
DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY U5JNG AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Associated General
Contractors of America.
--
01997 AlAe>
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . 1997
GENERAL CONDIlIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION.
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
. Washington, o.c. 20006-5292
43
o
14.3.1 The Contract Sum and Contract Tinw shall be adjusted Jor increases in the cost and
time caused hy suspension, delay or interruption as described in Subparagraph 14-3.1.
Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall indudeprofil. No adjustment shall be made to the
extent:
.1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended. delayed or interrupted
by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or
.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the
Contract.
o
o
14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
14.4.1 The Owner may. at any time, terminate the'Contract for the Owner's convenience and
without cause.
o
14.4.2 Upon receipt of written noti.ce from the Owner of such termination for the O~ner's
convenience. the Contractor shall: THIS DOCUMENT /MS IMPORTANT LEGAL
.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH A:l
.1 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protecLion and ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WfTH U
preservation of the Wark; and RESPECT Tq ITS COMPl.fT/ON OR
. . . . MODIfiCATION. AUTHENTICATION OF T/-US
.3 exce~t ~or Work ,dIrected .to be, p~rfQ[med pr~or to the effectIve date of fI.ECTRONlCA!lYDRAFTfDAlA n
termlllahon stated 111 the notice. termmate'aU elOstmg subcontracts and purchaSe DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USINGAIAU'
orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. DOCUMENT 0401.-
o
14.4.3 In caSe of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shaU be This document has been approved and 0
entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such endorsed by The Asrodated General .
termination, along with reasonable overhead and prom on the Work not executed. Contractors of America.
o
o
~ .
o
o
o
-
,B.
~,~V~
.......-.. - .....
I? "l!l-.
-
o
o
~ Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970; 1976, 1987, 1997 by The
American Institute of An:hitects. fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of" its provisions without wrillell permission of the AlA v.iolates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosewtion. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subjectlhe violator to legal prosecution. This,document was electronically produced
with permiHion of the ALA and can be reproduced in accordance with your licenS'e without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document.: 97a20Laia -- 71llnOO1. AlA License Number
1004325, which expires on 3f3111oo3.
01991 AIA4il
ALA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The Am, e.rican In~liIute of Architet:ts 0
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington,. D.C. 20006-5291
o
o
44
o
u
I' ,
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
00 73 00 - 1
D
SECTION 00 73 00 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
o
D
U
o
U
1,01 SUMMARY
A. The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for
Constructibn," AlA Document A201, Electronic Format, 1997 Edition. Where a portion of
the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the
unaltered portions ofthe General Conditions shall remain ih effect.
TABLE OF GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLES AMENDED
u
u
u
u
D
[J
o
-
U
u
u
u
Article
Amendment
1.
General Provisions
1.1
1.2
3.
Contractor
3.2
3.3
3A
3.6
37
3.9
5.
Subcontractors
5.2
7.
Changes in the Work
7.1
7.2
7,3
8.
8.3
Time
9.
Payments and
Completion
9.2
9.3
9.6
9.8
9.10
10.
Protection of Persons
and Property
10.2
11.
Insurance and Bonds
11.1
11.4
11.5
13.
Miscellaneous Provisions
13.5
13.8
13.9
ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
1,1
Basic Definitions:
Basic Definitions
Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by
Contractor
Supervision and Construction Procedures
Labor and Materials
Taxes
Permits, Fees and Notices
Superintendent
Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions
of the Work
General
Change Orders
Construction Change Directives
Delays and Extensions of Time
Schedule of Values
Applications for Payment
Progress Payments
Substantial Completion
Final Completion and Final Payment
Persons and Property
Contractor's Liability Insurance
Property Insurance
Performance Bond and Payment Bond
Tests and Inspections
Indiana Prevailing Wage Compliance
DBE Provisions
1.1.1 The Contract Documehts: Amend Subparagraph 1.1.1 by deleting the last sentence,
beginning with the words "Unless specifically enumerated ."
1.2
Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents: Add the following Clause to Subparagraph
1.2.1 :
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
00 73 00 - 2
.1
In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either
Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be
provided in accordance with Architect's interpretation.
ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR
3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by. Contractor: Add the following Clause-to
Subparagraph 3.2.1 :
.1 In general, drawings are diagrammatic and schematic; and cannot indicate every offset,
fitting, and accessory required for complete installation and to avoid all conflict with other
trades. Contractor shall review drawings to verify spaces available and make reasonable
modifications as approved by'Architect, without extra costs to Owner. Maintain headroom
and other space requirements in all areas; and where such requirements appear
inadequate, notffy Architect before proceeding,
3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures; Add the following Subparagraph:
3.3.4 The Contractor shall. comply with the dimensions, figures and notations marked on the
Drawings in preference tei what th~ drawings may measure in scale; however, in the
absence of figured dimensions,. the Contractor shall contact the Architect for solution.
Contractors shall not scale dimensions from the drawings unless expressly directed to do
so by the Architect.
3.7 Permits, Fees and Notices: Add the following Clause to Subparagraph to 3.7.1:
.1 The Contractor shall pay all fees and obtain and pay for all permits required for
completion of his contract. Contractor shall obtain and pay for building permit and
improvement location permit and deliver two copies of each permit to the Owner as soon
as it is acquired. The permit should contain the declared valuation of the project and note
the cost of the permit.
.2 Likewise, two copies of allle9al notices, records of licenses acquired for the project, and
state or municipal authority certificates of inspection and occupancy, shall be delivered
promptly to the Owner.
.3 The fee associated with filing for a Construction Design Release by the Indiana
Department of Homeland SeclJrity, Plan Review Division, will be paid by the Owner and is
not a part ofthis Contract.
ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS
5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work: Add the following Clause to
Subparagraph to 5.2.1: -
.1 Not later than two (2) working days after submission of bid, the Contractor shall provide a
list showing the names of the approved manufacturer proposed to be used for each of the
products and the name of the installing Subcontractor on form prepared by Architect and
included in Bidding Requirements. Failure to object to a manufacturer shall not constitute
a waiver of any of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and all products
furnished by the listed manufacturer must conform to such requirements.
ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.1 General: Add the following subpqragraph to Paragraph 7.1:
7.1.4 The combined overhead and profit included in the total cost to the Owner of a change in
the Work shall be based on the'following schedule:
.0
o
o
D
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
00 73 00 - 3
o
u
u
.1 For the Contractor, the Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, fifteen
percent (15%) of the cost.
.2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by his subcontractor, ten percent (10%)
ofthe amount due the subcontractor.
.3 For each subcontractor or sub-subcontractor involved, for Work performed by his
own force, ten percent (10%) of the cost.
.4 For each subcontractor, for Work performed by his sub-subcontractors, five
percent (5%) of the amount due the sub-subcontractor.
.5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in
accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.6.
.6 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals,
except those so minor that their priority can be' seen by inspection, shall be
accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and
subcontractors performing portions of the Work. Labor and materials shall be
itemized in the manner prescribed above. WtiJere major cost items are
subcontracts, they shall also be itemized. In no case will a change involving over
$500 be approved without such itemization.
u
[J
U
7.2 Chanqe Orders: Add the following Subparagraphs to Paragraph 7.2
u
u
u
u
7.2.3 Contractor's itemized estimate for charges or credits for additions to or deductions from
work required by Contract shall always be available for inspection by both the Architect
and Owner.
7.2.4 No percentage will be allowed for overhead or profit on such items as Insurance, Welfare
Fund or Taxes.
7.3 Construction Chanqe Directives: Revise Subparagraph 7.3.6 as follows:
7.3.6 In the third line of Subparagraph 7.3.6, delete the words "a reasonable allowance for
overhead and profit" and substitute "an allowance for overhead and profit in accordance
with the schedule set forth in Subparagraph 7.1.4 above.
ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.2 Schedule of Values: Add the following Clause to Subparagraph 9.2.1 :
u
U
LJ
U
.1 Schedule of values shall be submitted on AlA Document G702 and G703.
9.3
Applications for Payment: Add the following Clauses to Subparagraph to 9.3.1:
.3 Until the Work is.'50 percent complete, the Owner shall pay 90 percent of the amount due
the Contractor on account of progress payments. At the time the Work is 50 percent
complete and thereafter, the Architect will authorize remaining partial payments to be paid
in full.
.4 Each Application for Payment shall include the following documents:
[J
.1 AlA Documents G702 and G703:
.2 Partial Waiver of Lien, required from the Contractor on the first Pay Request and
each one thereafter until the last or final Pay Request which will then require a
Full or Final Waiver of Lien;
.3 Partial Waiver of Lien from the Subcontractors and material suppliers on their
previous payment. Final Pay Request will have Full or Final Waiver of Lien from
the Subcontractors and material suppliers;
.4 Other such documents as may be required by the Owner.
U
D
9.6
Proqress Payments: Add the following Subparagraphs to Paragraph 9.6:
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
00 73 00 - 4
o
o
9:6.8 Upon commencement of the' Work, an escrow account shall be established in a financial 0
institution chosen by the Contractor and approved ,by the Owner.
906.9 The escrow agreement shall provide that the financial institution will act as escrow agent,
will pay interest on funds deposited in such account in accordance with the provisions of
the escrow agreement.and will disburse funds from the account upon the direction of the
Owner as set forth below. Compensation to the escrow agent for establishing and
maintaining the escrow account shall be paid from interest accrued in the escrow
account.
9.6.10 As each progress payment is made, the retainage with respect to that payment shall be
deposited by the Owner in the escrow account.
9.6.11 The interest earned on funds in the account shall accrue for the benefit of the Contractor
until the date of Substantial Completion. Interest earned after such date shall accrue for
the benefit of the Owner. Cost of compensation to the escrow agent pard out of interest
earned shall be borne by the Contractor.
9.6.12 When the Contractor has fulfilled allofthe requirements of the Contract providing for
reduction of retained funds, the escrow agent shall release to the Contractor one-half of
the accrued funds but none of the interest thereon. When the Work has been fully
completed in a satisfactory manner and the Architect has issued a final Certificate for
Payment, the escrow agent shall pay to the Contractor the full amount of funds remaining
in the account, including net balance of the interest paid to the account, but less any
interest that may have accrued for the benefit of the Owner, which shall be paid. to the
Owner.
9.6,13 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is mClterially delayed
through no fault of the Contractor, the escrow agent shall make payment to the Contractor
as provided in Subparagraph 9.10.3,
9,6.14 Sums owed to the Owner by the Contractor may be deducted from payments otherwise
due the Contractor pursuant to Article 9.
9.8
Substantial Completion
9.8.5 Within Subparagraph 9,8~5, delete the second sentence and substitute the following:
Upon such acceptance, the Owner shall make payment sufficient to increase the total
payments to ninety-five percent (95%) of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the
Architect shall determine for incomplete Work and unsettled' claims.
9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment
Add the following Subparagraph to Paragraph 9.10:
9.10,6 Final payment shall be due within 61 days following the date of Substantial Completion. If
at that time there are any remaining incomplete minor items, an amount equal to 200% of
the value of each item asdetermihed by the Architect shall be withheld until the
incomplete item or items are completed. Final payment will include. any retainage upon
presentation 10 the Owner by the Contractor of AlA Document G707 and G704 (consent
of surety and Substantial Completion).
ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.2 Persons and Property: Add the following Clause to Subparagraph 10.2.73:
.1
Basis for sizing of structural framework or bearing walls of this Project is not calculated to
D
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
00 73 00 - 5
o
provide for concentrations of unusual or eccentric stresses imposed by heavy
construction or erection equipment or stacked concentrations of building materials placed
thereon.
.2 The relevant.cost of the engineering, the preparation, the additional labor and materials
required to protect and secure the original building against any impairment resulting from
heavy concentration{s) of construction materials or equipment loads shall be included in
the lump sum for construction of the Project
u
u
ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1
Contractor's Liabilitv Insurance:
[j
11.1.1.1 Delete the semicolon at the end of Clause 11.1.1.1 and add:
[J
. including private entities performing Work at the site and exempt from the coverage on
account of number of employees or occupation, which entities shall maintain voluntary
compensation coverage at the same limits specified for mandatory coverage for the
duration of the Project.
u
11.1.1.2 Delete the semicolon at the end of Clause 11.1.1.2 and add:
u
u
or persons or entities excluded by statute from the requirements of Clause 11.1.1.1 but
required by the Contract Documents to provide the insurance required by that clause.
11.1.2
Add the following Clauses to Subparagraph 11.1.2:
o
.1 The limits for Worker's Compensation and Employers' Liability Insurance
shall meet statutory limits mandated by State and Federal Laws. If (1) limits in
excess of those required by statute are 10 be provided or (2) the employer is
not statutorily bound to obtain such insurance coverage or (3) additional
coverages are required, additional coverages and limits for such insurance
shal.1 be as follows:
.2 The limits for Commercial General Liability insurance including coverage for
Premises-Operations, Independent Contractors' Protective, Products-
Completed Operations, Contractual Liability, Personal Injury and Broad Form
Property Damage (including coverage for Explosion, Collapse and
Underground hazards) shall be as follows:
u
u
u
u
u
u
$1,000,000.00 Each Occurrence
$1,000,000.00 Job Site Aggregate
$1,000,000.00 Personal and Advertising Injury
$1,000,000.00 Products-Completed Operations Aggregate
.1 The policy shall be endorsed to have the Job Site Aggregate apply to
this Project only. When a Job Site Aggregate endorsement is not
available, provide a 2,000,000 General Aggregate.
.2 The Contractual Liability insurance shall include coverage sufficient
to meet the obligations in AlA Document A201-1997 under
Paragraph 3.18.
.3 Products and Completed Operations insurance shall be maintained
for a minimum period of at least two (2) years after either 90 days
fOllowing Substantial Completion or final payment, whichever is
earlier.
u
u
.3
Automobile Liability insurance (owned, non-owned and hired vehicles) for
bodily injury and property damage shall be as follows:
$1,000,000.00 Each Accident
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
00 73 00 - 6
.4 Umbrella or Excess' Liability' coverage shall be as follows:
$3,000,000.00 over primary insurance.
$10,000.00 retentiQllfor ~elf-insured hazards each occurrence.
11.1.3 Add the following sentence to the end of Subparagraph 11.1.3:
If this insurance is written on a Commercial General Liability policy form, the certificates
shall be ACORD form 25-$, completed and supplemented ill accordance with AlA
Document G715, Instruction Sheet and Supplemental Attachment for ACORD
Certificate of Insurance 25-S.
11.4 Property Insurance: Delete Clause 11..4.1.4 and substitute the following:
11.4.1.4 The Contractor shall at the Contractor's own expense provide ir<1surance coverage for
materials stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the value established
in the approval, and also for portions of the Work in transit until such materials are
permanently attached to the Work
ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13.5 Tests and Inspections: Amend Subparagraph 13,5.1 by deleting the last sentence, beginning with
the words 'The Owner shall bear... " and add 'The Contractor shall bear all costs for inspections,
approvals, and performance testing as required in the Contract Documents."
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
D
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
D
o
o
r 1
U
J
U
o
u
[j
u
u
u
u
u
o
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
<C
I-
~
C
..J
ct
U
-
Z
J:
o
W
I-
o
W
C)
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
en
I-
Z
W
~
w
a::
-
=>
a
w
~
...J
~
D::
w
Z
w
(.')
I
~
z
o
-
CfJ
-
>
--
c
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 1000 - 1
u
SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
u
u
[j
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
WORK COVERED BY GONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Project title is CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER.
u
u
1. General Project Location: Southwest corner of parcel 7, which is located at the
intersection of 3rd Avenue and City Center Drive
2. Owner: Pedcor City Center Development Company.
B.
Architect Identification: The Contract Documents were prepared for Project by CSO Ar-
chitects, Inc., 280 East 96th Street, Suite 200, Indianapolis, Indiana 46240.
1.
Structural Contract Documents were prepared for Project by Lynch, Harrison &
Brumleve, 550 Virginia Avenue, Indianapolis, Indiana 46203.
Mechanical and Electrical Contract Documents were prepared for Project by
L'Acquis Consulting Enterprises Indianapolis, LLC; 280 East 96th Street, Suite
200, Indianapolis, Indiana 46240.
u
2.
u
C.
Contractor: Signature Construction LLC has been engaged as Prime General Contractor
for this Project.
o
u
D. The Work consists of a two-story energy center with an enclosed mechanical yard.
1 . The Work includes a utility tunnel connecting the energy center with Parcel 7 A.
1.03
CONTRACTS
r \
U
A.
Project will be constructed under a single prime general construction contract.
1. Subcontract bid packages shall be as determined by Signature Construction
LLC.
u
1.04
USE OF PREMISES
u
A.
Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas defined by Construction Limit Line on Site
Drawings.
u
1.
Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises
clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all
times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
u
a.
b.
Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage
of materials and equipment on-site.
u
u
1.05
WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A Separate Contract: Owner will award a separate contract for performance of certain con-
struction operations at Project site. Those operations may be conducted simultaneously
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 1000 - 2
with the work under this Contract. The separate contract will include the following:
1. Adjacent and adjoining offices and parking garage.
B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts maybe carried out
smoothly. without inteliering with or delaying work under this Contract.
1.06 FUTURE WORK
A. Future Contract: City of Carmel will award a separate contract for Carmel Peliorming
Arts Center to be constructed at the north portion of Parcel 7 after Substantial Comple-
tion. Connection with tunnel will be made under that contract.
1.07 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occl)Py and to place and install
equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such
occupancy does not inteliere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment
and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities haVing jurisdiction before
Owner occupancy.
1.08 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
A. Time of Completion: Work shall be substantially complete by the date established by the
Contractor's Project Construction Schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 21 00 - 1
u
SECTION 012100- ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
u
u
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
u
A. Certain materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances.
In some cases, these allowances include installation. Allowances have been established
in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment
to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, addi-
tional requirements will be issued by Change Order.
[j
U
lJ
U
lJ
1 . Allowances stated in the Contract Documents shall be included in the Contract
Sum.
1.03
SELECTION AND PURCHASE
k At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date
when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance
must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.
B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selec-
tions. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C. Purchase products, systems or services.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
u
u
u
u
u
A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form
specified for Change Orders.
B. Submit invoices to show actual fulfillment of each allowance.
1.05
ALLOWANCES - GENERAL
A. Use the allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by
Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.
B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by
Owner under the allowance are included in the allowance. These costs include delivery,
installation, taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs.
C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the allowance will include Contractor's re-
lated costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins.
u
D.
At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the allowance to Owner by
Change Order.
u
1.06 UNUSED MATERIALS
A.
Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for
credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 21 00 - 2
1. If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it
is not economically practical to return the material for credit.. If directed by Archi-
tect, deliver unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise; disposal of
unused material is Contractor's responsibility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects.
Return damaged or defective Products to manufacturer for replacement.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and
installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced
with related work.
3.03 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance NO.1 - Record CAD Drawings: $5,000.00.
1. Contractor shall include in Base Bid the above amount to cover architec-
tural/engineering services related to preparing record CAD drawings.
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
.0
u
[J
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 22 00 - 1
u
SECTION 01 2200 - UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
u
u
u
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. Owner reserves the right to reject unit prices that appear, in the sole judgment of
the Owner assisted by the Architect, to be unreasonable for the amount of work
represented.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
u
A.
Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form as a price per unit of
measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by
appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Docu-
ments are increased or decreased.
u
1.03 PROCEDURES
u
u
u
A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.
B. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that in-
volves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's ex-
pense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
U
r '
U
U
U
U
C. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included at the end of this Section. Specification
Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under
each unit price.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 LIST OF UNIT PRICES
A. Unit Price No. 1 - Earth Removal from Site:
1. Description: Removal of earth such as may be required with the encountering of
soft or unsuitable soils in accordance with Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard of material removed.
B. Unit Price NO.2 - Compacted Fill from Off-Site:
r '
U
1. Description: Delivery, placement and compaction of fill material from off-site,
such as may be required with the encountering of soft or unsuitable soils in ac-
cordance with Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard of material placed.
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 22 00 - 2
C. Unit Price NO.3 - Geotextile Fabric:
1. Description: Geotextile fabric over prepared subgrade in accordance with Divi-
sion 2 Section "Asphalt Concrete Paving."
2. Unit of Measurement: Square yard of fabric installed.
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
D
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 23 00 - 1
u
SECTION 01 2300 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
u
u
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
u
A.
Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work
defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid
amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of con-
struction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installa-
tion methods described in the Contract Documents.
u
u
u
u
1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the
Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are
made to the Contract Sum.
1.03 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely inte-
grate work of the alternate into Project.
U
lJ
U
U
U
U
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and
similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not
indicated as part of alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in
writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, re-
jected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated
mod ifications to alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Conkact.
D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification
Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve
the work described under each alternate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
u
A. Alternate No. 1 - Thermoplastic Waterproofing Membrane: State amount ta be added to
or deducted from Base Bid to provide thermoplastic waterproofing membrane as speci-
fied in Division 7 Section 07 13 54 and as shown on Drawings in lieu of S.heet Water-
proofing specified in Section 071300.
B.
Alternate NO.2 - SBS Modified Roofing: State amount to be added to or deducted from
Base Bid to provide SBS modified roofing as specified in Division 7 Section 07 52 00 and
as shown an Drawings in lieu of adhered EPDM roofing specified in Section 07 53 23.
u
u
C.
Alternate NO.3 - Resinous Flooring: State amount to be added to Base Bid to provide
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 23.00 - 2
resinous flooring as specified in Division 9 Section "Resinous Flooring" and as shown on
Drawings.
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 29 00 - 1
SECTION 01 2900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Con-
tractor's Construction Schedule.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish
line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specifica-
tion Section.
1. Breakdown shall include separate line items for material and labor for Divisions 2
througn 33.
2. Round amoUnts to nearest whole dollaL
3. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each Allowance.
1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and pay-
ments as certified by Architect and paid for by OwneL
u
u
B.
Payment Application Times: The period of construction Work covered by each Applica-
tion for Payment is one month. The dates for preliminary review and submission of Ap-
plications for Payment will be established at the Pre-Construction Conference.
c.
Payment Application Forms: Use AlA Document G702 (only) and AlA Document 8703
Continuation Sheets or similar acceptable continuation sheet software as form for Appli-
cations for Payment.
u
1.
Include amounts of Change Orders issued before last day of construction period
covered by application.
lJ
D.
Transmittal: Submit 4 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Pay-
ment to Architect to be distributed as listed below. One copy shall include waivers of lien
and similar attachments.
u
u
u
1. Owner (Pedcor).
2. Architect.
3. CRC Representative.
4. Contractor.
E.
Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of me-
chanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out
of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.
F.
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede
or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
u
U
1. Schedule of Subcontractors, Manufacturers and Products.
2. Schedule of Values.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 29 00 - 2
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
4. Submittals Schedule.
5. List of Contractor's staff and principal assignments.
6. Copies of building permits. and other authorizations for performance of the Work.
7. Certificates of insl,Jranceand insurance policies.
8. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
G. Application for Payment (monthly): Administrative actions and submittals that must be
provided with each application for payment include the following:
1 . Partial waiver of Lien for the construction period covered by the previous applica-
tion for payment.
a. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to
reduction for retainage. on each item.
b. Submit Waivers of Lien executed by a person. authorized to sign legal
documents on be half of the entity submitting the waiver.
2. Contractor's Construction Schedule (updated version).
H.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Sub-
stantial Completion, submit ;:In Application for Payment showing' 100 percent completion
for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
L Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and sup-
porting documentation not previously submjtted and accepted, incJuding; but not limited,
to the following:
1. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and
proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid,
2. Final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
3. AlA Document G706. "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
4. AlA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3Not Used)
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 31 00 - 1
SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 ~ GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
r I
U
A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
u
u
o
A This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations
on Project.
1.03
COORDINATION
A Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly Installation of each part of the Work. Coor-
dinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other
for proper installation, connection, and operation.
u
B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid
conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities in-
clude, but are not limited to, the following:
1-
U
1 . Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. PreinstalJation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
u
lJ
U
U
C. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out
with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Construction Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, horizontal bar chart or CPM construc-
tion schedule within 14 days of the preconstruction meeting.
u
u
1. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify
first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.
B.
Coordination Drawing~: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability ne-
cessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components.
u
1. Indicate relationship of COmponents shown on separate Shop Drawings.
2. Indicate required installation sequences.
1.05
PROJECT MEETINGS
u
u
A.
General: ScheBule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless other-
wise indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others whose presence is required, of date
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 31 00 - 2
2.
and time of each l)leeting. Notify Qwner.and Architect of dates and times.
Minutes: Record and distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned
within five days of the meeting.
B.
Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstructlon cOnference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, at Project site or another con-
vepient location.
1.
Agenda: Contractor will prepare agenda.
C.
Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before
each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators in-
volved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with
other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow; shall attend the
meeting.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for
the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the follow-
ing:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Deliveries.
Submittals and mockups.
Possiple conflicts,.substrate acceptability and compatibility problems.
Time and weClther: limitations.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Warranty requirements.
Space and access limitations.
Regulations of authori~ies having jurisdiction.
Testing and inspecting requirements and required performance results.
3. Record significa8t conference.discussions, agreements, and disagreements.
4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully con-
cluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to per-
formance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at bi-weekly intervals. Coordinate dates
of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
1.
2.
3.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contrac-
tor, subcontractor, supplier, afld other entity concerned with current progress or
involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be rep-
resented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar
with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting.
Review other i1ems of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as apptopr'iate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since.the last
meeting. Determine whether each activity is pn time, ahead of schedule,
or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule
revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities
will be completed within the Contract Time.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 31 00 - 3
who should have been present.
u
U
U
U
a~ Schedule Updating: Contractor shall revise its Construction Schedule af-
ter each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been
made or recognized. Issue revised schedule at the next meeting.
E.
Contractor Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at weekly
intervals and as needed for the resolution of unanticipated issues. Project coordination
meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress
meetings and preinstaHation conferences.
1. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in atten-
dance, Owner and Architect, and others affected by decisions or actions resulting
from each meeting.
u
u
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
LJ
u
u
u
u
lJ
U
lJ
U
u
u
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
D
o
o
u
u
u
u
o
u
U-.^.
i
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 33 00 - 1
SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the
Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals
concurrently for coordination.
rl
U
a. ArchHect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
B. Submittals Schedule: Submit two copies of Submittals Schedule. Arrange the following
information in a tabular format:
u
U
lJ
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Description of the Work covered.
4. Scheduled date for Architect's approval or review.
C.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals,
as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's.n~ceipt of submittal.
u
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional
time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent sub-
mittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must
be delayed for coordination.
2. No extension of the Contract Time will be, authorized because of failure to trans-
mit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
(
U
U
lJ
D.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide space beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval
stCimp and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action
taken:
u
a. Project name and date.
b. Name and address of Architect, Contractor, subcontractor and supplier.
c. Name of manufacturer.
d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
e. Drawing number a.nd detail referenc:;es, as appropriate.
f. Other necessary identification, such as Owner's Project No.
(
U
U
E.
Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Docu-
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 33 00 - 2
ments on submittals.
F. Submittal Cover Sheet: Transmif each submittal from the Contractor to the Architect by
use of the Submittal Cover Sheet attached at the end of this section. Submittals transmit-
ted without the attached form, or received from sources other than the Contractor, will be
returned to the sender "without action".
1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor~s letterhead, record rele-
vant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Ar-
chitect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract
Documents, including minor variations and limitations.
2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
G. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppli-
ers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for per-
formance of construction activities. Show distribution on transniittal forms.
H. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Ar-
chitect in connection with construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Electronic submission of Product Data and Shop Drawings is acceptable.
B. RFl's: Prepare Requests For Information (RFI's) and similar submittals requiring Archi-
tect's action.
1. Number of Copies: Submit one copy of each submittal, unless otherwise indi-
cated. Architect will return one copy with reply. Retain one returned copy as a
Project Record Document.
2. The Architect's response to RFl's will be in writing. Interpretations and decisions
made in any other manner will riot be binding, and Contractor shall not rely on
them.
C. Product Data: Collect information into a single sLibmittal for each element of construction
and type of product or equipment.
1. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are appli-
cable.
2. Number of Copies: Submit number of copies of Product Data needed for Con-
tractor through manufacturer, plus one copy for ArChitect, one copy for Owner,
and one copy for Project Close-Out submittals, unless otherwise indicated. Ar-
chitect will return all but Architect and Owner copies. Retain one returned copy
as a Project Record Document. . .
D. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Man-
agement and Coordination."
1. Number of Copies: Follow same procedure as for Product Data.
E. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not
base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed
data.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
c
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 3300 - 3
u
1.
Number of Copies: Submit two black-line prints of each submittal. Architect will
return one for further reproduction by Contractor.
F.
Samples: Submit Samples for selection and for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture
for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of
these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and in-
stalled.
u
u
1. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two
Sample sets for Architect and Owner; one will be returned. Mark up and retain
returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample.
u
u
u
G. Closeout Submittals: Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note
corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submilling to Archi-
tect.
u
3.02 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate correc-
tions or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an
action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, selected from
Approved, Approved as Noted, Revise and Resubmit or Rejected.
u
u
B.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements.
u
C.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be dis-
carded.
u
u
END OF SECTION
u
LJ
u
r .
U
u
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
[j
u
u
u
o
lJ
U
U
o
u
o
u
U
U
U
U
lJ
u
u
u
8J
CSO SCHENKEL SHULTZ
Submittal Cover Sheet
CONTRACTOR:
DATE:
PROJECT:
PROJECT NO:
TO:
Spec Section Description No. Of Paqes
Contractor Stamp AlE Review I Action
Corrections and/or comments made on shop drawings do
not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements
of the drawings and specifications. Checking is only for
general compliance with the information provided in the
Contract Documents. The contractor is responsible for all
quantities and dimensions to be confirmed in the field and
corrected at the job site; for information that pertains solely
in the fabrication process; for techniques of construction; for
the coordination of his work andlhat of all trades; and, for
, performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
Action:
Date:
Reviewer:
E-mail:
Copies:
file
013313 Submittal Cover Sheet
PROGRAMMJNG . PLANNING. DESIGN
280 Easl 961h 5lrecl, Suile 200 . Indianapolis. Indiana 46240 . Main 317 848.7800 . Fax 317.574.0957 . CSOinc.nCI
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
I 0
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
u
u
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 40 00 - 1
SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for com-
pliance with the Contract Document requirements.
u
o
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Qualificatkm Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to dem-
onstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
u
B.
Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
lJ
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name. address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or. inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies
with the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
u
LJ
u
c.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, li-
censes, certifications, and similar documents established for compliance with standards
and regulations bearing on performance of the Work_
u
U
LJ
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct
testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in
types of tests and inspections to be performed
B.
Preconstruction Testrng: Testing agency shall perform preconstruction testing for com-
pliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods.
o
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
u
U
a.
Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed ma-
terials and construction. Provide sizes and configurations of assemblies
to adequately demonstrate capability of product to comply with perform-
ance requirements.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 40 00 - 2
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and
analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
c. Fabricate and install test assemblies using installers who will perform the
same tasks for Project.
d. When testing is complete, remove C!ssemblies; do not reuse materials on
Project.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,
inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Con-
tractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested
and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
C. Mockups: Before insta!ling portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for
each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements,
using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before startin~ work, fabrication, or con-
struction.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
1.05
QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor Responsibilities: Contractor shall provide quality-control testing services
specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform these qUality-control services.
2. Notify testing agencies an appropriate amount of time in advance of when Work
that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.
3. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
4. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having juris-
diction, when they so direct.
B. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of wh~ther original te:;;ts or inspections were Con-
tractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspect-
ing, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements
established by the Contract Documents.
C. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in perform-
ance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tesls and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed
in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and in-
spected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, oreach test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor to Owner with a second copy directly to
Architect.
4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Docu-
ments or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 40 00 - 3
I i
U
5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
D.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections,
and similar quality-control. services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as re-
quested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of per-
sonnel. Provide the following:
u
u
u
1.
2.
3.
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing
and inspecting.
Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by
testing agency.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at
Projectsite.
4.
5.
6.
u
7.
u
E.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-
assurance and quality-control services with a rninimum of delay and to avoid necessity of
removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
u
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
u
u
3.01
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
B
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
u
c.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of re-
sponsibility for quality-control services.
u
u
u
END OF SECTION
r
U
lJ
u
; !
U
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
[]
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
II
C
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 50 00 - 1
u
u
u
u
u
SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including tempo-
rary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
1. Subcontract-specific responsibilities will be as determined by Signature
Construction LLC.
1.03 USE CHARGES
. ,
U
A.
General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are Contractor's responsibility and
shall be included in the Contract Sum unless speeifically indicated otherwise. Allow other
entities, such as Owner's own construction forces and testing agencies, to use temporary
services and facilities without cost.
u
B.
Water Service: Pay water service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for water
used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site.
u
C.
Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges, whether metered or
otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project
site.
iJ
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
u
A.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and
NFPA 241.
u
u
1. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations
for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
u
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS
u
A. Temporary Utilities: When accepted in writing by Owner and Architect, after building is
completely closed in, insulated and sealed, and the majority of the construction that is
likely to contaminate the mechanical system is completed, change over from use of tem-
porary service to use of permanent service. Continue to pay for operating costs for
HVAC systems at this time.
u
1.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service
shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each
permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's accep-
tance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
Provide maintenance and cleaning of spaces and systems until dale of Substan-
tial Completion, at which time warranties for temporarily used equipment will
commence.
u
2.
( i
LJ
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 50 00 - 2
B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facili-
ties by all parties engaged in the Work:
1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat.
2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable
condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use in-
tended.
B. Architect's Logo Sign: 4' x 4' sign furnished by Architect to Contractor for installation.
C. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing;
minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-.OD line posts
and 2-7/8-inch- 00 corner and pull posts.
D. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: For short-term temporary closures.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended.
B. Field Offices: Prefabricated Mobile units with lockable entranc;es, operable windows, and
serviceable finishes; heated and air conditioned; on foundations adequate for normal
loading.
C. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Comply with NFPA 10 and
NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent; and size required by location and class
of fire exposure.
D. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical,aerated recirculation, or
combustion type: vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or
similar nonabsorbent materigl.
E. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water
units, including paper cup supply.
F. Heating Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide
vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space ther-
mostatic control.
G. Electrical Outlets; Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of
110- to 120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit inter-
rl:.lpters, reset button, and pilot light.
H. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for sur-
veillance, wiring circuits; not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be
nonmetallic sheathed cable.
I. Roof Harness and Tie-Off Line: Provide harness and tie-off line in accordance with Con-
tractor's sole responsibility for conformance with OSHA requirements for construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
o
o
o
o
o
o
D
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 50 00 - 3
u
3.01
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities WMere they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interfer-
ence with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required_
u
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay_ Maintain and modify as
required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by author-
ized use of completed permanent facilities.
U'
3.02
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
u
U
A.
u
u
B.
u
u
u
C.
u
U
f -
U
D.
E.
u
u
u
u
General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect
to existing service, Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the
remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility com-
pany recommendations_
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service
can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
2_ Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility
is available, provide trucked-in services.
3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's
easements cannot be used for that purpose.
Sewers and Drainage: Remove effluent lawfully.
1.
Filter out excessive soil, construction' debris, chemicals, oils, and similar con-
taminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge.
Connect-temporary sewers to municipal or private system designated by Owner
as directed by sewer department officials.
Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilitjes in a clean, sanitary condition.
After heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly.
Provide temporary filter bE:;ds, settlement tanks, separators, and similar devices
to purify effluent to levels acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
3.
4.
Water Service' Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures ade-
quate for construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water
piping before use.
1. Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site.
2. Truck Wash: Provide truck wash facility, including adequate. drainage.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures.
Comply with r:egulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and
maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construc-
tion from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity.
1.
Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F in permanently enclosed portions
of building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F for finishing activities
and areas where finished Work has been installed.
Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating and cooling
purposes, verify building is enclosed and installation is approved for operation,
equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation,
maintenance, and regular replacement offilters and worn or consumed parts.
2.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
3.03
01 50 00 - 4
F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required, by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construc-
tion from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will
not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordi-
nate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy
consumption. .
G.
Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and dis-
tribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction
period. Include meters, transformers, overload~protected disconnecting means, auto-
matic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear.
H.
Electric Distribution: Provide recept<;lcle outlets adequate for connection of power tools
and equipment.
I.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate tIIumina-
tion for construction operations and ir-affic conditions.
J; Telephone Service: provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period
for common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1.
Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary con-
struction and support Jacilities for easy access.
MaIntain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before
Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will
be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
2.
B.
Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved
areas adequate to support loads and to withstand exposure to traffic during construction
period. Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads
and paved areas. Extend temporary roads and pav~d areas, within construction limits
indicated, as necessary for construction operations.
1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads
and paved areas.
2. Prepare subgrade. and iilstall subbase and base for temporary roads and paved
areas according to Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material,
regrading, proofrolling; compacting, and testing.
4. Delay installation of final. course of permanent asphalt pavement until immedi-
ately before Substantial Completion.
c.
Traffic Controls: Provide temporary traffic controls at junction of temporary roads with
public roads. Include warning signs for public traffic and "STOP" sIgns for entrance onto
public roads. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Street Cleaning: Provi.de street cleaning during courSe of construction.
E.
Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sec-
tions lor temporary drainage .and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associ-
ated with construction activities inCluded il7l individLial Sections. Where feasible, use
same facilities. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
[j
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 50 00 - 5
u
I
U
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
lJ
U
U
r I
U
3.04
u
u
u
u
1.
Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide
temporary drainage. where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is
completed.
Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
2.
3.
F.
Temporary Signs: Install signs to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project.
Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.
1.
Support Architect's logo sign on 4" x 4" x 9' long treated wood posts set 2' into
ground and compacted in place.
G.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to han-
dle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dan-
gerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly
labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited.
H.
Janitorial Services: Provide janitorial services on a daily basis for temporary offices, first-
aid stations, toilets, wash facilities, lunchrooms, and similar areas.
I.
Common-Use Field Office: Provide a "like-new" insulated, weathertight, air-conditioned
field office for use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activi-
ties; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel and meetings at Project
site. Keep office clean and orderly.
1.
Mechanical and Electrical Contractors shall provide separate field office for each
as coordinated with Contractor.
J. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to ac-
commodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services.
Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on-
site.
K. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and
similar devices used for'hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not
temporary facilities,
L. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where
ladders are not adequate. Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of
plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction 'in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regUlations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesir-
able effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use
of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons
or firms near Project site.
B.
Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around
excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm-
water from heavy rains
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 50 00 - 6
C. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, install chain-link enclosure
fence with lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or if not indicated, enclose
entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction opera-
tions. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily
entering site except by entrance gates.
1. Set fence posts in concrete or compacted mixture of gravel and earth.
D.
Security Enclosure and, Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized en-
trance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
E.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements
for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and
warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and
needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
F.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and
similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for buifding exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete,
provide insulated temporary enclosures.
G.
Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facili-
ties, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect
against reasonably prediCtable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.
3.05
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from
damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
B. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as
available, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to
permanent facilities until Substantial Completion without written consent of Owner.
C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later
than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction
that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility.
1.
Removetemparary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into
permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove
soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil.
Rempve materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical
compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or
lawns. Repair or replace'street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary en-
trances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period.
2.
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
.0
o
o
o
u
I !
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 60 00 - 1
I :
U
SECTION 01 6000" PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
[j
U
U,.
U
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUBMITT ALS
A. Submit Schedule of Subcontractors, Manufacturers and Products showing specified
products. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product.
B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section
number' and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
) I
U
1.
u
u
LJ
u
u
u
u
u
j .
u
lJ
u
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the
following, as applicable:
a.
Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be pro-
Vided.
Coordination information, including alist of changes or modifications
needed to other parts ofthe Work and to construction performed by
Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate
proposed substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with
those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes
such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific
features and requirements indicated.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabri~
cation and installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified lesting agency indicating and inter~
preting tesl results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in
effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authori-
ties having jurisdiction.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using pro-
posed substitution with products speCified for the Work, including effect
on the overall Contract Time_ If specified product or method of construc-
tioncannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from
manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or
delays in delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract
Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with re-
quirements in the Contract Documents. and is appropriate for applications
indicated.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may sub-
sequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution
to produce indicated results.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
L
J.
k.
I.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 60 00 - 2
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previ-
ously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1 . Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods
compatible with products and constriJction methods of other contractors.
2. If a dispute arises between centractors over concurrently selectable but incom-
patible products, Architect will determine which products,shall be used.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for
items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to geteriora-
tien, theft, and other losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's
original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and in-
structions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, andinstaJling,
4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents
anq to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of
units.
6, Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a
weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent con-
densation.
8, Comply with product manufactur~r's written instructions for temperature, humid-
ity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
9. Protect stored products from damage.
B. Storage: Provi,de a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials
and equipment by Owner's construction fqrces, Coordinate location with Owner.
1.05 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be. in addition to, and run concurrent with,
other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and
limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under require-
ments of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a w[itten document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1. Submit a draft-for approval before final execution.
2. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and
particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
3. Manufacturer~s Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific infQrmation
and properly executed.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
o
o
o
,0
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
u
01 60 00 - 3
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
2.01 PRODUCT OPTIONS
u
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Docu-
ments, that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of in-
stallation.
u
u
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other
items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard op-
tions are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced
and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
r .
U
A.
Conditions: Architect will not consider requests for substitution except under the follow-
ing circumstances and in the Architect's sole judgment.
u
1 . The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution where the speci-
fied product or method cannot be provided within the Contract Time. However,
the request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as
a result of the Contractor's failure to pursue the work promptly or to coordinate
the various activities properly.
2. The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution where the speci-
fied product or method cannot receive necessary approval by a governing au-
thority, and the requested substitution can be approved.
3. The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution when the specified
product or method cannot be provided in a manner which is compatible with
other materials of the work, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitu-
tion will overcome the incompatibility.
4. The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution when the specified
product or method cannot be properly coordinated with other materials in the
work, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be
properly coordinated.
I
U
I .~,
U
, -
U
u
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
u
u
END OF SECTION
I r i
IU
, i
U
'U
u
u
[
[
c
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 73 00 - 1
SECTION 01 7300 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
u
u
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS'
u
A. Drawings and general provisIons of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1 .02 SUBMITT ALS
u
A.
Filial Property Survey: Suomit two copies final property survey conforming to Carmel
City and Hamilton County requirements showing the Work performed, including record
survey data, and signed by professional land surveyor certified in the State of Indiana.
u
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
i I
U
3.01
EXAMINATION
u
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate
and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other
construction affecting the Work.
u~
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connec-
tion of utility services.
U
.LJ
B.
Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tol-
erances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Written Report: Where a written report listing condItions detrimental to perform-
ance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
Ii
U
U
a.
b.
c.
d.
Description of the Work.
List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
Recommended corrections.
, )
U
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
3. Exam'ine roughing-in for mechanical and electric:ai systems to verify actualloca-
tions of connections before equipment and fixture installation.
4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and sys-
tems are to be installed.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been cor-
rected Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and condi-
tions.
u
u
3.02 PREPARATION
'u
A.
Existing Utility Informalion: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust,
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility ap-
purtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having ju-
risdiction.
" .
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 73 00 - 2
B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied. by Owner
or others unless permitted under the folloWing conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner's representative in writing not less than three days in advance of
proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.
C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Re-
check measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are in-
dicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field meas-
urements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work,
D. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown dia-
grammatically on Drawings.
E. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions:. Immediately on discovery of the
need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Ar-
chitect Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together withrecommen-
dations for changing the Contract Documents.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A Verification: Before proceeding to layout the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies
are discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B. General: Engage a professional land surveyor certified in the State of Indiana to layout
the Work using acceptedsurveyihgpractices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to ob-
tain required dimensions.
3. Inform installers' of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major elEiment as the Work pro-
gresses.
5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard es-
tablished by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines
and levels. Include. beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather condi-
tions, name and duty of each suryey party member, and types of instruments and tapes
used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.
3.04 FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property cor-
ners.
B.
Reference Points: Locate e,xisting permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar
reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent bench-
marks and control points during construction operations.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u!
u'
u
I 'i
U'I
UI
V'I,'
,I:...
U
U
u
[yo
I :
U
u
o
u
IU
u
u
IU
I
, I'
I I !
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 73 00 - 3
3.05
c.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Pro-
ject site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities
having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1.
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
D0cuments.
Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed, Restore marked
construction to its original condition.
2.
3.
D.
Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real
property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by professional land
surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately posi-
tioned as shown on the survey.
1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, exist-
ing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage,
grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.
2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded
by or with authorities having jurisdiction.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment
and elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for main-
tenance and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
3,
s.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing prod-
ucts in applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging opera-
tions or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F.
Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each
component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the
Work.
1.
Mounting Heights: Mounting heights shall comply with ANSI A117.1 including
State and Local Codes and Federal American with Disabilities Act (ADA) re~
quirements
a. Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights
directed by Architect.
2. Allow far building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
G.
Joints: Make joints of uniform widU1. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indi-
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 73 00 - 4
cated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form
hairline joints.
H. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where install;3tions include manufactured products, comply
with the manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation; to
the extent that these instructions and recommendations are more explicit or more strin-
gentthan requirements indicated in the contract documents.
3.06 PROGRESS CLEANING
A General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joinbuse areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
B. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the con-
struction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or oth-
erwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.07 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove mal-
functioning units, replace with new units, and retest
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for
proper operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and
safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment
3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written in::;tructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.09 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and
finishes. Comply with requirements iil Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be
repaired without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating compo-
nents that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 73 29 - 1
SECTION 01 7329- CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
u
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
o
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
u
C
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching
1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections include specific requirements and limitations
applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
2. Requirements in this Section include mechanical and electrical installations. Re-
fer to mechanical and electrical Sections for other requirements and limitations
applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.
c:
lJ
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance
of other Work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after
installation of other Work.
o
1.04 SUBMITTALS
u
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures before the time
cutting and patChing will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the fol-
lowing information:
u
u
1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and in-
dicate why they cannot be avoided.
2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include
changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in
building's appearance and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the
Work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect.
List utilities that will be relocated and .those that will be temporarily out of service.
Indicate how long service will be disrupted.
6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to
structural elements, submit details and ~ngineering calculations showing integra-
tion of reinforcement with original structure.
7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposaibefore
cutting apd patching. Approval does not waive right 10 later require removal and
replacement of unsatisfactory work.
u
r I
U
'U
I
I I (
U'
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
iU
I ,.
,U
A.
Structural Elements: Do nol cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could
change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 73 29 - 2
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements, including vapor
barriers, membranes, flashings, wiring, piping, or related components in a manner that
could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to per-
form as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life
or safety.
D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results-in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the ex-
terior or in occupied spaces ina manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the
building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and
patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
1. If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch exposed Work.
E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties
involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review ar-
eas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential
conflicts before proceeding.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as
not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2,01 MATERIALS
A General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical. to existing materials. For exposed surfaces,
use materials that visually. match existing adjacent surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3_01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and Conditions under which cutting and patching
are to be performed.
1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibilitywith and-suitability of sub-
strates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected,
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
D-
O
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 73 29 - 3
u
C.
Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or
abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occu-
pied areas.
u
u
3.03
PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting
and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. Cut existing con-
struction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construc-
tion, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
u
u
B.
Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements re-
tained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original In-
staller; complywith original Installer's written recommendations.
u
, 1
U
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to
size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily
cover openings when not in use.
2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished Side into
concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or
a diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating arid Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31
Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions
to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit
to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
u
u
c.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar op-
erations fonowing performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as in-
visible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified
in other Sections of these Specifications.
.U
U
u
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate
evidence of patching and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one fin-
ished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new
space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appear-
ance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials,
if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
'U
a.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermedi-
ate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire un-
broken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch
blends with adjacent surfaces.
u
'U
iU
I
U
4.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclo-
sure to a weathertight condition.
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
o
o
o
D
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
.0
o
u
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 77 00 - 1
SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
lJ.
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
-
lJ
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
U
D
A,
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
u
1, Inspection procedures.
2. Project Record'Documents.
3. Operation and maintenance manuals.
4. Warranties.
5. Instruction of Owner's personnel
6. Final cleaning.
I \
U
1.03
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
~\
U
U
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
( I
\ i
U
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list).
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements,
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bondS, maintenance service agree-
ments, final certifications, and similardocumerits.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and
access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certifi-
cates,and similar releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance
manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final re-
cord information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location desig-
nated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where ap-
plicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise
Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startuptestihg of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
11 , Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation,
and maintenance.
13, Complete final cleaning requirements; including touchup painting.
14, Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate
visual defects.
1-
.U
8
U
u
u
, "
IU
IU
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On re-
ceipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unful-
filled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after
inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items
identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be is-
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 77'00 - 2
sued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspec-
tions as incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final
Completion.
1.04 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application forPayment according to Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect'!:; Substantial Completion inspection list of items
to be completed or corrected (puncl:llist), endorsed and dated by Architect.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing. insurance coverage complying with insur-
ance requirements.
4. Submit pest.control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of prod-
ucts, equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of
request, Architectwill either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled re-
quirements. Architect Will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will
notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate
will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspeclion when the Work identified in previous inspec-
tions as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Pro-
ject Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record
Documents for Architect's reference during normat working hours.
B.
Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Con-
tract Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual. installation where installation varies from
that shown or;ginally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, 10 prepare
the marked-up Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that can-
not be readily identified and recorded Jater.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as posSible after obtaining it. Record and check
the markup: before enclosing concealed installations.
d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of
showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where
Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Draw-
ings.
2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored penciL Use other colors to distin-
guish between changes for different categories of the Work atthe $3me location.
o
o
o
o
o
O.
o
o
o
o
Q
o
o
,0
o
,0
o
o
o
G
u
U
II
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 77 00 - 3
3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or
omitted from original Drawings.
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate
numbers, and similar identification where applicable.
5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT
RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets;
bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover
sheets.
u
C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, inCluding addenda
and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where
installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifica-
tions.
lJ
o
1 . Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials,
and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
2. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, where applicable.
D.
Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to
indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that in-
dicated in Product Data.
u
1.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes
in manufacturer~s written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, where applicable.
2.
i
U
E.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble. miscellaneous records required by other
Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with
actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each,
ready for continued use and reference.
lJ
1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
u
A.
Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and
as follows:
u
u
U
I.U
[
:U
I ..
U
U
1. Operation Data:
a. Emergency instructions and. procedures.
b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating
standards.
c. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and week-
end operations.
d. Description of controls and sequence of operations.
e. Piping diagrams.
2. Maintenance Data:
a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.
b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier.
c. Maintenance procedures.
d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine mainte-
nance.
e. Maintenance record forms.
f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 77 00 - 4
g. Copies of maintenance service agreements.
h. Copies of warranties and bonds.
B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size.
Bind and index data in heavy~duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness
necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded
oversized sheets. Identify each binder' on front and spine with the printed title
"OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of con-
tents.
1.07 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions
of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Comple-
tion is indicated.
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of
designqted portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner dur-
ing construction period by separate' agreement with Contractor.
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of
the Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties anq bonds in heavy~duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf bind-
ers, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8~
1/2-by-11-inch paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate war-
ranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description
of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name,
address, and telephone number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.
PART 2 c PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Instruction: Instruct Owner'spersonnef to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsys-
tems, and equipment not part of a system.
3.02 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to
comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipol-
lution regulations.
o
o
o
o
o
0,
o
o
o
[]
o
o
o
.0
o
o
o
o
o
tJ
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 77 00 - 5
u
u
u
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners forfinal cleaning. Clean
each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning
and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1 . Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certi-
fication:of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
U';
"
lJ
o
~
"
J\
LY
u
'-.
u
u
11,
u
U.
o
'U
u
ilJ
a.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction
activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste ma-
terial, litter, and other foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains,
and other foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-
textured surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material
from Project site.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free
condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid dis-
turbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective sur-
faces to their original condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including
roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and
similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and
windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-
obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other dam-
aged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to
scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and
surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily re-
paired or restored or that atready show evidence of repair or restoration.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
I.
j.
k.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical
and electrical nameplates.
I.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar
equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including
stains resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean ex-
posed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters dur-
ing construction.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full effi-
ciency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by
hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury
vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
c.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection
for and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 77 00 - 6
1. If, as a result of report, OwnElr decides to rid Project of pests, Owner will deter-
mine whether to self~perform such work or whether to execute a Change Order.
D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury
debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or
dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site
and dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
.0
Q
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Q
o
j'
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 78 00 - 1
D
SECTION 01 7800 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
u'
u'
"'-
Ll
U\
[I
U
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submitone set of marked-up Record Prints and one copy of
plots from corrected Record CAD Drawings and Record CAD Drawing files.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda
and contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.
D
(J
1.
Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance
manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in the manual instead of
submittal as Record Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RECORD DRAWINGS
.U
A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Draw-
ings and Shop Drawings.
.U
U'
1.
Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation
varies. from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained re-
cord data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity,
to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.
Content: TyPes of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the fol-
lowing:
2.
r"'-"
U.
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
J. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
I. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
o
I U
U
'U
3.
Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of
showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings
are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
IU
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 78 00 - 2
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distin-
guish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or
omitted from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT
RECORD DRAWING" in.a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings
into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include
identification on cover sheets.
2. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect.
e. Name of Contractor.
C. Record CAD Drawings: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review markechJp Record Prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a
full sel of corrected CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings, as follows:
1. Format: Same CAD program, version, and operating system as the original Con-
tract Drawings.
2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record
Prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
3. Refer instances of Uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of CAD Drawings of the Contract Draw-
ings for use in recording information.
2.02 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installa-
tion varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials,
and equipmentfurnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
2. Record the name oUhe manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information
necessary to provide a record of selections made.
3. For each principa:! product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been
submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record
Product Data.
2.03 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to inqicate the actual product installation where installa-
tion var,ies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellane-
ous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work.
Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and refer-
ence.
o
o
o
o
o
Q
o
o
Q
o
~"!....
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
U
D
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 78 00 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Pro-
ject Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record
Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
p
U
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Sam-
ples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not
use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents
in good order and in a clean, dry, legible conditfon, protected from deterioration and loss.
Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal
working hours.
u
U
END OF SECTION
u
U.
U
lJ
u.
U~
o
U
u
,8
u
u
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
0,
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 78 39 - 1
u
SECTION 0178 39 - OPERATION.AND MAINTENANCE DATA
f t
U~
PART 1 - GENERAL
u
U'
ill
lJ
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Condilionsand other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation
and maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4 Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of systems and equipment.
"
U
U.
'..
U'
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and mainte-
nance manuals.
2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings
for operation and maintenance manuals.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
u
A.
Final Submittal: Submit 1 copy of 0 & M manual in finat form at least 15 days before
Substantial Completion. Architect will return draft with comments within 15 days after in-
spection for Substantial Completion.
.-
U'
1.
Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit2
copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's com-
ments.
u'
c
1.04 COORDINATION
A.
Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by
more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate infor-
mation furnished by rwresentatives and prepare manuals.
. ~
U
U
!
o
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2,01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1. List of documents.
2. List of systems.
3, List of equipment.
4. Table of contents.
u
U
B.
List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to op-
eration and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C.
List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 78 39 - 2
For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and
maintenance manual.
E Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance
manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with th~ same desig-
nation used in the Contract Documents. If no designatiori exists, assign a designation
according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, '!Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Docu-
mentation for Building Systems."
2.02 MANUALS, GENERAL
A Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section
for each system and subsystem, and a separate sectJonfbr each piece of equipment not
part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Tille page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following infor-
mation:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address -of Project.
3. Name and address of OwneL
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
6. Name and address of Architect.
7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product induded in manual, identified by product name, in-
dexed to the content of the vcilume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section num-
ber in Project Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in
each volume of the set.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabeti-
cally by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instruCtions for sub-
systems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness nec-
essary to accommodate contents, sized to hold8-1I2-by-11-inch (115-by-280-
mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents
and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.
a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system,
organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related
components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide es-
sential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or
system.
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject mat-
ter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
o
o
o
o
o
o
'0
o
o
o
o
o
'0
-,
o
o
o
O.
o
o
u
U'
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 78 39 - 3
2.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark
each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major compo-
nents of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to
Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.
Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose di-
agnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2~by~11-inch (115-by-280-mm), 20-lb/sq.
ft. (75-g/sq. m) white bond paper.
Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with
text.
[' \'
U
0,
D
3.
4.
5.
b,
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text
pages and use as foldouts.
If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings
in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropri-
ate locations in manual, insert typewriften pages indicating drawing titles,
descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.
'U
('
lJ
a.
.0
2.03
EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
.TO,,:",
U
~
ro,
U
lJ
U
U
/',
U
1, Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
B.
Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, in-
clude instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment. and
component:
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.
C.
Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error mes-
sages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating per-
sonnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
1, I
V
D.
Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
u
U
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown ins~ructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. RequiredseqiJences for electric or electronic 'systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
2.04
OPERATION MANUALS
,
U
U
A.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 78 39 - 4
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1 D.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
Operating standards.
Operating procedures.
Operating logs.
Wiring diagrams.
Control diagrams.
Piped system diagrams.
Precautions against improper use.
Ucense requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number,
2. Manufacturer's name,
3. Equipment identifiGation with serial nlimber of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and. control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences -for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram
controls as installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.05
A.
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Content Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materi.
als and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List eaGh product included in manual; identified by product name
and arranged to match manuaPs table of contents. For each product, list name, address,
and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-
reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Color, pattern, and texture.
Material and chemieal composition.
o
o
o
o
o
o
.0
O.
o
o
,0
o
o
o
o
o
,0
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 78 39 - 5
U
.0,
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the fol-
lowing:
o
,G.
1 . Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials
and related services.
i I
U
~~
'0,
F.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circum-
stances and conditions that would affect validity ofwarranUes or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
2.06
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
...,
A Content For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, in-
clude source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance pro-
cedures" maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information,
maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
o
u
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in
the manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of con-
tents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or sup~
plier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number
and tiUein Project Manual,
u,
c.
Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documenta-
tion including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
0'
U
o
U
10
(-,l,"
U
o
1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disas-
sembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts,and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
DO'
Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essen-
tial maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2_ Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly in-
structions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.
E.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements. list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly,
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 78 39 - 6
monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts,
with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation
and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G.
Maintenance Service Contracts' Include copies of maintenance agreements with name
and telephone number of service agent.
H.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circum-
stances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that
provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B. Emergency Manual, Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating pro-
cedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types
of emergencies indicated.
C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating
care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and main-
tenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and
piece of equipment not part of asystem.
1 . Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare in-
formation for each 'system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a sys-
tem.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an in-
structional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, in-
clude only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to iden-
tifyeach product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one
item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract
Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not
applicable.
1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not avail-
able and where the information is necessary for proper operation and mainte-
nance of equipment or systems.
F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control se-
quence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Re-
cord Drawings to ensure correct illUstration of completed installation.
1.
Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and mainte-
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
G
a
o
.0
o
'0
o
o
o
'0
o
o
u
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
01 78 39 - 7
nance manuals.
2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division t Sec-
tion "Project Record Documents."
( \
U
G.
Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for the schedule for submitting
operation and maintenance documentation.
u
END OF SECTION
c
[\
lJ
,0
U
.U.
o
U
D
0'
o
/
(-
U
U
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u'
o
Q
o
D
G
o
o
o
'0
o
u
u
0
"
U
u\
'.,
f-I
'u'
'1
W
U
0,
0 W
I-
",", W
U ~
U (.)
z
D- O
U
". ',.. II
J:
U M
I D z
I 0
I
I r.... -
U en
I
-
I >
, 0
, -
C
I
, 0
I
I
I 0
0,
,..,.'
o
o
o
10
[1
o
o
o
n
u
0.
o
U
o
o
o
0'
o
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 00 - 1
u
o
SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
.---..,
.U
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
u'
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
A
SUMMARY
1.02
Q
G
U
G\
U'
r '
U
1.03
"'-
~
/~
~
U
r
U
U
o
!O
If
l[.
0,
This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, con-
crete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes,
B,
Reinforcement Option: Contractor may use fibrous reinforcement in lieu of welded wire
fabric where noted on plan.
C.
Related Sections include the following:
i. Division 31 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
2. Division 32 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement"'for concrete pavement and
walks.
3. Division 03 Section "Concrete Surface Treatment" for sealers[.][and toppings.]
SUBMITTALS
A Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteris-
tics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant
adjustments. Include the following information:
i. Area(s) in the project where the mix will be used.
2. Complete mix constituent list by weight
3. Specific cementitious constituents by weight
4. Water cement ratio
5. Slump prior to addition of water reducing admixtures.
6. Admixture identification with product sheets
7. Aggregate gradation by screen/sieve size
8. Test data sUbstantiating design strength per ACl-301 Method 1 or 2. Test data
submitted must be less than 2 years old.
C.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: [Prepared by or under the supervision of a
qualified professional engineer detailing][Detail] fabrication, bending, and placement,
prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and DetafliF:1g of Concrete Reinforcement." In-
clude material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement,
and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for open-
ings through concrete structures.
D.
Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified profes-
sional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. Design and
engineering of form work are Contractor's responsibility.
1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping
formwork, shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring.
E.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test re-
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 00 - 2
suits for concrete materials and mix design test.
F. Materials Certificates: Provide materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test
reports when permitted by ArchitectJEngineer. Materials certificates shall be signed by
manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item. complies with, or ex-
ceeds, specified requirements.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer whp is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engi-
neering services of .the kind indicated.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equip-
ment.
1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association's Certificatton of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.
C. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and
standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete".
2. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete".
3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Stanqard Practice".
4. ACI 311 "Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials".
5. ASTM E 1155 "Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Level-
ness Using the FNumber System."
6. Portland Cement Association "Positioning Welded Wire Fabric".
7. ASTM C1116, Type III "Standard Specifications for Fiber- Reinfqrced Concrete
and Shotcrete".
D. Preinstallation Conference: Cond!1ct conference at Project site to comply with require-
ments in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1. Before submitting design mixes, review concrete mix desfgn and examine proce-
dures for ensuring quality Qf concrete materials. Require representatives of each
entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the fol-
lowing:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency re$ponsible for concrete design mixes.
c. Ready-mix concrete producer.
d. Concrete subcontractor.
e. Primary admixiur.e manufacturers.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Inspect project site for all conditions which may affect concrete work for the project
including, but not limited to, site access for equipment and existing surfaces to be pro-
tected.
o
D
o
o
o
o
D.
o
,0
o
O.
Q
o
0,
o
o
o
A
U
~
"
u
u
u
U
h '
l)
~.
Q
U
U
f"
'U,
/~U
U
D
U
U
D
, 0
I
I 0
I
, O'
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 00 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form"facing panels that will provide continuous,
true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize
number of joints.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved mate-
rial. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond
with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treat-
ments of concrete surfaces.
D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced
plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to pre-
vent spalling. of concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of
the exposed concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diame-
ter in concrete surface.
2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
B. Low-Alloy-Steel (Weldable) Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into
flat sheets.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports ac-
cording to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast con-
crete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete. and as
follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs.of wire bar supports contact
forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar
supports.
2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class Cor F.
B. Normal~Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows:
1. For exterior exposed surfaces, use crushed stone and sand. Do not use fine or
coarse aggregates containing spalling-causing deleterious substances.
2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C33 but. which have shown by spe-
cial test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 00 - 4
may be used when acceptable to ArchitecUEngineer.
C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330.
D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.
2.05 ADMIXTURES
A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent wa-
ter~soluble chloride ions by mass, of cementitious material and to be compatible with other
admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing, calcium chlo-
ride.
B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
D. High-Range, Wat~r-Reducing AdmixtUre (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F.
E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
2.06
FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A. Fibrous Reinforcement: Collated, monofilament of fibrillated, polypropylene fibers for
secondary reinforcement of concrete slabs and members. The product shall have a UL
rating.
1. Synthetic Fiber Reinforcing shall be 3/4" long and introduced into the concrete
mix at a rate of 1 to 1-1/2 Ibs of fibers per cubic yard of concrete as recom-
mended by manufacturer introduced at any time during the batching sequence of
dry materials.
2.07
W A TERSTOPS
A. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572,for embedding in concrete to prevent pas-
sage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional
changes.
B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, sodium
bentonite or other hydrophylic material for adhesive bonding to concrete. .
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Volclay Waterstop-RX; Colloid Environmental TechnologIes Co.
b. Conseal CS-231; Concrete Sealants Inc.
c. Mlrastop; Mirafi Moisture Protection, Div. of Royal Ten Cate (USA), Inc.
2.08
VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Vapor. Barrier: A flexible, preformed sheer membrane having a water-vapor permeance
rate no greater than 0.036 perms and resistant to c!ecay when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 154, Section 7 and otherwise conforming to ASTM E 1745, Class C or higher.
Virgin polyethylene sheet shall be no less than 10 mils thick in accordance with ACI
302.1 R96. Note that the permeance rate requirement may require is-mil product de-
pending on the manufacturer's published test data.
o
o
o
o
o
D
g
o
o
OJ
r-'
LJ
o
:0
0-
o
o
o
o
o
w'
u
2531 0
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 00 - 5
o
o
B
U
q
u
2.09
( I
U
r -I
U
10
lJ
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. "StegoWrap Vapor Barrier", Stego Industries LLC, San Juan Capistrano,
CA (877-464-7834).
b. "Vapor Block", Raven Industries, (800-635-3456)
c, "Vapor Mat", W.R. Meadows (800-342-5976)
d. "Moistop Ultra A", Fortifier Building Products Systems (800-773-4777)
2. Accessories: Provide and install with manufacturer's seam tape at each overlap
joint and seal each penetration per their recommendations.
3. Application: Use under epoxy terrazzo.
B- <Occasional Option>Vapor Barrier Retarder: Use only materials which are resistant to
decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: Polyethylene sheet not
less than 8 mils thick.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305g/sq. m) dry.
B.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
sheet.
C.
Water: Potable.
D.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,
Class B.
2.10 RELATED MATERIALS
1~1
U
D
o
o
lJ
A.
Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
C.
Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid
curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements.
D.
Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217 -inch-thick galvanized steel sheet.
Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
E.
Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch (0.85
mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to pre-
vent intrusion of concrete or debris.
2.11 CONCRETE MIXES
F.
Non-Shrink Grout: CRD-C 621, factory pre-mixed grout.
o
D'
r
U
A.
Prepare design miws for each type and strength of concrete by either Laboratory trial
batch or fieldexperierice methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method used,
use an independent testing facHity acceptable to ArchitecUEngineer for preparing and re-
porting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field
quality control testing.
1. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 20 percent of cement content by weight.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 00 - 6
8.. Submit written reports to Architect/Engineer and Structural Engineer of each proposed
mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin con-
crete production until mixes .have been reviewed by Architect/Engineer.
C. Design Mixes: Provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated
on drawings.
Location f'c w/c % Air
1. Footings, piers, grade 3000 0.5 2.5-4.5%
beams, and all other below
grade.
2. Interior Slabs on grade, 4000 0.5 Optional, 3%
structural slabs, beams, col- max with shake
umns,. walls. on hardener.
3. Concrete subject to freezing 4000 0.5 4.5-7.5%
and thawing.
4. Exterior slabs subject to de- 4500 0.45 4.5-7.5%
ieers.
5. <Occ>Reinforced co'hcrete 5000 0.4 4.5-7.5%
subject to deicers, salt spray,
or brackish water.
6. <Occ>Exterior thin topping 4000 0.5 4.5-7.5%
sections.
Notes:
fc=Min 28 day compressive strength
w/c=Maximum Water/Cement ratio
D.
Lightweight Concrete: Proportion mix as herein specified. Design mix to produce
strength as noted on drawirlgs, with a dry weight of not less than 951bs. or more than 110
Ibs. after 28 days. Limit shrinkage to 0.03 percent at 28 days.
E.
Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor
when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circum-
stances warrant; at no additional cost to Owner and as accepted by Architect/Engineer.
Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and
accepted by ArchitectlEngine~r before using in work.
F.
Admixtures:
1.
Use water-reducing admixture or high range water-reducing admixture (super
plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability.
Use non-chlorid~ accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient
temperatures below 50 deg F (10 deg C).
Use high-range water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for in-
dustrial slabs, architectural concrete, parking structure slabs, concrete required
to be watertight, and concrete with water/cement ratios below 0.50.
Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indi-
cated. Add air~entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescriped rate to result in
concrete at point of placement h<;lving total air content with a tolerance of
plus-Dr-minus 1-1/2 percent within following lim its:
2.
3.
4.
a. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer
chemicals, or subjected to hydraulic pressure:
1) 4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 5.5 percent (severe exposure)
o
o
o
.0
B
o
o
D
0-
o
o
o
o
o
J
o
D
n
o
Q
[j
u
o
[J
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 00 - 7
1-1/2" max. aggregate.
2) 4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure)
1" max. aggregate.
3) 5.0 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure)
3/4" max. aggregate.
4) 5.5 percent (moderate exposure); 7.0 percent (severe exposure)
1/2" max. aggregate.
b. Other Concrete (not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure):
2 percent to 4 percent air.
5. Use admixtures for water-reducing and set-control in strict compliance with
manufacturer's directions.
D
--
~U
o
U
G.
Water-Cement Ratio: Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum wa-
ter-cement (W/C) ratios as follows:
1. Subjected to freezing and thawing; W/C 0.50.
2. Subjected to deicers/watertight; W/C oA5.
3. Subjected to brackish water, salt spray, or deicers; W/C DAD.
H.
Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of place-
ment as follows:
1 . General: 4" +/- 1 n
2. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super-plasticizer): Not more than 7" after
addition of HRWR to site-verified 3"-5" slump concrete.
u
o
Q
o
U
U
D
U
U
2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.13 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery
time from 1-112 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F,
reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FORMWQRK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support. ver-
tical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until
concrete structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of AC1117.
1. Earth Forms: If recommended by Soils Engineer and approved by Archi-
tecVEngineer, forms for footings may be earth. Increase width of footing by 4"
when using earth forms.
c. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 00 - 8
D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
E. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in. finished concrete surfaces.
F. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of
form work is inaccessible. Close opehings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely
braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at incon-
spicuous locations.
G. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
H. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking,screeds, and bulk-
heads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such
items.
I. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces fo receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust,
dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
J. Retighten forms and bracing before placing. concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks
and maintain proper alignment.
K. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's writ-
ten instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.02
EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining
work that is allached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions. and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.03
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work,
that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not
less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough
to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection
operations are maintained.
B.<Elevated Concrete>Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural
elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved 2B-day
compressive strength.
1. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by'testing representative
field- or laboratory-cured test specimens according to ACI 301.
2. Remove forms only ifshores have peen arranged to permit removal of forms
Without loosening or disturbing shores.
C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated,
or 'otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces.
Apply new form-release agent.
D, When forms are reused; dean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close
joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed
concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.
3.04
SHORES AND RESHORES
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
o
o
u
o
o
o
o
u.
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 00 - 9
B
A.
Comply with ACI318 (ACI318M), AC1301, and recommendations in ACI347R for de-
sign, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.
3.05 VAPOR RETARDERS
[j
A.
Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
U
D
[J
U
D
U
o
3.06
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSl's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder
before placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mil[ scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate
and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do
not tack weld"crossing reinforcing bars.
1. Shop- or field-weld reinforcement according to AWS 01.4, where indicated.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to mini-
mize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Off-
set laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace
overlaps with wire.
3.07
JOINTS
u
A.
General: ConstruCt joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of con-
crete.
o
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
u
1 . Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Db not continue reinforcement
through sides of strip placements of floors and srabs.
2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastickeyway-sectiorl forms, or bulkhead
forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches
into concrete.
3. Use epoxy~bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
( \
U
o
o
u
o
C.
Control (Contraction) Joints in Slabscon-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,
sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal
to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and fin-
ishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3 mm). Repeat grooving of con-
traction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on
concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatter-
proof abrasive or diamond~rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 00 - 10
o
o
concrete when cutting action will. not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface
and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
EJ
D.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install ioint-filler strips at
slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams, and other locations, as indicated.
o
1. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 in'ch
below finished. concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Sec-
tion "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
0.
o
3.08 WATERSTdPS
3.09
A.
Flexible Waterstops: Install in constructipn joints as indicated to form a continuous dia-
phragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops
during progress of Work. FieldofC;lbricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
D
o
B.
Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indi-
cated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, bonding or mechanically fastening
and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
o
o
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embed-
ded items is complete. and that required inspections have been performed.
B.
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be
placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause .seams or planes of weakness. If
a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. De-
posit concrete to avoid segregation.
[]
o
D
o
o
C.
Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner
to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic,
to avoid cold joints.
D.
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within
limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
E.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply withACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work
from physical damage or reduced streng~h .that could be caused by frost; freezing ac-
tions, or low temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg .F, uni-
formly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of
placement.
2. Do not use frozen m(3terials ar materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozeh $ubgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators containing more than 005 percent chloride ions.
o
o
F.
Hot-Weather Placement; Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R
and :as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist:
[
[
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F
at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may"be used to con-
[J
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 00 - 11
u
u
trol temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is: calculated to total amount of
mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not
exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement,. and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
U
D
3.10
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
[J
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie
holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections ex-
ceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified.
o
u
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, ar-
ranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and
patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8
inch (3 mm) in height.
D
U
1 _ Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coat-
ing or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing,
dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting.
2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth~formed finished concrete:
u
o
o
u
o
U
D
U
U
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten con-
crete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until produc-
ing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that cre-
ated by the rubbing process.
2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency
of thick. paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement
to one and one-half parts fine sand with a1: 1 mixture of bonding admixture and
water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so
color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and re-
move excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep
surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly
across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.11
FLOOR FLATNESS. AND LEVELNESS CRITERIA:
A. Local Flatness/Levelness Tolerances: All floor slabs shall conform to the following ACI~
117 F-number requirements:
1. Specified overall value: FF-36/FL-24
2. Minimum local value: FF-24/FL-16
3 Elevated slabs: FF-25
4. Slabs to receive subsequent finishes:
a. Scratch finish: FF-15/FL-13
b. Float finish: FF-18/FL-15
c. Trowel finish: FF-20/FL-17
B. General Conformity to Design Grade: The entire floor shall fall within + or - 3/4" of the
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 00 - 12
finished floor elevation shown on the plans.
C. Design thickness tolerance shall be as follows:
1.
2.
Slabs up to and including 5": -1/4", +3/8"
Slabs over 5" : -3/8",+3/8"
D.
Floor Tolerance Measurements: Floor flatness and levelness tests on floors shall be
conducted in accordance with the provisions set forth in ASTM E1155-87. Floor toler-
ance measurements shall be made by the Owner within 16 hours after completion of the
final troweling operation using a "Dipstick Floor Profiler". Results of all floor tolerance
tests - including a formal notice of acceptance or rejection of the work - shall be provided
to the Contractor within 24 hours after data collection.
1.
Weekends and hdlidays shall be ignored when computing the testing and report-
ing deadlines specified above.
E. Remedy for out-of tolerance work: All floor sections measuring at or above both of the
specified minimum local F-numbers shall be accepted for tolerances compliance as con-
structed. All floor sections measuring below either (or both) of the specified minimum lo-
cal F-numbers shall be removed and replaced (in the case of slabs-on"grade), or ground
and/or re-topped (in the case of elevated slabs). No remedies for sub-minimum local
F-number sections other than replacement of slabs-on-grade, and grinding or re-topping
of elevated slabs will be permitted. For the purposes of this paragraph, a floor section
shall be any rectangular area bound by column and/or half-column lines.
1. If the entire project random trafflc floor, when completed, fails to meet or exceed
either of the specified overall F- numbers, then the contractor shall rebate to the
owner an amount equal to:
a $0.50 x (Total balance of square feet measuring below FF-36).
b. $0.50 x (Total balance of square feet measuring below FL-24).
c. Whichever is more.
3.12
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1 Rfor screeding, restraightening,
and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and
bull-floated or darbied. Use stiffbrushes, brooms, or rakes.
1.
Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete
floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement
terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes.
C.
Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is
small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill
low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform,
smooth, granular texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to
floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing,
built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
D.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete
by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
[
[
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 00 - 13
u
u
is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface
defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1.
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed
to view or to be covered with resiHent flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set
over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system
Finish and measure sl'Jrface so gap at any point between concrete surface and
an unleveled freestanding 10-foot-long straightedge, resting on two high spots
and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following:
u
u
2.
u
a. 1/4 inch, general. .
b. 1/8 inch for wood, terrazzo, and fluid-applied flooring.
E.
Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second trowel-
ing, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by
either thickset or thincset method. Immediately after second troweling, and when con-
crete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
u
u
u
F.
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately .after float finishing, slightly-roughen trafficked surface by brooming
with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required
final finish with Architect before application.
lJ
U
3.13
GRINDING
A. Install concrete.in accordance to flatness requirements listed for floor type.
1. Grind floor slabs at applications to receive wood, terrazzo or fluid-applied flooring
materials t6 achieve slopes of not more than 1/8" in 10' radius, or as otherwise
indicated by flooring manufacturer
u
u
u
o
u
u
u
u
3.14
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings Jeft in concrete structures, unless otherwise indi-
cated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified,
to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated
or required to complete Work.
8. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and founda-
tions as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct
elevations,complyingwith diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines
and equipment.
C. Grout base plates and foundations as indicated, using nonshrink, nonmetallic grout com-
plying with ASTM C 1107
3.15
CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recom-
mendations in ACl 305R for hot-weather protection durin'g curing.
B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by moist
curing, by moisture~retaining cover curing, and by combinations thereof, as herein speci-
fied.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03,3000 - 14
1.
Provide moisture curing by following.methods.
a. Keep concrele surface continuously wet by covering with water.
b. Continuous water''-fog spray.
c. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly
saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorp-
tive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4"
lap over adjacent abs()~pt;ve covers,
2.
Provide moisture-cover curing as follows:
a.
Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing con-
crete, placed in widestpraclicable width with sides and ends lapped at
least 3~' and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Imm~diately repair
any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and water..,
prooftape.
3.
Provide curing and sealing compound to exposed interior slabs and to exterior
slabs, walks, and curbs, as follows:.
a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon
as final finishiflgoperations are complete (within 2 hours). Apply uni-
formly in continuous operation by power-spray or roller in accordance
with manufacturer's directions. Re-coat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and
repair damage during curing period.
b. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be
covered with. coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor
hardeher, waterproofing, damp proofing, membrane roofing, flooring
(such as ceramic or quarry tile, glue-down carpet), painting, and other
coatings and finish materials, unles? otherwise acceptable to Archi-
tecUEngineer.
C.
Formed Surfaces: Cure formed conGr'ete surfaces, including underside of beams, sup-
ported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure
after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by
one or a combination of the following method.s:
D.
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and otber surfaces, by one
or a combination of the following methods:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days
with the following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous watercfog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover
concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300,mm) lap over adjacent
absorptive covers.
2.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-
retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides
and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or
adhesive. Cure fornotless than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or
tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
~
c
[
[
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 00 - 15
o
a.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces
to receive floor coverings.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces
to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.
Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-
retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends
for use with floor coverings.
u
b.
D
c.
o
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or
roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to
heavyrainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of
coating and repair damage during curing period.
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after ini-
tial application. Repeat process 24 hours tater and apply a second coat. Main-
tain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
D
u
o
3.16
LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
A. Floor treatments are specified in Division 03 Section "Concrete Floor Treatment."
u
B.
<Only if no Section 0330 60>Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and
finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.
o
1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, faitance, and other contaminants
and complete surface repairs.
2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days old.
3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms;
rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess ma-
terial until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is
rough or porous.
u
u
c.
<Only if no Section 03 30 60>Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat
of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
u
u
3.17
<Warehouse>JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
u
u
[J
B. Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in
formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.18
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Re-
move and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to
two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.2-mm) sieve, using only
enough water for handling and placing.
u
C.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities,
cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the
surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
[J
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 00 - 16
D.
. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for fin-
ish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas.
Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped tem-
plate.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, pop-
outs, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25
mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced
sections regardless cifwidth, and other objectionable conditions.
2. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or
less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove de-
fective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least
3/4 inch (19 mm} dearanceall around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact
with patching Concrete and apply bonding agent Mix patching concrete of same
materiells and mix as original.concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place,
compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same man-
ner as adjacent CQncrete.
3. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with
patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and
clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and
apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.
Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched
area continuously moist for alleast 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhe-
sive. and patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
3.19
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sam-
ple materials, perform tests, and submit' test reports during concrete placement according
to requirements specified in this Article.
B. <Occasional>Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during con-
crete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in
this Article.
C. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each
concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m),
plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-
strength tests for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at
least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five
are used.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less thafl one test for each day~s. pour of each concrete mix. Perform ad-
ditional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
D
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 00 - 17
u
u
ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each
concrete mix.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F (4,4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and
one test for each composite sample.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31 M; cast and laboratory cure one
set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceed-
ing 5 cu. yds. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. over and above the first 25
cu. yds. of each concrete class placed in anyone day; one specimen tested at 7
days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one retained in reserve for later test-
ing if required.
u
o
u
o
D.
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contrac-
tor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing
and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength
at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and
type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests.
E.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
u
o
u
F.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting
agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders comply-
ing with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect.
u
u
u
u
END OF SECTION
U
LJ
[J
D
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 60 - 1
u
SECTION 033060 - CONCRETE SURFACE TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
[J
U
D
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
r I
U
1. Penetrating Anti-Spalling Sealer:
2. Water Based Curing, Sealer and Dustproofer Compound:
B. Related Sections include the following:
U
D
1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete to which finishes and
sealers are to be applied.
1.03
SUBMITT ALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
o
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
o
u
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work simi-
lar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
lJ
U
, U
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of
one of the following manufacturers:
1. Penetrating Anti-Spalling Sealer:
a. "Enviroseal 20"; Hydrozo Incorp.
b. "Pentane WB"; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
c. "Weather Worker S20"; Dayton Superior Corp.
2. Water Based Curing, Sealer and Dustproofer Compound:
'U
o
I
:U
I
U
a. "Super Diamond Clear VOX"; Euclid Chemical Co.
b. "Dress & Seal WB 30"; L & M Construction Chemicals.
2.02
EXTERIOR CONCRETE TREATMENTS
A. Penetrating Anti-Spalling Sealer: Silane water based compound which has a 96% chlo-
ride-ion screen and a repellency factor of 92% when tested in accordance with NCHRP
#244, Test Method. In addition, the sealer-treated concrete must exhibit no scaling when
exposed to 120 cycles of freezing-and- thawing in accordance with ASTM C 672.
2.03
FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
03 30 60 - 2
A. Water Based Curing, Sealer and Dustproofer Compound: Liquid type membrane - form-
ing curing, sealer and dustpfoofer compound complying with ASTIvl C309, Type 1, Class
B and containing 30% solids in accordance with ASTM C4758.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXTERIOR CONCRETE TREATMENTS
A. Anti-Spallihg Treatment: Apply compounds to clean, dry concrete surfaces free of oil,
dirt, and other foreign material according to manufacturer's specifications.
3.02 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENliS
\
A. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound
to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
o
u
o
u
o
U
lJ
U
o
u
o
u
u
u
U
i ,-
IU
; U
U
>-
~
_Z
o
U)
~
:E
I
rq-
z
o
--
en
-
>
-
c
u
r
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
04 20 00 - 1
u
0'.
u
o
u
u
u
[j
u
u
SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1. Concrete masonry units.
2. Decorative concrete masonry units.
3. Acoustical concrete masonry units.
4. Precast concrete or cast stone trim units.
5. Mortar and grout.
6. Reinforcing steel.
7. Masonry joint reinforcement.
8. Embedded flashing.
9. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 07 Section "Air and Vapor Barrier Membrane" for treatment of face of
backup wythes of cavity walls.
2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal
flashing.
3. Division 07 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping at tops of masonry walls and at
openings in masonry walls.
C. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:
r
U
U
U
U
U
U
1. Steel lintels for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrica-
tions."
2. Hollow-metal frames in unit masonry openings, furnished and set under Division
8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames,"
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured prod-
uct specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing
bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
c. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:
1. Colored mortar Samples showing the full range of colors available.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following:
1.
Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required, showing the full
range of exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the com-
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
04 20 00 - 2
pleted construction.
2. Colored mortar Samples for each color required, showing the, full' range of colors
expected in the finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and
mortar ingredients to be used on Project.
3. Precast or cast stone trim sample:s, showing the full range of colors and textures
expected in the finished construction.
4. Weep holes/vents in color to match mortar color.
E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items
complies with requirements:
1. Written certification that fire-rated masonry units meet requirements of Under-
writers Laboratories, Inc.
2. Mill Certificates: Submit steel producer's certificates of mill analysis, tensile and
bend tests for reinforcement steel required for project.
F. Submit typewritten reports.to the Architect for all laboratory testing and field observations
on a weekly basis.
1. Verification of specified compressive stre.ngth of masonry at 28 days, fm, shall
be by submittal of certification by the supplier that all units supplied for this pro-
ject meet the specified compressive strength. Substantiating test data verified by
an independent testing agency must be submitted with certifications.
2. Grout Tests: Submit mortar and grout test results. Note: Minimum of (2) test
molds per 5,000 SF of wall. See Paragraph "Special Inspection" for additional
requirements for special inspection where indicated on plans.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards:
1. Comply with National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) TEK recommenda-
tions, as applicable, for installation of concrete unit masonry.
2. Meet more stringent requirements of standards above where conditions common
to bolhoccur.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1093 to conduct the lesting indicated,
as documented according to ASTM E 548.
C. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture
and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics,
through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required.
D. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious com-
ponent and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to
those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing
and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means,
as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F.
Mockups: Before installing unit masonry, build mockups to verify selections made under
sample Submittals and to demonstrate -aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and
execution. Build 48~inch square mockup to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
r
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
04 20 00 - 3
u
U
D
1.05
o
u
u
u
U
lJ
U
1.06
u
u
u
\
U
u
u
u
1. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry-cleaner as indicated.
2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
3. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied.
If units become wet, do not inst?" until they are dry.
B.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained
and contamination avoided.
D.
Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting
and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery contain-
ers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo
with weatherproof cover.
E.
Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumLilation
of dirt and oil.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of waifs, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
B. Do npt apply upiform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for
at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C.
Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be
left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact
with such masonry.
1.
Protect base. of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by cover-
ings spread on ground and over wall surface.
Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with
painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain
from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
2.
3.
D.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated
with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry
damaged by fro~tor by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction re-
quirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6fTMS 602 and Section 2104.3 of the Uniform
Building Code.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature
is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less
than 7 days after completing cleaning.
E.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity
conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artifi-
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
04 20 00 - 4
cial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required.
1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity
greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of
masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
1. Provide special ,shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers,
bonding, and other special Conditions.
B.
Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area com-
pressive strength of 2440 psi.
2. Weight Classification: Normal weight, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Size: Manufactured to the following dimensions:
a. 8 inches nominal (7-5/8 inches actual) x 16 inches nominal (15-5/8
inches actual), unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Decorative Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area com-
pressive strength of 2150 psi.
2. Weight Classification: Normal. weight, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Size: Manufactured to dimensions indicated for nondecorative units.
4. Finish: Exposed faces of the following general description matching color, pat-
tern, and texture of Architect's samples.
a. Normal-weight aggregate, splitcface finish.
b. Normalcweight aggregate, ground finish for horizontal accents.
5. Integral Water Repellent Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral wa-
ter-repellent 'admixture that'does not reduce flexural bond strength, Units made
with integral water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar
containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to
ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or
leaks on the back of the.test specimen.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1) Block Plus W-10; Addiment lnc,
2) Dry-Block; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction' Products Division.
3) Rheopel; Master Builders.
D.
Sound-absorbing (acoustical) masonry units: Concrete masonry units, each with two slot
apertures to provide sound absorption with factory installed noise attenuating fibrous fill-
ers with laminated metal septum. Provide the following:
1. "SoundbIClx"; The Proudfoot Company, Inc
2. Another mantlfacturer's product of a simifar and equivalent nature will be accept-
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
04 20 00 - 5
[ 1
U
able when, in the Architect's sole judgment rendered during the bidding period,
differences do not materially detract from the design concept or intended per-
formance.
3. Provide acoustical insulation inserts, wrapped where applicable for exterior ex-
posure.
u
2.02
PRECAST CONCRETE OR CAST STONE COPINGS
r~
U
A.
Precast Concrete Copings: Provide integrally colored architectural precast concrete units
with color achieved by using color pigments and any of the following as required to
achieve the selected color: gray cement, white cement, white aggregates (sand/stone),
dark aggregates (sand/stone).
o
u
1. Texture: Precast shall have a smooth, dense, fine-grained texture achieved by
acid etChing. The finished product shall show no obvious repairs or imperfections
other than minimal color variations when viewed with the unaided eye at a 20
foot distance in good typical daylight illumination.
2. The mix design used shall yield concrete with a minimum compressive strength
of 5000 psi, per ASTM C39-86 and with a water absorption that is not to exceed
5% by weight per ASTM C 642.
3. Applicable standards for inspection and quality control shall be per Appendix J
(Architectural Trim ReqUirements) in PCI MNL - 117 "Manual for Quality Control
for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products" (3rd Edi-
tion) and PCl's "Architectural Precast Concrete Design Manual, 2nd Edition".
U
i
U
U
s.
Cast Stone Copings: Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364.
U.
.
U
U
U
U
1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by labora-
tory testing according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by
ASTM C 1364.
C.
Reinforce copings as indicated and as required by ASTM C 1364. Use galvanized or ep-
oxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of material.
D.
Fabricate copings with sharp arris and details accurately reproduced with indicated tex-
ture on all exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Slopeexpased horizontal surfaces at least 1 :12, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Cure and finish copings as follows:
u
1 . Cure units in totally enclosed curing room under dense fog and water spray at 95
percent relative humidity for 24 hours.
2. Yard cure units until the sum of the mean daily temperatures for each day equals
or exceeds 350 deg F.
3. Acid etch units to remove cement film from surfaces indicated to be finished.
u
u
F. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for these
characteristics,
2.03
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-
weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mor-
tar color indicated.
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
04 20 00 - 6
B.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with
ASTM C 150. Type I or Type 1II"and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.
1. For pigmented mortar. use a colored cement formulation as reqljired to produce
the color indicated' or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard
formulations.
a. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight for
mineral oxides nor 2 percent for carbon black,
b. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of Portland Cement-Lime Mix by
weight for mineral oxides nor 1 percent for carbon black.
2. For colored-aggregate mortar, use natural color or white cement as necessary to
produce required mortar color.
D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggre-
gate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.
E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
F. Waler: Potable.
G, Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
a. Eaglebond; Blue Circle Cement.
b. Color Mortar Blend; Glen-Gery Corporation.
c. Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime; Holnam, Inc.
d. Centurion Colorbond PL; Lafarge Corporation.
e. Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime; Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
t. Riverton Portland Cement Lime Custom Color; Riverton Corporation
2, MortarPigments:
a. True Tone Mortar Colors; Davis Colors.
b. Centurion Pigments; Lafarge Corporation.
c. SGS Mortar Colors; Solomon Grind-Chern SerVices, Inc.
3. Cold-Weather Aclmixture:
a. Aceelguard 80; Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Morseled; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division.
c. Trimix-NCA; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.
2.04
REINFORCING STEEL
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M; ASTM A 616/A 816M, including
Supplement 1; or ASTM A 617/A 6i7M, Grade 60.
2.05
MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: ASTM A 951 and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for exterior walls.
Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or O.i48-inch diameter.
Wire Size for Cross Rods: Wi.7 or O.148-inch diameter.
Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
04 20 00 - 7
where indicated.
u
u
u
B.
For single-wythe masonry, provide either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods
and cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c.
C.
For multiwythe masonry, provide types as follows:
u
1. Ladder type with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches a.c.
and 1 side rod for each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches in
width, plus 1 side rod for each wythe of masonry 4 inches or less in width.
2. Adjustable (2-piece) type with single pair of side rods and cross ties spaced not
more than 16 inches o.c. and with separate adjustable veneer ties engaging the
cross ties. Cross ties are either U-shaped with eyes or rectangular. Space side
rods for embedment within each face shell of backup wythe and size adjustable
ties to extend at least halfway through outer wythe but with at least 5/B-inch
cover on outside face.
u
2.06 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL
u
A.
General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials
that comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated.
u
u
u
B. Hot~Dip Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coat-
ing.
C. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 366/A 366M cold-rolled, carbon-steel
sheet hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153.
2.07
RIGID ANCHORS
A. General: Fabricate from steel bars as follows:
u
u
u
1. 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long, with ends turned up 2
inches or with cross pins.
2. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153.
2.08
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Concealed Flashing with Exposed Drip-Edge.: For flashing not exposed to the exterior,
use the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Drip Edge Flashing: 26 gage stainless steel hemmed 3/16 inch drip edge incor-
porated with minimum 32 mils of rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 4 to 12
mils of high density cross-laminated polyethylene film with manufacturer's stan-
dard release sheet and flashing tape.
u
u
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of
one of the following:
u
u
u
a "Dur-O-Barrier D/A 1544 with D/A 1525 Drip-Edge"; Our-O-Waf.
b. "IPeo Flashing System"; Illinois Products Corp.
c. "Flex-Flash with Foam-Tite Seal Drip Plate"; Hohmann & Barnard.
d "Perm-A-Barrier with Stainless Steel Drip Edge"; Grace Construction
Products.
B.
Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
products or products recommended by the flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
04 20 00 - 8
sheets to each other and to substrates.
2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, gesigned to fit standard
sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indi-
cated.
1. Styrene-Butadiene-Rubber Compound: ASTM 0 2000, Designation M2AA-805.
2. PVC: ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt~sC!turated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM 0 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Vinyl Weep HoleNent One-piece units made from flexible PVC, designed to fit into a
head joint and consisting of a louvered vertical leg; in color approved by Architect to
match that of mortar. .
E. Cavity Drainage Material: 2-inch~thick, free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene
strands [and shaped to avoid being clogged by mortar droppings].
F. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning
masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center- of cells. Units are hot-
dip galvanized after fabrication.
1. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed. for number of bars in-
dicated.
G. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Weep HoleNent:
a. Mortar Maze Cell Vent; Advanced Building Products, Inc.
b. Weep Vent, Mortar Net USA, Ltd.
2. Vinyl Weep HoleNent, 3/4 finger space: Provide the forlowing:
a. Cavity weep "CV 5010"; Masonry Technology, Inc., 563-547-1122.
b. Stone cavity weep "SCV 5012"; Masonry Technology, Inc.
3. Cavity Drainage Material:
a. Mortar Break; Advanced Building Products, Inc.
b. CavClear Masonry Mat; CavClear.
c. Mortar Net; Mortar Net USA, Ltd.
d. Mortar Stop; Polylite Manufacturing Corp.
4. Cavity Drainage Material, 3/4 finger space: 2-inch-thick, free-draining mesh;
made from polyethylene strands [and shaped to avoid being dogged by mortar
droppings].
a. Sure Cavity "SC MM 2516"; Masonry Technology, Inc.
5. Reinforcing Bar Posilioners:
a. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
04 20 00 - 9
u
u
(":,
U
2.11
I "1
U
u
u
o
o
u
o
u
u
u
A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphos-
phate and 1/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water.
B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer'sstandard~strength cleaner designed for re-
moving mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new
masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly ap-
proved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units be-
ing cleaned.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A.
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air"entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at the same rate for all mortar, regardless
of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B.
Mortar for UQit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 BIA M1. Proportion Specification,
unless property spetifications are designated on structural drawings.
1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland c.ement and lime.
2. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, use Type M
3. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use Type S.
4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and noncload-bearing walls and parapet
walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and
for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
C.
Colored Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to pro-
duce color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1-to-1 0, by weight.
1. Color: Mix to match Architect's sample.
D. Groulfor Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. USe grout of type indicated or, if not otherwIse indicated, of type (fine or coarse)
that will corriply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of
grout spaces and pour height.
2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to
ASTM C 143.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
u
u
u
u
A.
Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full
thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using
units of widths indicated.
B.
Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in other
Sections of the Specifications.
C.
Leave opening~ for equipment to be installed before completing masonry" After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the
opening.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
04 20 00 - 10
D.
Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut
units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where
possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water~cooled saws to dry
before placing, unless welting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and,
where possible, cut edges concealed.
E.
Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors
and textures.
1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
3.02
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances in AGI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following:
B. For conspicuous vertical Jines; such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expan-
sion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2
inch mgximum.
C. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum
D. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do
not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum.
E For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint thick-
ness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.
F. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than
1/8 inch.
3.03
LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A_ Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and
offsets. Avoid using less-than~half"size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where
possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern;
do not use units with less than nominal 4-inchhorizontal face dimensions at corners or
jambs.
1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units In
courses above and below.
2. As indicated on Drawings.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not
less than 2 inches. Bond and interlo.;;k each course of each wythe at corners. Do not
use units with less than nominal 4"inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work:. In each course, rack back one"half-unit length for one-
half running bond orone-third~unit length for (me-third running bond; do not tooth. Glean
exposed surfaces of set masonry. wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove
loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
04 20 00 - 11
( -.
u
u
u
u
u
o
E.
Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other
Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F.
Fill space between hollow-metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless other-
wise indicated.
G
Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer
of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
H.
Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or
roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated.
1 . Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of struc-
ture above.
2. At fire-rated partitions, install firestopping in joint between top of partition and un-
derside of structure above to comply with Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
3.04 MORTAR BEDDINGAND JOINTING
u
lJ
u
o
u
lJ
A.
Lay hollow masonry units as follows:
1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and Vertical face shells.
2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, col-
umns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar
bed, including areas under cells.
B.
Set precast concrete or cast stone coping units in full bed of mortar. Fill dowel, anchor,
and similar holes solid. Wet stone-joint surface thoroughly before setting.
1. Set copings with unfilled head joints for installing joint sealants.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants of type and at locations indicated to comply
with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section,"Joint Sealants."
c.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the
joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated,
3.05 BONDING OF MUL TIWYTHE MASONRY
A.
Use individual metal ties installed in horizontal joints to bond WYthes together. Provide
ties as shown, but not less than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to
exceed 24 inches o.c. horizontally and 16 inches o.C. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate
courses. Provide additional ties within 12 lnches of openings and space not more than
36 inches apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abuttfng walls, provide
ties at no more than 24 inches o.c. vertically.
u
u
u
u
u
B.
Use masonry joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints to bond wythes to-
gether.
c.
Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabri-
cated "L" units as well as masonry bonding.
2531-0
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
04 20 00 - 12
D. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at
juncture, bond walls together as follows:
1.
2.
Provide individual metal ties not more than 16 inches o,c.
. . J
Provide contihuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated "T"
units.
Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 24 inches o.c. for bearing walls. If
used with hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores.
3.
3.06 CAVITIES
A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike
joints facing cavities flush.
1. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work
progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity.
B. Coat cavity face of backl:Jp wythe to comply with Division 7 Section "Air arid Vapor Barrier
Membranes."
C. Installing Cavity-Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12
inches o.C. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners
designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining
obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against in-
side wythe of masonry Qr other construction as shown.
1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulabon with crack sealer compatible with insula-
tion and masonry.
3.07
MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Provide. continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire
length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior
side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches,
1 . Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches O.c.
2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet
walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings
and extending 12 inches beyond openings.
a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwiseindi-
cated.
C. Provide continuity at corner-s anp wall intersections by using prefabricated "l" and "T"
sections. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at re-
turns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
3.08
CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in
related items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement
joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition move~
ment.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
042000-13
u
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry at approximately 24 feet on center as follows:
u
1. Fit bond~breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on
one side of control joint Fill resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed
faces.
2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at
joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake joint.
4. Install temporary foam-ptastlc filler in head joints and remove filler when unit ma-
sonry is complete. .
u
u
3.09
LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
-
U
[j
B.
Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for
brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or
other supporting lintels.
'I
U
1. Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in
color, texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or
required to support loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by the same method
used for concrete masonry units. Score lintels to match joint pattern of adjacent
concrete unit masonry.
u
u
c. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.10
FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels,
ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
o
B.
Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could punc-
ture flashing. Unless otherwise indicated, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of
mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing
with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
u
u
u
c.
Install flashing as follows:
u
1. At mu!tiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing from exterior
face of outer wythe of masonry, through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4
inches, and through inner wythe to within 1/2 il1ch of the interior face of the wall.
2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry
at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn flash-
ing up not less than 2 inches to form a pan.
3. lnsta.1I metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flash-
ing to top of metal drip edge.
u
D.
Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry im-
mediately above embedded flashing and as follows:
u
u
1. Spaqe weep holes 24 inches o.c.
2. Place cavity drainage material immediately above flashing in cavities.
E.
Install vents in vertical head joints at the top of each continuous cavity at spacing indi-
cated. Use vinyl weep hole/vents to form vents.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
04 20 00 - 14
3.11
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: COl1struct formwork and shores to support reinforced
masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make it
sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support
forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced
masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hard-
ened sufficiently tb carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be
placed on them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
sufficient strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for c1eanouts and for
grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
3.12
PLACING REINFORCEMENT IN REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY:
A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which
will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends
not shown on drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to
excessive rusting or other causes.
B. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing indicated. Support and secure vertical
bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry
work progresses. Where vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear dis-
tance between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or 1" (whichever is
greater).
C. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable
to the Architect. Provide lapped splices, unless otherwise indicated. In splicing vertical
bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie.
1. Provide not less than minimum lap indicated, or if not indicated, as required by
governing code.
D. Embed metal ties in mortar joints as work progresses. with a minimum mortar cover of
5/8" on exterior face of walls and 1/2" at other localions.
E. Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcement as the work progresses, with a mini-
mum cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap units not less
than 6" at ends. Use prefabricated "L" and "T" units to provide continuity at corners and
tions. Cut and bend units as recommended by manufacturer for continuilyat returns, off-
sets, column fire-proofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions.
F. Anchoring: Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structure as indicated.
3.13
INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY:
A. General:
1. Lay CMU units with full-face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
042000 -15
r I
U
between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face
equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed
cross-webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths
shown, or if not shown, provide 3/8" joints.
u
u
B.
Walls:
[j
1. Pi:\ttern Bond: Lay CMU wall units in 1/2 running bond with vertical joints in each
course centered on units in courses above and below, unless otherwise indi-
cated. Bond and interlock each course at corners and intersections. Use spe-
cial-shaped units where shown, and as required 'for corners, jambs, sash, control
joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions.
2. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and
grouted, to provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum
clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars. Keep cavities free
of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortarwhere adjacent to reinforced cores or cells.
3. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units
or modify regular units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforce-
ment bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar
joints under bond beam courses over cores or cells of non-reinforced vertical
cells, or provide units with solid bottoms.
D
[j
u
C.
Grouting:
1.
Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained suffi-
cientstrength to resist grout pressure.
Use "Fjne Grout" per ASTM C 476 for filling spaces less than 4" in one or both
horizontal directions.
Use "'Coarse Grout" per ASTM C 476 for filling 4" spaces or larger in both hori-
zontal directions.
Grouting Technique: At the Contractor's option, use either lowlift or high-lift
grouting techniques subject to requirements which follow.
u
2.
u
3.
4.
u
D.
Low-Lift Grouting:
I '
U
1. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 sq. in. in vertical
cores to be grouted.
2. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of eMU. Extend above elevation of
maximum pour height as required for splicing. Support in position at vertical in-
tervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10ft
3. Lay eMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5' height, or if bond beam oc-
curs below 5' height stop pour at course below bond beam.
4. Vibrate grout during placing. Re-vibrate approximately twenty minutes later, and
before grout loses its plasticity. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pour-
ing of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1-1/2" below top
course of pour.
5. Bond Beams and Ltntels: Stop grout in vertical cells 1-1/2" below bond beam or
lintel course. Place horizontal reinforcement in bond beams or lintels; lap at cor-
ners and .intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam or lintel course be-
fore fillfng vertical cores above bond beam or linteL
u
u
u
u
u
u
3.14
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor shall engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-
control testing indicated below.
1. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
04 20 00 - 16
Contractor's expense.
B. Mortar properties will be tested per UBe Standard 21-16 "Field Tests Specimens for Mor-
tar" at the rate of one (1) test peri ,000 square foot of wall.
c. Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per use Standard 21-18
"Method of Sampling and Testing Grout". One (1) test set (3 specimens) per 5,000
square foot of wall or, one (1) test set per 10 cubic yards of grout placed, whichever is
more frequent Specimens for each test are to be tested at 7 and 28 days.
3.15 SPECIAL INSPECTION
A Special inspection procedures for masonry construction, where identified on plan, include
the following:
1. Contractor, masonry subcontractor, and Owners inspection agency are to coor-
dinate inspection scheduling and notify the Architect two (2) days prior to obser-
vation of grouting procedure inspections.
2. Special inspection shall consist of the following submittals, tests, and visual in-
spections on wall sedionsidentified on plan.
3.16 VISUAL INSPECTION
A. Provide, at the beginning of work, inspection of all bearing surfaces to receive CMU to
confirm conditioh of surfaces, placement and embedment of dowels.
B. Provide visual inspection of masonry course work to include verification that all web and
head joints are being fully bedded, horizontal reiilforcement. is of correct size, type and
vertical spacing, and spliced as required. The frequency of visual inspection shall be the
lesser of:
1. Two (2) days, or 1 ,000 square foot of wall, or ihtervals belween grouting opera-
tions.
C. Provide inspection immediately prior to each grouting operation to include:
1 . Low Lift Grouting (Pours 5')
a. Verification that all loose mortar, deleterious materials, clOd water have
been removed fr()m cells, bond beams, and lintels to receive grout.
b. Vertical reinforcement is properly positioned, tied, and correctly spliced.
2. During Grouting Operat"ions
a. Verify preparation of grout prism test mold assembly and placement and
consolidation of grout in molds.
b. Verify that m.asonry is not pre-wetted priorto grout placement.
c. Verify that grout is placed in lifts not to exceed 4' in height and that each
lift IS consolidated by mechanical vibration within ten minutes of initial
placement and re-consolidated at 25-35 minutes after placement. Verify
during consolidation that mechanical vibrator is not placed in contact with
reinforcement for periods which may cause voids to form around rein-
forcement.
3.17 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A
Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
04 20 00 ~ 17
u
B.
u
u
C.
[-'
U
D.
u
( I
U
u
o
[I
, \
U
END OF SECTION
u
u
(. I
U
U
u
u
u
u
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units;
install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant applica-
tion.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to re-
move mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as fol-
lows:
1.
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic
scrape hoes or chisels.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned
for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before
proceeding with cleaning of masonry.
Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by
covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or water-
proof masking tape.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners: remove cleaners promptly
by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
Clean concrete masonry first by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2
applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
If necessary, clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
[]
u
rl
u
u
u
o
u
u
o
u
u
en
-I
<(
I-
W
:E
U
J
U
U
U
U
I
L()
z
o
-
(/J
-
>
-
c
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
I "
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 12 00 - 1
u
u
SECTION 05 1200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1,01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
n
u
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
u
A.
This Section includes the following:
u
1.
2.
3.
Structural steel.
Architecturally exposed structural steel.
Grout.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
u
1. Division 1 Section ~Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency proce-
duresand administrative requirements.
2. Division 5 Section ~SteeJ Deck" for field installation of shear connectors.
3, Division 5 Section ~Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and
steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame.
4. Division 9 painting Sections for surface preparation and priming requirements.
5. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for structural steel.
I '
U
u
1.03 DEFINITIONS
fl
U
A
Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads.
u
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A,
Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are typical; similar details apply to
similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possi-
ble without causing delay in the work,
u
1.
Promptly notify ArchitectJEngineer whenever design of members and connec-
tions for any portion of structure are not dearly indicated.
u
B
Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be
selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and
comply with other information and restrictions indicated.
u
u
1.
2.
Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated.
Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified
professionai engineer to prepare structural analysis data for structural-steel con-
nections.
u
1.05 SUBMITTALS
j i
u
A
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components_
u
1.
Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 12 00 - 2
data.
2. Include embedment drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field
welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.
4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop.and field
bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.
5. For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply
with requirements:
1. High-strengthbolt~nut~washer assemblies.
E. Source quality-control test reports.
F. Surveys: Submit certified copies of each survey conducted by a registered professional
engineer or land surveyor (see 3,01 A), showing elevations and locations of base plates
and anchor bolls to receiVe structural steel, and final elevations and locations for major
members. Indicate discrepancies. between actual installation and contract documents.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified erector who participates in the AISC Quality Certifica-
tion Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.
8. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Cer-
tification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Sbd.
C. <complex>lnstaller Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC
Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Cate-
gory CASE
D. <complex>Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates .in the AISC
Quality Certification Program arid is designated an AISC-Certified PlarH, Category Cbd.
E. Welding: Qualify proc~dures and personnel aq;ording to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel."
F. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. AI$C's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
2. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement
NO.2."
3. AISG's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" including "Commentary" and
supplements thereto.
4. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections."
5. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials to permit ea.sy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel mem-
bers off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers.
Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
U
'1
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 12 00 - 3
u
1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that
become dry or rusty before use.
2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, dam-
age, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace dam-
aged materials or structures as directed.
u
1.08
COORDINATION
o
A.
Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to 'otherconstruction without de-
laying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and di-
rections for installation.
u
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
lJ
2.01
STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
o
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work which will be exposed to view, use only
materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and scale
seam marKs, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes
by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of sur-
face finishes.
o
B.
Channels, Angles, Plates and Bars:
1, ASTM,A36
o
C.
Wide Flange Shapes:
u
1 . ASTM 992, Grade 50
D.
Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade S, structural tubing.
u
E.
Steel Pipe: Fy = 35 ks.i.: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
1. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized.
u
F.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.02 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, ANDANCHORS
LJ
A.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel struc-
tural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened car-
bon-steel washers.
u
I I
U
1. Finish - Interior: Plain.
2. Finish - Exterior: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
3. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 compressible-washer type.
4. Alternative Bolts may be used at the Contractor's option: Tension Indicating or
Twist-Off bolts meeting the requirements of ASTM A325 or A490.
'I \
U
B.
Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-
finished carbon steel; AWS 01.1, Type B.
u
u
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, 36 ksi, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated.
2.03
PRIMER
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
2.04
2.05
05 12 00 - 4
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following
primers:
1. Tnemec P10-99 manufactured byTnemec Company, Inc.
2. Interlac 260 manufactured by Courtalds Coatings, Inc.
3. Rustguard 4150 by ICI Devoe Coatings
B.
<10 match CSOSS 05500>Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Organic zinc-rich primer,
complying With SSPC-Paint20 and compatible with topcoat.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one ofthe following:
a. Carboline 621; Carboline Company.
b. Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670; PPG Industries, Inc.
c. Tneme-Zinc 90-97; Tnemec Company, Inc.
GROUT
A.
Nonmetallic. Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic
aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 3D-minute working time.
FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent pOSSible. Fabricate
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and as
indicated on approved shop drawings.
1. Camber structural-steel members where Indicated.
2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/ A 6M and maintain
markings until structural steel has been erected,
3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting
shop-priming operations.
B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Comply with fabrication requirements, including
tolerance limits, of AISC's "Code of Stclndard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for
structural steel identified as architecturally exposed structural steel.
1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes
Including pitting, rust, scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled'trade names, and
roughness.
2, Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grindii1g, before clean-
ing, treating, and shop priming.
C.
Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch st~ndard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
D.
Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing
loads.
E.
Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by mamJfacturer of shear
connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage
of other work through steel framing members.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 12 00 - 5
u
u
u
2.06
SHOP CONNECTIONS
1.
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut
bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning,
Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpen-
dicular to steel surfaces.
Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive
other work.
2.
3.
u
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification
for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
u
B.
[J
n
U
u
u
2.07 SHOP PRIMING
o
A.
1. Joint Type: Bearing type.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS 01.1 for welding procedure specifications, toler-
ances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding
work.
1.
2.
Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment
of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.
Architecturally Exposed Surfaces: Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence,
and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distor-
tions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on exposed steel sur-
faces.
3.
a.
b.
Grind butt welds flush.
Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds.
Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches.
2. Surfaces to be field welded, including field-installed shear connectors.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
5. Galvanized surfaces.
u
u
u
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale
and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifica-
tions and standards:
u
1.
2.
u
U
lJ
C.
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Architecturally Exposed Steel: SSPC-SP 10/NACE No.2, "Near-White Blast
Cleaning."
Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of
not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners,
edges, and exposed surfaces.
1 . Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 12 00 - 6
Change color of second coatto distinguish it from first.
D. Do not prime paint structural steel and accessories to receive sprayed fire-resistive mate-
rials.
2.08
GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish for Exterior Steel: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to
structural steel according to ASTM A 123/ A 123M.
1 . Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing.
2, Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located
in exterior walls.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3,01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor
rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance
with requirements.
1 . Surveys: Employ a registered professional engineer or land surveyor for accu-
rate erection of structural steel. Check elevations df concrete and masonry bear-
ing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection
work proceeds, and report discrepancies to ArchitecVEngineer. Do not proceed
with erection until corr~ctions have been made, or until compensating adjust-
ments to structural work have been agreed upon with ArchitecUEngineer.
B. Proceed with installation only'after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep
structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and
loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent
structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until
cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
3.03
ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated .and according to
AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and the approved
shop drawings.
B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry'-bearing surfaces of bond-
reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean
bottom surface of base and bearfhg plates.
1. Set base and ,bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting
nuts as required.
2. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces.and base or bearing plates
so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to
cure. Comply with rilanufactl1fer!s written installation instructions for shrinkage-
resistant grouts.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 12 00 - 7
u
u
u
u
u
[j
C.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice
for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D.
Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that
will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compen-
sate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1.
Level and plumb individual members of structure.
E.
Splice members only where indicated.
F,
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Remove erection bolts on welded; fill holes with
plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
G.
Do not use thermal cutting during erection,
H.
Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that
must be enlarged to admit bolts.
3.04 FIELD CONNECTIONS
u
u
u
u
B.
u
u
u
u
3.05
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification
for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1, Joint Type: Bearing type,
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS 01.1 for welding procedure specifications, toler-
ances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding
work.
1. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Verify that weld sizes, fabrication se-
quence, and equipment used for architeCturally'exposed structural steel wil! limit
distortions to 'allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on exposed steel
surfaces.
a. Grind butt welds flush.
b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile, Dress exposed welds.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.
B. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect and test field welds according to AWS 01.1 as in-
dicated in the table below:
l I
U
WELD INSPECTION SCHEDULE.
4
I I
U
123
Test procedure' , /Sample size (% of welds l
Weld Type5 Field Shop VT MT UT PT RT Comments
Fillet (single pass) X X 25% - - - -
Fillet (multiple pass) X X 50% 25% - - - Root pass and finished weld.
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 12 00 - 8
Flare Bevel/Flare V X X 25% - - - -
Groove (partial penetration) X X 100% - 100% - - Note 6
Groove (full penetration) X X 100% - 100% - - All full penetration welds
O. Notes:
1. Test procedures:
a. VT = visual test
b. MT:::: magnetic particle test ASTM E 109, Cracks or zones of incomplete
fusion or penetration not acceptable.
c. UT = ultrasonic test, ASTM E 164
d. PT = penetrant test, ASTM E 165
e. RT = radiographic test, ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality
level "2-21"
2. Acceptance standards in AWS 01.1 shall be followed for each test procedure.
3. Test procedures may be substituted to meet feasibility requirements of test
based upon weld geometry or other factors. .
4. Engineer's approval is required for all test substitutions.
5. Samples shall occur at random locations; additional tests may be required at lo-
cations noted on construction drawings.
6. Groove welds includes square, bevel, V, U, and J grooves including single and
double types. .
7. Partial penetration square groove welds at end seal plates of tubular members
do not require inspection.
3.06 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint
according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field
connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accesso-
ries, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel.
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
o
o
O.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 31 00 - 1
u
SECTION 05310 -STEEL DECK
PART 1 - GENERAL
u
u
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
u
A.
This Section includes the following:
u
1. Roof deck.
2. Acoustical cellular roof deck.
3. Composite floor deck.
0'
B. Related Sections include the following:
(' i
U
1.
2.
3.
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill and reinforcing steel.
Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop-welded shear connectors.
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscella-
neous steel shapes.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
u
A.
Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
u
B.
Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing
channels, pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other
construction.
u
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed steel deck similar in
mat~rial, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted
in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
u
u
u
B.
Welding: Qualify- procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical
to those steel deck units tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and in-
spection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Fire.Resistan_ce Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Re-
sistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing
and inspecting agency.
u
2.
1
U
U
U
D. A/SI Specifications: Calculate structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISl's
"Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
E. FM Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM and listed in FM's "Approval Guide,
Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 31 00 - 2
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, stor-
age, and handling.
B. Slack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of sound-absorbing insulation strips in topside ribs of acoustical
deck with roofing installation specified in Division 7 Roofing Section to ensure protection
of insulation strips against damage from effects of weather and other causes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Steel Deck:
a. Bowman/E.G... Smith Division of Cyclops Corportion
b. Epic Metals Corp.
c. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Div.
d. Roof Deck, Inc.
e. United SteelDeck, Inc.
t. Wheeling Corrugating Co.; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp.
2.02
ROOF DECK
A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with
"SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SOl Publication No. 29,
and the following:
1. Prime-PaiotedSteel Sheet: ASTM A 611, Grade C minimum, shop primed with
gray or white baked-on, lead- and chromate-free rust-inhibitive primer complying
with performance requirements of FS TT~P-664.
2. Deck Profile: As indicated on drawings.
3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: Gage indicated on drawings.
4. Span Condition: As indicated on drawings.
5. Side Laps: Three-span minimum unless shown otherwise.
2.03
ACOUSTICAL ROOF DECK
A. Acoustical Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to
comply with "SOl Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SOl Publica-
tion NO. 29, and the following:
1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A611, Grade C minimum; shop primed with
gray or white baked-on, lead" and chromate-free rust-inhibitive primer complying
with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664.
2. Deck Profile: As indicated on drawings.
3. Design Uncoated-SteelThickness: Gage indicated on drawings.
4. Span Condition: Asir:ldicated on drawings.
5. Side Laps: Overlapped.
6. Acoustical Perforations: Cellular deck units with manufacturer's standard perfo-
rated flat-bottom plate welded to ribbed deck.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
0.
o
o
r!
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 31 00 - 3
u
u
u
7.
Sound-Absorbing Insulation: Manufacturer's standard premolded roll or strip
glass fiber or mineral fiber.
a.
Factory install sound-absorbing insulation into cells of cellular deck ac-
cording to manufacturer's written instructions.
8. Acoustical Performance: NRC 0.80, tested according to ASTM C 423.
2.04 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK
A.
Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pat-
tern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SOl Specifications and Commentary
for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SOl Publication No. 29, the minimum section proper-
ties indicated, and the following:
u
u
u
u
2.05
. '-
U
u
u
.~ -~
u
lJ
u
u
u
; ~1
U
u
1.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33,
G60 zinc coating.
Deck Profile: As indicated on drawings.
Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: Gage indicated on drawings.
Span Condition: As indicated on drawings.
2.
3.
4.
ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
requirements indicated.
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumati-
cally driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C.
Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-
steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.
D.
Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
E.
Miscellane0us Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of
33,000 psi, not Jess than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and
finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
F.
Steel Sheet Accessories: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck,
unless otherwise. indicated.
G.
Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of
same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile indicated.
H.
Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same
material, .finish, and,thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.
L
Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and
finish as deck, with 3~inch- wide flanges and sloped recessed pans of 1-1/2- inch mini-
mum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field.
J.
Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1010 through 1020 headed stud type, cold-
finished carbon steel, AWS D1.1, Type S, with arc shields.
K.
Galvanizing Repair Paint [ASTM A 780} [SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film
containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight].
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
0531 00 - 4
L. Repair Paint: Lead- and .chromate-free rust-inhibitive primer complying with p~rformance
requirements of FS TT-P-664.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for in-
stallation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable, specifications and commen-
tary in SDI Publication No. 29, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in
this Section.
B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limita-
tions.
C. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately
aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not
stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.
E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflec-
tion.
F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work project-
ing through or adjacent to decking.
G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of decking, and support of other work.
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metaiarc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
3.03
ROOF DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten roof deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddie) welds of the
surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter, but not less than
1-1/2 inches long, and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal.
2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two
welds per deck unif at each support. Space welds as indicated on drawings.
B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of pan-
els between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 36
inches, and as follows:
1. Mechanically''fasten with self-drilling No. 10 diameter or larger carbon-steel
screws.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end Dearing of 1-
1/2 inches, with end joints as indicated.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 31 00 - 5
u
U
u
u
.. I
U
3.04
u
u
u
u
u
o
u
u
D.
Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof decking and
weld flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches apart with at least 1
weld at each corner.
E.
Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Install rIdge and valley plates, finish strips, cover
plates. end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written
instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
F.
Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls. and where in-
dicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure
complete closure.
G.
Sound-Absorbing Insulation: Installation into topside ribs of deck as specified in Divi-
sion 7 Section "Roofing."
FLOOR DECK INSTALLATION
A.
Fasten floor deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the
surface diameter indicated and as fallows:
1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch. nominal.
2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two
welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds as indicated on drawings.
B.
Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of pan-
elsbetween supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 36
inches. and as follows:
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling NO.1 0 diameter or larger carbon-steel
screws.
2. Mechanically clinch or buUon punch.
3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1I2-inch- long welds.
c.
End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-
1/2 inches, with end joints as indicated.
D. Shear Connectors: Weld shear connectors through deck to supporting frame according
to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Butt end joints of deck panels; do
not overlap. Remove and discard arc shields after welding shear connectors.
E. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting
structure according to SOl recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Floor Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to
deck, according to SOl recommendations, to provide light-fitting closures at open ends of
ribs and sides of decking. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of floor deck panels,
unless otherwise indicated.
U
r
U
3.05
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field qual-
ity-control testing.
i I
u
B.
c.
(j
Field welds will be subject to inspection.
Shear connector stud welds will be inspected and tested according to AWS D1.1 for stud
welding and as follows:
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 31 00 - 6
1. Shear connector stud welds will be visually inspected.
2. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal less than afull 360-
degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector stud.
3. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connector studs if weld fracture oc-
curs on shear connector studs already tested according to AWS 01.1.
D. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor c;tnd Architect.
E. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.
3.06 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces
of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both sur-
faces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint
1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom sur-
faces of deck exposed to view.
C, Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without dam-
age or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
f ·
U
U
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 50 00 - 1
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
u
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
u
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
u
A.
This Section includes the following:
u
1. Steel ladders.
2. Loose bearing plates.
3. Loose steel lintels.
4. Shelf angles.
5. Steel framing and supports for applIcations where framing and supports are not
specified - in other Sections.
6. Pipe bollards.
L.
B. Related Sections include the following:
u
U
U
U
1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural-steel framing system compo-
nents.
2. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for metal-framed stairs with metal pan, metal
plate, or grating treads.
3. Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube handrails
and railings.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Paint products.
c
u
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. In-
clude plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections.
Show anchorage and accessory items.
1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other
Sections.
r I
U'
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required' units.
lJ
U
B.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
L
U
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other con-
struction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate meas-
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 50 00 - 2
urements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions fOr installing anct:wrages, including sleeves, con~reteinserls,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500.
C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select accord~ng to AWS specifications for metal al-
loy welded.
2.02 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrou.s Metal: Organic zinc-rich primer, complying with SSPC-Paint 20
and compatible with topcoat.
1 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Carboline 621; Carboline Company.
b. Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670; PPG Industries, Ine,
c. Tneme-Zinc 90-97; Themec Company, Inc.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-z~nc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint20.
2.03 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and where
built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
D. Machine Screws: ASME 81;8.6.3.
E.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
F.
Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B18-6.1.
G.
Plain Washers: Round,carbon stael, ASME 818.22.1.
H.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1.
I.
Expansion Anchors: .Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of materia! indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure; a load equarlo six times the load imposed when in-
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
D.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 50 00 - 3
o
o
u
u
o~
u
2.04 GROUT
stalled in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in con-
crete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent
testing agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593
and nuts complying with ASTM F 594.
J. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed.
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongas-
eous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.05 CONCRETE FILL
u
L\.
2.06
u
. ~
U
u
o
u
U.
u
u
u
u
A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight., air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a
minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs,
C.
Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch; unless otherwise indicated.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches
that of adjacent surface.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate
and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support
indicated loads.
F.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.
G.
Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
H.
Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in am-
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 50 00 - 4
bient and surface tempe~atures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstress-
ing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineer-
ing calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material sur-
faces.
I.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight
sharp edges.
J.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
K.
Form exposed connections with hqirlil)e joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fas-
teners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phil-
lips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
2.07 STEEL LADDERS
A. General: Fabricate ladders for locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and
anchorages as indicated.
1. Comply with ANSI A1tt.3, unless otherwise indicated.
2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A 17.1.
B. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges, spaced 18
inches apart.
C. Bar Rungs: 3/4-inch- diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches o.c.
D. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
E. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or
bolted steel brackets Size brackets to support design loads specified in ANSI A 14.3.
F. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide
granules set in epoxy-resin adh.esive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with
aluminum-oxide grout.
2.08
LOOSE BEARING PLATES
A Provide loose bearing plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction.
Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize plates after fabrication.
2.09
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose structural-steel lintels from steel angles and shape$ of size indicated for
openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
C. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to one-twelfth
of clear span, but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
o
o
o
o
o
.0,
o
o
iJ
,0
O~
o
0,
o
o
o
o
0,
o
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
055000 - 5
U
LJ
U
U
U
U
2.10
SHELF ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete
framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more
than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup ma-
sonry and concrete. Align expansion joints in angles with indicated control and expan-
sion joints in cavity-wall exterior wythe.
C. Galvanize shelf angles to be installed in exterior walls.
2.11
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete the
Work.
1. Provide L4 x 4 x X framing under deck at all roof penetrations
2.12
PIPE BOLLARDS
u'
o
u
A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe.
2.13
FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
II,
U
A.
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard
listed below:
o
[,
U
U
U
U
U
U
1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
B.
Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces to be field welded.
2. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
C.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1 B): SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
a. Exterior items using speclfied primer and prepared to SSPC-SP 6 are not
required to be galvanized.
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power' Tool Cleaning."
D.
Apply shop primer to metal fabrications on same day as preparation. Comply with SSPC-
PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No.1," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 50 00 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fast~ning to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fas-
teners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolls, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood
screws, and other connectors.
1 . Where no safety factor is indicated by ANSI or other standards, utilize safety fac-
tor of four for anchorage Of assemblies.
B. Cutting, Fitting; and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;
with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, ,and free of rack; and measured from estab-
lished lines and levels.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into con-
crete, masonry, or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-
dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, flnrsh exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches
that of adjacent surface.
3.02
SETTING BEARING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen
to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates,
B. Set bearing plates on wedges or shims. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protrud~
ing, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where
not exposed to moisture; use non shrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates 10 ensure that no voids
remain.
3.03
INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being sup~
ported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop
Drawings, if any.
3.04
INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS
o
o
'0
o
o
o
o
o
,0
o
o
'0
o
0,
o
o
o
o
o
u
w
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 50 00 - 7
U'
U
A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Support and brace bollards in position in
footing excavations until concrete has been placed and cured.
B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface.
3.05
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
; ~
U
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for
shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
u
1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mi! dry film thickness.
u
u
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and re-
pair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
u
u
-
u
u
o
I'
u
.~
.' I
U
u
U
U
U
o
Q
o
o
o
.0
o
o
o
o
o
o.
o
o
o
o
o.
o
o
'U
( I
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 51 00 ~ 1
u
u
SECTION 05 51 00 - METAL STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
G
A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
u
A
This Section includes the following:
u
-,.
o
u
u
/'
u
1. Design of steel stairs.
2. Preassembled industrial steel stairs with abrasive-nosed grating treads.
3. Handrails and railings attached to metal stairs.
B. Stairs and stair components may be shop-fabricated or assembled ih the field at Contrac-
tor's option.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube handrails and rail-
ings other than those associated with stairs.
2. Division 9 Section "High Performance Coatings" for aliphatic polyurethane to be
used for exterior steel.
1.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. This secboR includes the design of steel stairs in accordance with performance require-
ments and applicable codes.
u
o
u
B.
Structural Performance: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the following struc-
tural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials in-
volved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum
stress in each component of metal stairs.
~
U
1. Treads and Platforms of Metal Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of
100 Ibf/sq. fl. or a concentrated load of 300 Ibf on an area of 4 sq. in., whichever
produces the greater stress.
2. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from loads specified
above in addition to stresses resulting from railing system loads.
3. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch,
whichever is less.
u
U
lJ,
a. For general interior egress application and typical switchback designs
with flight widths under 4'-6", the above lim~t may be increased to L/240.
4. Limitdeflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch,
whichever is less.
C.
Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings capable
of withstanding the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design
working stress of materials for handrails, railings, anchors, and connections:
1 .
Top Rail of Guards: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indi-
cated:
f I
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 51 00 - 2
a. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied at any point and in any direction.
b. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. applied horizontally and concurrently with uni-
fann load of tOOlbf/tt. applied vertically downward.
c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act con-
currently.
2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads
applied as indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied at any point and in any direction.
b. Uniform load of 50 Ibfltt. applied in any direction.
c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act con-
currently.
3. Infill Area of Guards: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of
200 Ibf applied to 1 sq. tt. at any point in system, including panels, intermediate
rails, balusters; or other elements composing infill area.
a. Load above need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top
rails in determining stress on guards.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For metal.stairs and primer.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal stairs. Include plans,
elevations, sections, and details of metal stairs and their connections. Show anchorage
and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified Jar installation
under other Sections.
1 . For installed products indicated to co JTI ply with cjesign loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsi-
ble for their preparation.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for metal stairs specified in this Section to be installed by
firm with minimum of 5 years consecutive metal stair erection experience.
B. Professional Engineer Qualific.ations: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engi-
neering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those per-
formed for installations. of metal stairs (including handrails and railing systems) that are
similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
C. Fabricator Qua!ifi<:;ations: A firm experienced in producing metal stairs similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well
as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS 01.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code-~Sheet Steel."
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorqges for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, tem-
plates; and directions for installipg anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, an-
chor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or ma-
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
18
o
o
D
.0'
. .
o
o
O.
o
o
u
I i
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 51 00 - 3
1 t.
U
sonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
u
o
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Preassembled Stairs:
u
u
,
u
a.
b.
c.
American Stair Corp., Inc.
National Stair & Rail, Inc.
Sharon Companies, Ltd. (The).
2. Field Assembled Stairs
a. A steel fabrication shop meeting the requirements of Quality Assurance.
2.02
FERROUS METALS
(I
U
U
,
U
,U
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, and
other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. Do not use steel sheet with
variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher-
leveled sheet.
B.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
c.
Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500.
D.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indi-
cated or required by structural loads.
E.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
u
F. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, complying with
ASTM A 366/A 366M; or structural quality, complying with ASTM A 611, Grade A, unless
another grade is required by design loads.
U
,\'
U
G. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, complying with
ASTM A 569/A 569M; or structural quality, complying with ASTM A 570/A 570M, Grade
3D, unless another grade is required by design loads.
u
u
H. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal al-
loy welded~
2.03
FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select
fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
fi
U.
B.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
u
c.
Machine Screws: ASME 818.6.3.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 51 00 - 4
D. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
E. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME 818.22.1.
F. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME 818.21.1.
G. Expansion-Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when in-
stalled in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in con-
crete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent
testing agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc~plated to comply with ASTM 8633,
Class FelZn 5.
2. Material: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593
and nuts complying with ASTM F 594.
2.04 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Organic zinc-rich primer, complying with SSPC-Paint 20
and compatible with topcoat.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the fo[lowing:
a. Carboline 621; Carboline Company.
b. Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670; PPG Industries, Inc.
c. Tneme-Zinc90-97; Tnemec Company, Inc.
B. Bituminous Paint: Coldcapplied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except
containing no asbestos fibers or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with
ASTM 01187.
2.05 GROUT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic. Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongas-
eous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.06 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangen,. struts, handrails,
railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and
anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.
1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
3. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces
slope to drain.
B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Miniinum Standards for
Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair desig-
nated, unless more stringent .requirements are indicated.
1. Industrial class.
C. Shop Assembly: Preassemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
o
o
o
'.
o
o
o
-0
D
o
o
o
'0
o
o
o
o
o
U
D.
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 51 00 - 5
o
U
11
o
u
~."'
) :'
u
.. ~ - ~"i
U
(t
lJ
u
u
limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight
sharp edges. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove sharp or rough
areas on exposed surfaces.
E.
Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Form bent~melal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
F. Weld connections to comply with the following:
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distdrtioriand develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap;
Remove welding flux immediately.
Weld exposed corners and seams continuously, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fas-
teners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phil-
lips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
H.
Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
2.07 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS
u
u
,Ul
o
u
u
(' ,
U
A.
Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of structural-steel channels, plates, or a combination
of both, as indicated. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. Construct plat-
forms of structural-steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as indi-
cated. Boit or weld headers to stringers; bolt or weld framing members to stringers and
headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolls are not exposed on finished surfaces.
B.
Metal Risers, Subtread Pans, and Subplatforms: Form. to configurations shown from
steel sheet of thickness necessary to support indicated loads, but not less than 0.0677
inch.
1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated hot-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on side of subtreads to be
concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers.
3. Attach subtreads directly to stringers to conceal exposed welding from view..
a.
If required by manufacturer or fabricator, provide tread support brackets
welded, bolted or riveted direct to steel stringers.
4.
5.
Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser.
Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, jf not indicated, the same as
subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing.
C.
Steel Grating Treads, Risers, and Platforms: Form to configurations shown of grating
characteristics necessary to support indicated loads determined by manufacturer's calcu-
lations based' on load and deflection criteria.
2.08 STEEL TUBE HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
A.
General: Fabricate handrails and railings to comply with requirements indicated for de-
sign, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 51 00 - 6
spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstc:md indicated loads.
1. Configuration.: As shown on drawings.
B. Interconnect members by butt-welding or welding with internal connectors, at fabricator's
option, unless otherwise indicated.
1 . At tee and cross intersections, cope ends of intersecting members to fit contour
of tube to which end is joined, and weld all around.
C.
Form changes in direction of handrails and rails as follows:
1. As detailed.
2. By bending.
3. By inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings.
4. By any method indicated above, applicable to change of direction involved.
D. Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
E. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.
Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.
F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting railings and for attaching to other
work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or ma-
sonry work.
1. Connect railing posts to stair framing by direct welding, unless otherwise indi-
cated.
a. Posts may be side~mounted.
G. Provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous-metal compo-
nents.
2.09
FINISHES
A. Stairs shall be galvanized and shop primed or shop primed with zinc-rich primer same
day as preparation.
B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard
listed below:
1. ASTM A 123, for galVanizing steel andiron products
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
C. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces to be field welded.
2. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces .to comply with
minimum requirements iridicated below for SSPC surface~preparatjon specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1 B): SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
o
o
o
o
o
,0
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
tJ
o
o
D
O.
o
u
u
U'
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 51 00 - 7
a. Exterior items using specified primer and prepared to SSPC-SP 6 are not
required to be galvanized.
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
E. Apply shop primer to metal fabrications on same day as preparation. Comply with SSPC-
PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No.1," for shop painting.
Lt
1.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
Ui
0,
U.
U\
F. Grating treads may be galvanized and powder coated.
2.10
FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM'S "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal stairs after assembly.
C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard
listed below:
I/.
U
1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel
products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and
strips 0.0299 inch thick and heavier.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
3. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
u
D.
Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
u
1.
2.
Surfaces to be field welded.
Surfaces to be high-strength boiled with slip-critical connections.
E.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
u
u
1. SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning,"
F.
Apply shop primer to metal fabrications on same day as preparation. Comply with SSPC-
PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No.1," for shop painting.
o
1.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds.. and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
u
U
u
3.01
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construCtion. Inch:.Ide threaded fasteners
for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
B.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from
established lines and levels and free from rack.
[J
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 51 00 - 8
C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld' plates cast into
concrete, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are 10 be built into con~
crete, masonry, or similar construction.
E. Fit exposed connections accLJrately together 10 form hairline joints. Weld connections
Ihat are not to be left as exposed joints bul cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-
dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connec.lions.
F. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base melals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding. flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches
that of adjacent surface.
3.02
INSTALLING METAL STAIRS WITH GROUTED BASEPLATES
A. Clean concrete aod masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen
to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of baseplates.
B. Set steel stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After stairs have been po~
silioned and aligned, tighten anchor bolts., Do nol remove wedges or shims but, if pro-
truding, cut off flush with edge of bei:jring plate before packing with grout
1. Use nonmetallic, nonshrink grout, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure. that no voids
remain.
3.03
INSTALLING STEEL TUBE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS
A. Adjust handrails and railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at
abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by de-
sign loads. Plumb posts, in each direction. Secure posts and railing ends to building
construction as follows:
1. Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members.
B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch clearance
from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if
not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to
building construction as follows:
3.04
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for
shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
o
o
o
o
o
.0
o
.0.
o
0,
o
o
o
o
o
n
U
o
o
o
u
u
u
u
U"
~ u'
o
,U
L\
U
U
,0-.
'U
U
o
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 51 00 - 9
END OF SECTION
, I
U
o
u
o
o
o
o
o
o
,0.
B
O.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u,
, .U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 52 00 - 1
'U
0,
u
SECTION 05 52 00 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS - STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
r--
.Ll.
./
A.
This Section includes the following:
1. Steel pipe and tube railings.
~
Ui
B.
Related Sections include the following:
...::...
U
C\
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel pipe handrails and railings included
with metal stairs.
1.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
v.
,W
LJ'
A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings capable
of withstanding the following structural loads without exceeding allowable design working
stresses of materials for handrails, railings, anchors, and connections:
1. Top Rail of Guards: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indi-
cated:
a. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied at any point and in any direction.
b. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/tt. applied horizontally and concurrently with uni-
form load of 100 Ibftft. applied vertically downward.
( ,
U
0,
o
u
o
(,
r
u-
2. Handrails Not Serving As Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads
applied as indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied at any point and in any direction.
b. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. applied in any direction.
3. Infill Area of Guards: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of
200 Ibf applied to 1 sq. ft. at any point in system, including panels, intermediate
rails, balusters, or other elements composing infill area,
B.
Thermal Movements: Provide handrails and railings that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface tempera-
tures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of
connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material sur-
faces.
C..
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating
metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction del;3ils, material descriptlons, dimensions of individ-
ual components and profiles, and finishes for wire mesh items.
I--,~
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 52 00 - 2
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installqtion of handrails and railings. Include
plans, elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other Work.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engi-
neering services of the kind indicated.
1.06 STORAGE
A. Store handrails and railings in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify handrail and railing dimensions by field measurements be-
fore fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construcjipn progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for handrails and railings. Furnish setting draw-
ings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete in-
serts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete
or masonry, Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METALS
A. General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolora-
tions, and other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units,
B. Steel and Iron: Provide steel and iron in the form indicated, complying with the following
requirements:
1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; finish, type, and weight class as follows:,
a. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
c. Type F, or Type S, Grade A, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless an-
other grade and weight are required by structural loads.
2. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
G. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and fin-
ish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS
A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy .of filler metal and electrodes
as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match,
strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.
B, Fasteners for Anchoring Handrails and Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners
of type, grade, and class required to prodtlce connections suitable for anchoring hand-
rails and railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding de-
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Q
a
[J
o
o
o
o
o
0,
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 52 00 - 3
u
sign loads.
o
u
1. For steel handrails, railings, and fittings, use plated fasteners complying with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.
C.
Fasteners for Interconnecting Handrail and Railing Components: Use fasteners fabri-
cated from same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. 00 not use
metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.
1 . Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting handrail and railing components
and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
U
Ol
" I
U.
5
D.
CasHn-Place and Post installed Anchors: Anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant
materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load im-
posed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when in-
stalled in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency,
2.03
PAINT
A.
ShOp Primer for Ferrous Metal: Organic zinc-rich primer, complying with SSPC-Paint 20
and compatible with topcoat.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
u
o
a. Carboline 621; Carboline Company.
b. Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670; PPG Industries, Inc.
c.. Tneme-Zinc 90-97; Tnemec Company, Inc.
2.04
GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
,'-
U
U
o
L\
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recom-
mended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.05
FABRICATION
A. Assemble handrails and railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connec-
tions that maintain structLJral value of joined pieces.
I I,
U
U
O.
D
B. Form simple an'd compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform cur-
vature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of
member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deform-
ing exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.
C.
Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings for connecting members by weld-
ing. Cope components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close fit, or use
fittings designed for this purpose. Weld connections continuously to comply with the fol-
lowing:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 52 00 - 4
roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoin-
ing surfaces.
D.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges; miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members to other work, unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railihgs to con-
crete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capabie of withstanding loads im-
posed by handrails and railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting struc-
ture.
F. For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel not less than 6 inches
long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than 'outside dimensions of
post, and steel plate formin@ bottom closure.
G. For removable railing posts, fabricate sliwfit sockets from steel tube whose 10 is sized for
a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not
more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to
resist being dislodged.
H. Gates: Form gates from steel tube of same size and shape as top rails. Provide with
hinges for fastening to wall and overlapping slop with rubber bumper to restrict gate to
opening in the direction of egress.
I. Shear and punch metals deanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges.
J. Ease exposed edges toa radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Form bent-metal corners to .smallest radius possible wilhout causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing the Work.
K. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
L. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of
handrail and railing members thaI are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensa-
tion or other sources.
M. Fabricatejoints that will be.exposed to weather in a watertight manner.
N. Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with"prefabricated end fittings.
o. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.
Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of railing and wall is 1/4 inch or
less.
P. Toe Boards: Provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided
floors and platforms.
2.06
FINISHES, GENERAL
A Comply with NAAMM's "Melal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2.07
SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
o
o
o
o
o
Q
o
o
tJ
o
0,
0;
O'
O.
o
o
o
6
0'
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 52 00 - 5
u
r
I '
U
u
U
r
U
U
L
2.
Surfaces to be field welded.
Surfaces to be high-strength balled with slip-critical connections.
B.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. SSPC-SP6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
C. Apply shop primer to metal fabrications on same day as preparation. Comply with SSPC-
PA 1, "Paint Application Specification NO.1 ,"for shop painting
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
3.01 INSTAllATION, GENERAL
.-1..
U
U
"-'_iJ"
o
u
u
u
u
u
3.02
D
U
G
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitling required to install handrails and railings. Set handrails
and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established
lines and levels and free from rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrail and railing components that
have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field con-
nection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with
rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous
paint.
D. Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting
joints. Space posts at interval indicated, but not less than that required by structural
loads.
E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where neces-
sary for securing handrails and railings and for properly transferring loads to in~place
construction.
RAILING CONNECTIONS
A.
Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive Joints for permanently connecting
railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing mem-
bers and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement
filler colored to match finish of handrails and railings.
B.
Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing compo-
nents.
C.
Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending
2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and lo-
cate joint within 6 inches of post.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
05 52 00 - 6
3.03
ANCHORING POSTS
A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts
have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between pqst and sleeve with the fol-
lowing anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufac-
turer's written instructions:
B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than 00 of post
for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annu-
lar space between post ,and concrete with the following anchoring material, mixed and
placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
C. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and" leave t/8-inch
build-up, sloped away from post.
D. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, ih slip-fit metal sockets cast in con-
crete.
3.04 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS
A. Secure wall brackets to building construction.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of handrails and railings from damage during construction period with
temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective
coverings at the lime of Substantial Completion_
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence re-
mains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop;
make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
'"
o
o
o
o
0,
o
o
fl
U
o
u
U
D-
("'
U
u'
o
u,
"1'
i '\
LJ
u
-
I-
00
<
..J
D..
C
Z
<(
C
o
o
:=
I
.0
u
.~
U
UJ
O.
U
{
U
D,
o
o
(0
z
o
-
CJ)
-
>
-
c
o
o
D.
o
o
D
o
o
Q,
o
' .
0,
o
,0
Q
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
06 10 00 - 1
o
o
o
u
o
u
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY - BLOCKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wood blocking and nailers.
2. Plywood backing panels.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Roofing Systems: Wood blocking used in conjunction with installation of roofing systems
shall comply with NRCA and applicable FM installation standards.
fi
U
o
U
o
o
u
u
u
u
u
u
1. FirelWindstorm Classification: Class 1A- 90.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the fol-
lowing:
1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
4. WClIS - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
5. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide
air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review
1. Where nominal sizes are indicated,provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20
for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are mini-
mum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dress-
ing for2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wood Structural Panels:
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
06 10 00 - 2
1. Plywood: Either DOC P$ 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise, indicated.
2. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than
thickness indicated.
3. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard.
2.02
WOOD-PRESERV A TIVE- TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber
and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with
requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved
by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Preservative: Wood nailers, blocking, and similar members in connection with
roofing and flashing or in contact with masonry or concrete.
2.03
FIRE"RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retard ant-treated materials are indicated, provide materials that
comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (ply-
wood). Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL,
U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency ac-
ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of
treated wood after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified
independent testing agency according to ASTM 0 5664, for lumber and
A$TM D 5516, for plywood.
2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
3. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where. indicated.
4. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated.
B. Application: Fire treat rough carpentry concealed within building construction and else-
where as indicated on Drawings
2.04
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the
following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
B.
For items of dimension lumber size and concealed boards, provide Standard, Stud, or
NO.3 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following
species:
1. Mixed southern pine;.SPIB.
2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north); NLGA, WCLlS, or WWPA.
3. Spruce~pine-fir (south) or Spruce~pine~fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLlS, or WWPA.
4. Western woods; WeLlB or WWPA.
o
o
o
o
o
',/
o
o
o
0-
~
o
o
o
o
o
o
U'
o
O.
u
["I
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
06 10 00 - 3
u
[J
U
"V
o
U
U
U
U
.0.
o
U
o
U
o
U
U
2.05
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D
Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2
inch thick.
2.06
FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of
high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2. Where rough carpentry is preservative-treated, provide stainless steel fasteners.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: A$TM C 954, except with wafer
heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material
being fastened.
F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1..
G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,
where indicated,f1at washers.
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when in-
stalled in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed
in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified inde-
pendent testing and inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Stainless steel with bolls and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut,
and fitled. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accu-
rate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for at-
taching other construction.
B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are
too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber and plywood.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
06 1 0 00 - 4
D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate.
3.02 WOOD BLOCKING. AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other walk Form to shapes in-
dicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations
with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation
of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to form work before concrete
placement.
3.03 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K,
"APA Design/Constructi9n Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use
panels and applications in-dicated.
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
o
,0
D
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
U
D z
0
-
U t-
U
U W
I-
U 0
~
0 a..
w
0 tt::
:J
0 I-
(fJ
-
0 0
:2:
.~ ~
U ...J
<(
Q :E
Il::
0 W
:I:
.U l-
I
0 I'-
Z
U 0
-
U fJ)
-
>
U -
c
U
o
'D
/ 0
o
o
D
o
D-
O
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 13 00 - 1
D
SECTION 07 1300 - SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
0.
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Ci
U
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
o
o
u
o
A. This Section inCludes the following:
1. Rubberized asphalt sheet waterproofing.
2. Bentonite sheet waterproofing.
3. Molded sheet drainage panels.
B. Contractor's Options:
1. Sh-eet waterproofing may be either rubberized asphalt or bentonite of manufac-
turers listed.
1.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
u
A.
Waterproof outside wall roof and walls of tunnels' and all underground spaces, including
walls of tunnel access pit.
B. Provide waterproofing that prevents the passage of water.
U'
1.04 SUBMITTALS
u
A.
Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and
treating substrate. technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of wa-
terproofing.
o
u
u
u
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for sub-
strate joints and cracks, sheet flashings. penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins
with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
C. Product Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating .and inter-
preting test results of waterproofing for compliance with requirements,. based on compre-
hensive testing of current waterproofing formulations.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is authorized, approved, or licensed by
waterproofing manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
o
A.
Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and direc-
tions for storing and mixing with other components.
r-'
LJ
B.
Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected lo-
cation and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
lJ
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 13 00 - 2
c. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.07
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within tHe range of ambient and sub-
strate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do hot apply water-
proofing to a damp or weLsubstrate.
1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
2. Bentonite clay products in panel or membrane form m!'ly be placed on damp sur-
faces. Do not apply to surfaces where ice or frost is visible. Do not apply ben-
tonite waterproofing materials in areas with standing water.
B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materi-
als.
1.08
WARRANTY
A. Spedal Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by waterproofing manufac-
turer agreeing to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements
or that does not remain watertight during specified warranty period.
1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to faHiJre of substrate pre-
pared and treated ac:.;cording to requirements or formation of new joints and
cracks in substra,teexc:.;eeding 1/16 inch in wiqth.
2. Warranty Period: Five years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to, compliance with requirements, provide one of the following prod-
ucts:
1. Rubberized~Asphalt Sheet Waterproofing:
a. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div.
b. Cetco; Enviroshe~t.
c. W. R. Grace & Co.; Bituthene.
d. W. R Meadows, Inc.; Mel-Rol.
e. T. C. Miradri; Miradri.
f. Monsey Bakor; Elasto-Seal 20.00.
2.
Bentonite Waterproofing:
8. MiraClay; CClrlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div.
b. Swelltite3000; CETCO.
c. Volclay Type 1 Panels; CETCO.
d. Volclay Type 1C Panels; CETCO.
e. Voltex; CETCO.
f. Deckseal; Tremco, Inc.
g. Paraseal;. Tremco, Inc.
h. Paraseal LG; Tremcb, Inc.
2.02
RUBBERIZED-ASPHAL T SHEET WATERPROOFING
A. Rubberized-Asphalt Sheet: 60-mil- thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils of
o
o
o
o
o
0-
o
o
o
o
o
0-
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 1300 - 3
o
U
D
U
o
.u
2.03
o
u
2.04
u
u
o
o
o
o
2.05
2.06
[J
u
[J
rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick, polyethylene film with release liner on ad-
hesive side and formulated for application with primer or surface conditioner that com-
plies with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Physical Properties: As follows, measured per standard test methods refer-
enced:
a. Tensile Strength: 250 psi minimum; ASTM 0412, Die C, modified.
b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM 0 412, Die C, modi-
fied.
c, Low- Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F; ASTM 0 1970.
d. Crack Cycting: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 118-inch movement;
ASTM C 836.
e. Puncture Resistance: 40 Ibf minimUm; ASTM E 154.
f. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 150 feet minimum; ASTM D 5385.
g. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour im-
mersion at 70 deg F; ASTM D 570.
h. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms; ASTM E 96, Water Method,
GEOTEXTllEfBENTONITE SHEETS
A. Geotextile Waterproofing: Minimum 250-mil- thick membrane consisting of a minimum of
1.2 Ib/sq. ft. of bentonite between 2 polypropylene geotextile fabrics; one 17 mils thick,
woven and one 80 mils thick, nonwoven.
COMPOSITE BENTONITE MEMBRANE
A. Composite Membrane: Minimum 90-mil- thick membrane consisting of a 20-mil- thick
geomembrane liner bonded to 70 mils of bentonite with a 1.5-mil- thick, water-soluble
film.
BENTONITE PANELS
A. Standard Panels: 3f16-inch- thick, corrugated kraft-paper panels with a minimum of 1.0
Ib/sq. ft. of bentonite confined in corrugations of boards.
B. Coated Panels: 3f16-inch- thick, corrugated kraft-paper panels specially coated to resist
premature hydration due to incidental moisture, filled with a minimum of 1.0 Ib/sq. ft. of
bentonite.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for in-
tended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.
1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with vac limits of authorities
having jwisdiction.
B.
Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproof-
ing material.
C.
Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate
by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.
D.
Sheet Strips: Self-i;:ldhering, rubberized-asphalt composite sheet strips of same material
and thickness as sheet waterproofing.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 13 00 ~ 4
E.
Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold flUid applied, trowel grade or
loW viscosity.
F. Substrate Patching Membrane: low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating.
G.
Mastic, Adhesives, and tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recom-
mended by waterproofing manufacturer.
H.
Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at
9-inch centers.
L
Protection Course: As indicated on drawings, or if not indicated, provide semirigid sheets
of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two as-
phalt-saturated fibrous liners.
2.07 BENTONITE INSTAllATION ACCESSORIES"
A.
Protection Board: Provide products recommended by waterproofing manufacturer to suit
Project.
B. Plastic Sheets: Polyethylene sheeting complYIng with ASTM D 4397, thickness as rec-
ommended by waterproofing manufacturer to suit application, but at least 6 mIls thick.
C. Fasteners: Case-hardened nails or hardened-steel, powder-actuated fasteners, De-
pending on manufacturer's written requIrements, provide 1/2- or 1-inch- diameter wash-
ers under fastener heads.
D. Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer. Comply with requirements specified in Di-
vision 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Adhesive: Water"based adhesive used to secure membrane to both vertical and horizon-
tal surfaces.
2.08
MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS
A. Basis-ot-Design Product: The design for drainage panel is based on "Hydroduct 220";
Grace ConstrL:lction Products.
1. Another manufacturer's drainage panel and protection course. ot a similar and
equivalent nature will be .acceptable when, in the Architect's sole judgment, dif-
ferences do not materially detract trom the design concept or intended perform-
ance.
B. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Prefabricated, composite drainage panels, manufactured
with a permeable geotextile facing laminated to a molded-plastic-sheet drainage core.
1. Drainage Core: Three-dimensional, non biodegradable. molded~plastic-sheet ma-
terial designed to effectively drain water under backfill pressure; complying with
thetollowing properties determined according to lests indicated:
a. Compressive Strength: 15,000 Ibf/sq. ft., minimum; ASTM 0 1621.
b. Flow ~ate: 15 gpm per ft., minimum, at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and
compressive stress of 2"5 psi; ASTM D 4716.
2. Geolexlile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured tor subsurface
drainage, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50,
percent; complying WIth the following properties determined according to
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
D
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 13 00 - 5
u
AASHTO M 288:
u
a. Survivability: Class 2.
b. Apparent Opening Size: No. 70 sieve, maximum.
c. Permittivity: 150 gal./min.lft.-fL
PART 3- EXECUTION
o
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with re-
quirements and other conditions affecting performance.
u
o
u
1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended
by waterproofing manufacturer.
2. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free'of moisture Test for capillary moisture
by plastic sheet method according to ASTM 04263.
3. Proceed with Installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been cor-
rected.
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
o
A.
Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.
D
B.
Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
u
u
u
C. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pock-
ets, holes, and other voids.
D. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from
joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
E. Bridge and cover isolation joints expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall and
deck-to-deck joints with overlapping sheet strips:
.-
U
U
D
U
U
U
F. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to
ASTM D 6135.
1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch fil-
lets of liquid membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows:
a. Affooting-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane each direction
from corner or install membrane strip centered over corner.
b. At plaza deck-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane or sheet
strips onto deck waterproofing and to finished height of sheet flashing.
G. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations
through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.
3.03
RUBBERIZED-ASPHALT SHEET PREPARATION
A. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that
will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more
than 24 hours.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 13 00 - 6
3.04 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for handling and installation of water-
proofing materials..
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wetting before and during subsequent construc-
tion operations. Repair punctures, tears, and cuts according to manufacturer's written in-
structions.
C. Coordinate installation of waterproofing materials and associated work to provide com-
plete system complying with combined recommendations of manufacturers and installers
involved in work. Schedule installation to minimize period of exposure of waterproofing
materials.
D. Extend waterproofing and flashings to provide complete membrane over area indicated to
be waterproofed. Seal to' projections through waterproofing and seal seams. Bond to
vertical surfaces and also, where shown or recommended by manufacturer, bond to hori-
zontal surfaces.
E.
Top Edge Seal: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and details.
F.
Expansion/Construction Joints: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and de-
tails.
G. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or
ending in reg lets with mastic or sealant
H. Install sheet waterproofing-and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.
3.05
MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure molded-sheetdraihage panels according to manufacturer's written in-
structions. Use adhesives. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity.
Protect installed molded-sheet drainqge panels during subsequent construction.
3.06
PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION
A. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane before starting
subsequent construction operations.
3.07
FIELD TESTING
A. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in
ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before overlying construction is placed.
Install temporary containm.ent assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable wa-
ter.
1. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches with a minimum depth' of 1 inch and
not exceeding a depth of 4 inches. Maintain 2 inches of clearance from top of
sheet flashings..
2. Flood each area for 24 hours.
3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until
waterproofing installation is watertight
3.08
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
o
u
o
u
o
o
o
u
o
u
u
u
u
u
o
u
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 13 00 - 7
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and proce-
dures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION
u
[j
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 13 54 - 1
u
SECTION 0713 54 - THERMOPLASTIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 + GENERAL
u
u
u
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, inCluding General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
u
1.
2.
3.
4.
pve sheet waterproofing.
Molded sheet drainage panels.
Insulation.
Insulation drainage panels.
u
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
u
1. Division 5 Section "Architectural Joint Systems" for expansion-joint systems.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint"sealant materials and installation.
1.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
o
A.
Provide waterproofing that prevents the passage of water
1.04 SUBMITTALS
u
A.
Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and
treating substrate. technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of wa-
terproofing.
o
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for sub-
strate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins
with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
o
o
u
u
1 . Include Setting Drawings showing layout, sizes, sections, profiles, and joint de-
tails of concrete pavers with paver support assemblies.
c.
Samples: For the following products:
1. 12-by-12~inch square of waterproofing.
2. 12-by-12-inch square of insulation.
3. 4-by-4-inch square of drainage panel.
D.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and inter-
preting test results of waterproofing for compllance with requirements, based on compre-
hensive testing of current waterproofing formulations.
u
L05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
u
u
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is authorized and approved by water-
proofing manufacturer to install manufacturer's products; and who is eligible to receive
waterproofing warranty specified.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 13 54 - 2
A. Deliver liquid materials to Projedsite in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and direc-
tions for storing and mixing with other components.
B.
Store liquid materials in their original .undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected ID-
eation and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
C.
Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
D.
Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.07
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing
\0 a damp or wet substrate.
1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
B..
Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materi,.
als.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by waterproofing manufac-
turer and Installer agreeing to. repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply with
requirements or that does not remain watertight within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years after date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written waterproofing Installer's warranty, signed by In-
staller, covering Work ofthisSection, for warranty period of two years.
1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels,
insulation, and earthwork or other overburden.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following prod-
ucts:
1. Sarnafil Waterproofing Systems, Inc.; System 1000.
2.02 SHEET WATERPROOFING
A. PVC Sheet: aO-mil-thick flexible sheet compounded from PVC resin, plasticizers, stabi-
lizers, fillers, and pigments and reihforced with nonwoven fiberglass with the following
properties measured per standard test methods referenced:
1_
2.
3.
4.
Tensile Strength: ~600 psi minimum; ASTM D 638.
Elong~tion at Break: 300 percent minimum, machine direction; ASTM 0 638.
Seam Strength: 90 percent minimum of tensile strength; ASTM 0 638.
Retention of Properties after Heat Aging: 95 percent minimum retention of ten-
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
n
U
25.310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 1354 - 3
r'
U
u
u
2.03
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
o
r~
U
U
2.04
u
['
U
u
sile strength and elongation; ASTM 0 638 after 168 hours at 194 deg F;
ASTM D 3045.
5. Tear Resistance: 17 Ibf minimum; ASTM D 1004.
6. Low-Temperature Bend: Pass at minus 40 deg F; ASTM D 2136.
7. linear Dimension Change: 0.01 percent maximum after 6 hours at 176 deg F;
ASTMD 1204.
8. Water Absorption: 2 percent maximum weight gain after 168 hours' immersion at
158 deg F; ASTM 0 570.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for in-
tended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.
1.
Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with vac limits of authorities
having. jurisdiction.
B.
Concealed Sheet Flashing: Sheet flashing of same material, construction, and thickness
as sheet waterproofing.
c.
Exposed Sheet Flashing: 80-mil-thick, coated PVC; reinforced with nonwoven fiberglass.
D.
Bonding Adhesives: Adhesive for bonding polymeric sheets and sheet flashings to sub-
strates and projections.
E.
Containment Strip: Manufacturer's standard asphalt-resistant, 60-mil- thick pve strip; re-
inforcedwith nonwoven fiberglass; 12 inches wide.
F.
Geotextile Leveling Layer: Manufacturer's standard nonwoven polypropylene.
G.
Separation Layer: 0.135-inch- thick, nonwoven polyester felt.
H.
Control Test Drain: Manufacturer's standard four-component pipe assembly.
I.
Waterproofing and Sheet Flashing Accessories: Provide PVC discs, sealants, pourable
sealers, cone and vent flashings, inside and outside corner flashings, termination reglets,
clamps, compression bars, tapes, and other accessories recommended by waterproofing
manufacturer lor intended use.
J.
Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard stainless-steel or aluminum bars, ap-
proximately 1 inch wide, prepunched, with nylon anchors and stainless-steel pins.
K. Protection Course: 39-mil- thick, hot-air-weldable, high-density-polyethylene sheet pro-
tection layer.
MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS
A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Prefabricated, composite drainage panels, manufactured
with a permeable geotextile facing laminated to a molded-plastic-sheet drainage core.
1.
Drainage Core: Three-dimensional, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet ma-
terial designed to effectively drain water under backfill pressure; complying with
the following properties determined according to tests indicated:
a. Compressive Strength: 18,000 Ibf/sq. ft., minimum; ASTM D 1621.
b. Flow Rate: 134 gpm per ft., minimum, at hydraulic gradient of 0.01 and
compressive stress of 3600 psf, ASTM D 4716.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 13 54 - 4
c. Basis-of~Design Product:
turer.
Recommended by waterproofing manufac-
2.05 INSULATION
A.
Tppered Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with
ASTM C 578, with long edges rabbeted; of type, density, and compressive strength indi-
cated below:
1. Type VII, 2.2-lb/cu. ft. minimum density and 60-psi minimum compressive
strength.
2. Same or other manufacturer's drainage panel and insulation board assembly will
be acceptable when, in the Architect's sole judgment, differences do not materi-
ally detract from the design concept or intended performance.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Sarnafil Waterproofing Systems, Inc.
2. Dow Chemical Company (The).
3. T. Clear Corporation.
2.06
INSULATION DRAINAGE PANELS
A. Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with
ASTM C 578; fabricated with shiplap or tongue-and-groove edges and With one side hav-
ing grooved drainage channels, faced with manufacturer's standard, nonwoven geotextile
filter fabric.
1. Type IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. minimum density, 25-psi minimum compressive strength.
a. Application: Vertical.
2. Type VI, 1.8-lb/cu.ft. minimum density and 40-psi minimum compressive
strength.
a. Application: Horizontal.
B. Basis-af-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. "Insuldrain"; Owens Corning Foamular.
2. "Thermadry"; 1. Clear Corporation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compiiance with re-
quirements and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Do not proceed with installation until after the minimum concrete curing period
recomfTIended by Waterproofing manufacturer.
2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary mois-
ture by plastic.sheet method according to ASTM D4263.
3. Notify Architect in writing of anticipated problems using waterproofing over sub-
strate.
D~
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 13 54 - 5
u
4.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been cor-
rected.
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
U
D
u
[j
o
u
3.03
o
u
I' .
u
A.
Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.
B.
Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
C.
Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections ahd fill honeycomb, aggregate pock-
ets, holes, and other voids.
E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from
joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
F. Prepare; treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations
through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions.
TAPERED INSULATION INSTAllATION
A.
Install one layer of tapered board insulation to achieve slope of % inch per foot under
horizontal waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch of projections and pene-
trations.
B.
On horizontal surfaces, lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation.
3.04 lOOSEl Y lAID SHEET INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install loosely laid sheets over entire area to receive waterproofing according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
C.
1. Install geotextile leveling layer directly over substrates and maintain minimum
side and end laps.
2. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum di-
mensions required. Stagger end laps.
3. Install loosely laid sheets and auxiliary materials to tie into adjoining waterproof-
ing.
4. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in'waterproofing not complying with re-
quirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters.. Patch with sheet water-
proofing extending beyond repaired areas in all directions.
B.
Horizontal Applications: Secure terminations and perimeter of deck sheet waterproofing
with PVC cord and metal termination bars anchored 12 inches o.c.
1. Apply sheets with side laps shingled with slope of deck where possible.
2. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely
seal sheet in place with clamping ring.
Vertical Applications: Mechanically attach leveling layer with 4-inch- minimum diameter,
reinforced PVC sheet discs and fasteners at required spacings.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
0713 54 - 6
1.-
2.
Hot-air-weld sheet waterproofing to discs.
Secure top terminati(:>n of waterproofing with continuous, extruded-aluminum,
surface-mounted, termination reglet anchored at spacings recommended by wa-
terproofing manufacturer according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.05 SEAM INSTALLATION
A.
Hot-air-weld side and end laps of overlapping sheets according to manufacturer's written
instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Inspect outside edge .of seams with
pointed metal probe and ensure completed laps lay flat and are free of voids, fishmouths,
or wrinkles.
3.06 SHEET FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates ac-
cording to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Form wall flashings using exposed sheet flashing.
c.
Extend sheet flashings over deck sheet waterproofing. Flash penetrations and field-
formed inside and outside corner accessories with sheetflashing.
1. Hot-air-weld joints with deck sheet and end laps of overlapping sheet flashings
and accessories to ensure a watertight seam installation..
D.
Terminate sheet at expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to~wall or deck-to-deck
joints. Bridge and cover joints with sheet flashing.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings with mechanically anchor:ed termination bars.
3.07
PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION
A. Install separation layer over sheet waterproofing before placing protection course.
B. Install protection course over separation layer according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions and before beginning subsequent construction operations. _ Minimize exposure of
membrane.
1. Hot-air-weld joint side and end laps of protection course.
3.08
MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure moldeq-sheet drainage panels according to manufacturer's written in-
structions. Use adhesives. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity.
Protect installed panels during subsequent construction.
3.09
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
B.. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to ultraviolet light, harmful
weather exposures, physical abuse; and other causes. Provide temporary coverings
whereinsulatibn will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by per-
manent construction immediately after installation.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
o
D
U
U
U
U
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 13 54 - 7
D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and proce-
dures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION
u
r )
U
[j
o
u
o
LJ
u
[J
U
U
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 21 00 - 1
u
SECTION 07 2100 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
u
u
u
u
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade.
2. Foundation wall insulation (supporting backfill).
3. Cavity wall insulation.
4. Foamed-in-place insulation.
u
U
B.
Related Sections include the following:
, '1
U
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies"for insulation installed in cavity
walls and masonry cells.
3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Waterproofing" for insulation installed with waterproof-
ing.
4. Division 7 Section "Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construc-
tion.
u
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
o
u
u
u
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANC E
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building' insulation through one source.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insuiation and related materials with the
fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products
per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency accept-
able to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of ap-
plicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Surface-B.urnil!g Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
u
('
U
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufac-
turer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B.
Protect plastic insulation as follows:
u
1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation
and concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deJiver plastic insulating materials to
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 21 00 - 2
Project site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible
in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with -requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation:
a. Dow Chemical Company.
b. Owens Corning.
c. Tenneco Building Products.
2.02 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards.
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's
standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated be-
low, with maximum f1ame"spread andsmoke"developed indices of 75 and 450, respec-
tively:
1. Type IV, 1.60 Ib/cu. ft., unless otherwise indicated.
C. Foam Insulation: Standard spray-applied closed-cell polyurethane insulation.
2.03 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Adhesive for Bonding InSUlation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with require-
ments for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other condi-
tions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including re-
moving projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders. or of interfering with insulation
attachment
3.03
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's wrillen instruclionsapplicable to products and ap-
plication indicated.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
D
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 21 00 - 3
u
o
u
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed
at any time to ice and snow.
c.
Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructIons and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere
with placement.
D.
Water-PIping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls,
coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and in-
sulation encapsulates piping.
u
u
E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are
otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.04
INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION
A. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written in-
structions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.
u
1.
If not indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade
fine.
( ,
u
B.
Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by ap-
plying protection board. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written
instructions.
lJ
c.
Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by apply-
ing protection bOard.
u
u
3.05
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated. complying with manufacturer's
written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhe-
sive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
u
u
u
u
u
B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) Insulation units by applying adhesive,
mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form alight seal as units are shoved Into
place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive. mastic, or sealant as recom-
mended by insulation manufacturer.
3.06
INSTALLATION OF MASONRY CELL FOAM INSULATION:
A. Foam insulation into cavities to completely fill void spaces.
3.07
PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical
abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is
subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction im-
mediately after installation.
u
u
END OF SECTION
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 25 00 - 1
SECTION 07 2500 - AIR AND VAPOR BARRIER MEMBRANES
u
PART 1 - GENERAL
u
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
u
U
U
A. Drawings and gen~ral provisions of the Contract; including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fully bonded elastomeric sheet membrane applied to the following
surfaces:
1. Exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry'cavity walls.
B. Related SeGtions include the following:
u
u
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for unit masonry assemblies into
which air'and vapor barrier membranes are applied.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
u
u
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method
of application; primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is authorized, approved, or licensed by
air and vapor barrier manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.
u
u
u
u
B. Source Limitations: Obtain air and vapor barrier materials through one source from a
single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of
primary materials.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit air and vapor barrier to be applied according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
1. Apply air Clnd vapor barrier only when temperatures of surfaces to be coated and
surrounding air are between 40 and 90 deg F.
u
B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of air and vapor barrier in en-
closed spaces. Maintain ventilation until air and vapor barrier has thoroughly cured.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
u
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
I I
U
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Air and vapor barrier is based on products listed below. An-
other manufacturer's air and vapor barrier of a similar and equivalent nature will be ac-
ceptable when, in the Architect's sole judgment rendered during the bidding period, dif-
ferences do not materially detract from the design concept or intended performance.
u
1 .
"Perm-A-Barrier Liquid"; Grace Construction Products.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07'2500 - 2
2. "Air-Bloc 06"; Henry.
3. "Air Shield LM"; W.R Meadows
2.02 AIRAND VAPOR BARRIER
A. Resilient, monolithic, fully bonded elastomeric sheet: Spray applied, two component,
synthetic rubber, cold vulcanized, fluid applied membrane.
B. Physical Properties:
1. Air Permeance: 0.002 cfm/sqJt. or less per ASTM E 238.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.08 Perms or less per ASTM E 96, Method B.
3. Pull Adhesion to Concrete Block 35 psi per ASTM 0 4541.
4. Elongation: 500% per ASTM 0 413.
5. Pliability: Unaffected by 180 degree bend over 2-inch mandrel at minus 20 de-
grees F per ASTM 0 1970.
6. Low Temperature Flexibility: 1/8cinch crack bridging at minus 15 degrees F. per
ASTM C 836.
7. Solids Content: 62% or more per ASTM 0 1644.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Liquid Membrane: Bituthene Liquid Membrane for details and terminations.
B. Flashing: Manufacturer's standan;! peel and stick tape for flashing around windows,
doors, sills, etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3;01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements fat sur-
face smoothness and other cOllditionsaffecting performance of work.
1. Begin air and vapor barrier application only after substr:ate construction and
penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from
being stained, spotted, or coated with air and vapor barrier.
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints,
and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prfme malerial manufacturer.
3.03
APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer~s' written recommendations unless more stringent require-
ments are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance
of air and vapor barrier.
L
Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or required to achieve
coverages indicated.
Allow each coat of aira"nd vapor barrier to cure 24 hours before applying subse-
quent coats.
2.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER- ENERGY CENTER
07 25 00 - 3
8. . Apply air and vapor barrier to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior face of
inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls.
1.
Lap air and vapor barrier at least 1/4 inch onto flashing, masonry reinforcement,
veneer ties, and other ite-ms that penetrate inner wythe.
Extend air and vapor barrier over outer face of structural members and concrete
slabs that interrupt inner wythe, and lap air and vapor barrier at least 1/4 inch
onto shelf angles supporting veneer.
o
2.
u
3.04 CLEANING
u
A.
Remove air and vapor barrier materials from surfaces not intended to receive air and va-
por barrier.
u
o
END OF SECTION
u
-
U
u
o
u
o
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 52 00 - 1
SECTION 07 52 00 ~. SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
,.. ~
U
U
U
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
u
u
o
u
A.
This Section includes the following:
1. SBS-modified bituminous membrane roofing.
2. Roof insulation.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry .. for wood nailers and blocking.
Division 07 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck.
Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration
flashings, flashings, and counterflashings.
"Plumbing Specialties" forroof drains.
4.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
D
;=.
I I
U
I~
U
u
u
u
1.04
u
u
c.
u
[j
A.
General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight;
do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally in-
duced movement, and exposure to weather without failure.
B.
Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another
under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manu-
facturer based on testing and field experience.
C.
FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that
comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4"470 as part of a roofing system and
that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as
applicablR Identify materials with FMG markings.
1.
2.
FirelWindstorm Classification: Class 1A~gO.
Hail Resistance: SH.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations. sections, details, and at-
tachments to other Work.
1.
2.
Tapered insulation, including slopes.
Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes.
Samples for Verification:. For the following products:
1 . 12-by-12-inch square of base sheet.
2. 12-by-12-inch square of mineral-granule-surfaced roofing membrane cap sheet
of color specified.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 52 00 - 2
D.
Product Test Reports: Based on eVClluation of comprehensive tests performed by manu-
facturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system.
t.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized. or licensed by roof-
ing system manufacturer; to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty.
1. Roofing Installers: Subject to compliance with requirements, the-following roofing
installers are acceptable for use on this project:
a. Blackmore & Buckner Roofing Co., Inc.
b. Henry C. Smither Roofing Co., Inc.
c. HRC Roofing and Sheetmetal
d. R Adams Roofing.
e. Ralph R Reeder & Sons, Inc.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has FMG approval for roofing
system' identical to that used for th is Project.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from or approved by roofing
system manufacturer.
D. Fire- T est-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response
characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method be-
low by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency accelJtabJe to authorities hav-
ing jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable test-
ing and inspecting agency.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for.application and roof
slopes indicated.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies
of which roofing system is a part.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site ip original containers with seals unbroken and la-
beled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and
directions for storage.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected lo-
cation and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Pro-
tect stored liquid material. from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its
stated shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing; and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.07
PROJECT CONDITIONS
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 52 00 - 3
u
u
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's writ-
ten instructions and warranty requirements.
u
B.
Provide a fume recovery kettle with afterburner for all phases of the work.
u
1. A fume recovery kettle with filter system will be acceptable with periodic filter re-
placement.
u
a. Filter replacement shall occur as recommended by the kettfe and filter
manufacturer, and more frequently, if required to eliminate odors, as de-
termined by the Owner.
2. Kettle location and placement is subject to Owner approval.
u
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in mate-
rials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks.
u
o
1. Special warrar]ty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane
accessories roof insulation fasteners cover boards and other components of roof-
ing system.
2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
o
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
u
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
lJ
1.
SBS-Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing:
u
a.
b.
c.
d.
Firestone Building Products Company.
Johns Manville International, Inc.
Siplast, Inc.
Soprema Roofing and Waterproofing Inc.
o
u
2.02
SBS-MODIFIED ASPHALT-CAP MEMBRANE PLY MATERIALS
A Roofing Membrane Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6164, Grade G, Type I or II, fiberglass-
reinforced ,SBS~modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced.
u
1.
2.
Basis of Design: "Elastophene Granular FR"; Soprema
Granule Color: White.
2.03 BASE-SHEET MATERIALS
u
A.
Base She(3t: ASTM D 4601, Type II, SBS-modified asphalt-impregnated and -coated
sheet, withglass-fiber-reinforcing mat, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides.
u
u
1. Basis of Design: "Sopra G"; Soprema
2.04
SBS-MODIFIED ASPHALT - BASE PLY MEMBRANE MATERIALS
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 52 00 - 4
A.
Roofing Membrane Bas~ Sheet; ASTM 0 6164, GradeG, Type I or II, polyester-
reinforced, SBS..modified asphalt.sheet; granular surfaced.
1. Basis of Design: "Sopralene 180 Sanded"; Soprema
2.05
FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type VI, asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt.
B. Flashing Sheet: ASTM 06164, Grade G, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, SBS-modified
asphalt sheet; granular surfaced.
1. Basis of Design: "Sopralene 180 Sanded"; Soprema
2.06
AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended
use and compatible with roofing membrane.
B'. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
C. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 31c2, Type III or IV as recommended by roofing system manu-
facturer for application.
D.
Cold-Applied Adhesive-: ROQfing system mar}ufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one- or
two-part, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and
use with roofing membrane and base flashings.
E. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roof-
ing system manufacturer for application.
F. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen, nonhardening, nonmigrating,
nonskinning, and nondrying.
G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-
resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roofing membrane compo-
nents to substrate, test~d by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable
to roofing system manufacturer.
H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide miscellaneous accessories recommended by roof-
ing system manufacturer.
2.07
ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and
referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses
indicated.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer
on both major surfaces.
1 . Aged R-value shall be as designated at mean temperatures indicated and as fol-
lows: R 5.6 at 75 deg F for 1" thick insulation board.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread of 25.
3. Compressive Strength: 20 psi per ASTM D 1621-94 Test Method for.Compres-
sive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
4. Dimensional Stability' Less than 2.0 percent change in length, width and thick-
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
1J
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER ~ ENERGY CENTER
07 52 00 - 5
LJ
U
U
2.08
lJ
U
u
r-'
U
u
u
u
u
I ~)
U
ness per ASTM D 2126-94 Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics
to Thermal and Humid Aging.
C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4
inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes
where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for in-
tended use and compatible with membrane roofing.
B.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-
resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate,
and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
c.
Cold Fluid~Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive formu-
lated to adhere roof insulation to substrate.
D.
Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1; cellulosic-fiber insulation board.
E.
Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board.
F.
Cover Board: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board, 3/4 inch thick, with top surface seal-
coated; or ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4
inch thick.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the fol-
lowing:
a.
b.
c.
d.
ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board, 1/2 inch.
"Dens-Deck"; Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
"Fesco Board"; Johns Manville.
Other cover board as required by manufacturer to achieve indicated war-
ranty and performance requirements.
u
A.
2.09 WALKWAYS
G. Substrate Joint Tape: 6- or 8-inch- wide, coated, glass-fiber joint tape.
u
Walkway Pads: Mineral-granule-surfaced, reinforced asphaltic composition, slip-resisting
pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer, 3/8 inch thick, minimum.
1.
2.
Pad Size: 24 inches square.
Granule Color: White.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
i i
U
cl
U
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions. with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requiremehts and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
f l
u
1.
Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing com-
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 52 00 - 6
ponents to roof deck have been removed,
2. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capil-
lary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
a. Test for moisture by poU[ing 1 pint of hot roofing asphalt on deck at start
of each day's work and at start of each roof area or plane. Do not pro-
ceed with roofing work inest sample foams or can be easily and cleanly
stripped after co oli r:lg .
3.
Verify that deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no ad-
jacent units in excess of 1/16 inch out of plane relative to adjoining deck.
Proceed with installation pnly after unsatisfactory conditions have been cor-
rected.
4.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing in-
stallation according to roofing system manufacturer's Written Instructions. Remove sharp
projections.
B.
Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling
Or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work
is takfng place or when rain is forecast.
C. Concrete Decks: Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at a rate of 3/4
gal./100 sq. ft. and allow primer to dry.
3.03
BASE-SHEET INSTALLATION
A. Install lapped base sheet course, extending sheet over and terminating beyond cants.
Attach base sheet as follows:
1. Mechanically fasten to substrate.
B. Install a second lapped base sheet course, extending sheet over and terminating beyond
cants. Attach base she.et as follows:
1. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
2. Adhere to substrate in a uniform coating of cojd~applied adhesive.
3.04
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insula-
tion.
B. Install one lapped base sheet course and mechanically fasten to subst~ate according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
c. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips at
junctures of roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater
than 45 degrees.
D. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
E.
Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding
1/4 inch with insulation.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 5200 - 7
u
[j
o
u
o
u
u
o
u
'I
U
3.05
u
u
u
u
u
u
E.
u
F.
u
1 . Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
F.
Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thick-
ness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers
with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of
6 inches if! each direction.
G.
Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush
and does not restrict flow of water.
H.
Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical sur-
faces.
L
Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:
1.
2.
Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive.
J.
Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end
joints staggered between rows. Stagger joints from joints in insulation below a minimum
of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck.
Tape joints if required by roofing system manufacturer.
1. Fasten according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Wind-
storm Resistance Classification.
2. Fasten to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
3. Apply hot roofing asphalt to underside and immediately bond cover board to sub-
strate.
ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written in-
structions and applicable recommendations of ARMAlNRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines
for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing."
B.
Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's tech-
nical personnel.
C.
Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services
for installing roofing system.
D.
Coordinate installing roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing
membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left un-
covered at the end of the workday or when rain is for.ecast.
1.
Provide tie-ofts at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane
sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot
roofing asphalt with joints and edges sealed.
Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to pre-
vent waterfrom entering completed sections of roofing system.
Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
2.
3.
Asphalt Heating: Heat and apply SEBS-modified roofing asphalt according to roofing
system manufacturer's written instructions.
Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints,
entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construc-
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
0752 00 - 8
tion.
3.06
SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install modified bituminous rooffng membrane base ply sheet and cap ply sheet accord-
ing to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system.
Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows:
1. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at not less
than 425 deg F.
2. Adhere to substrate in cold-applied adhesive.
3. Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period
required by manufacturer.
B. Laps: Accurately align roofing membrane sheets, without stretching, and maintain uni-
form side and end laps. StClgger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no
voids.
1. Heat weld side and end laps continuously using a Leister or Cadillac-type seam
heater.
a. Torch shall not be allowed.
2. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed.
3. Apply roofing granules.to cover exuded bead at laps while bead is hot
C. Instat! roofing membrane sheets so side and end laps shed water.
3.07
FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof
edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing
system manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer.
2. Backer Sheet Application: Mechanically fasten backer sheet to walls or para-
pets. Adhere backer sheet over roofing membrane at cants in a solid mopping of
hot roofing asphalt or cold-applied adhesive.
3. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in a solid mop-
ping of hot roofing asphalt applied at not less than 425 deg F. Apply hot roofing
asphalt to back of flashing sheet if recommended by roofing system manufac-
turer.
4. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in cold-applied
adhesive at rate required by roofing system manufacturer.
B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inChes above roofing mem-
brane and 4 inches onto field of roofing membrane.
C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roof-
ing.
1. Seal top termination of base flashing.
D. Install roofing membrane cap-sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on
membrane roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30~inch metal flashing in bed of asphalt roofing cement on com-
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
075200 - 9
r
U
pleted roofing membrane. Cover metal flashing with roofing membrane cap-sheet strip-
ping and extend a minimum of 6 Inches beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roof-
ing membrane. Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain
clamping ring.
u
u
o
1. Install stripping according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
3.08
WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of
manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
1. Set walkway pads in cold-applied adhesive.
u
o
u
3.09
PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for dete-
rioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements,
repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
u
C.
Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and pro-
cedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
u
END OF SECTION
u
u
u
LJ
: - I
U
u
u
u
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 53 23 - 1
u
I i
U
SECTION 07 53 23 - EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING - ADHERED
PART 1 - GENERAL
u
u
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
u
A.
u
B.
o
u
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
Adhered membrane roofing system.
Roof insulatioQ.
Cover board.
Contractor's Options:
1. Roofing membrane' may be applied with adhesive or hot asphalt.
2. Roof insulation may be polyisocyanurate or extruded polystyrene.
u
C. Related Sections include the following:
a. Either method requires a cover board.
u
u
1.
2.
3.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck.
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration
flashings, flashings, and counterflashings.
Division 7 Section "Roof Expansion Assemblies."
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for roof drains.
4.
5.
6.
) I
U
A.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
i "
U
B.
u
u
1.04 SUBMITTALS
u
A.
B.
General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight;
do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally in-
duced movement, and exposure to weather without failure.
FMG Listing: Pmvide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that
comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470a5 part of a membrane roofing
system and that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible con-
struction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings.
1. FirelWindstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Shop Drawing:;: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and at-
tachments to other Work.
u
u
1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
3. Insulation fastening patterns.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 53 23 - 2
C. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roof-
ing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty.
1. Roofing Installers: Subject to compliance with requirements, the following roofing
installers are acceptable for use on this project:
a. Blackmore & Buckner Roofing Co., Inc.
b. Henry C. Smither Roofing Co., Inc.
c. HRC Roofing and Sheetmetal
d. R. Adams Roofing.
e. Ralph R. Reeder & Sons, Inc.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system approved by roof-
ing membrane manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-
test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per
test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Exterior Fire-Test' Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof
slopes indicated.
2. Fire-Resis'lance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies
of which roofing system is a part
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers' with seals unbroken and la-
beled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and
directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected lo-
cation and within the temperature range required by roofing syst~m manufacturer. Pro-
tect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration, by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
. .
Weather limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's writ-
ten instructions and warranty requirements.
B.
Provide a fume recovery kettle with afterburner for all phases of the work.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 53 23 - 3
o
1.
A fume recovery kettle with filter system will be acceptable with periodic filter re-
placement.
u
o
u
a. Filter replacement shall occur as recommended by the kettle and filter
manufacturer, and more frequently, if required to eliminate odors, as de-
termined by the Owner.
2.
Kettle location and placement is subject to Owner approval.
1.08
WARRANTY
u
o
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof
leaks.
o
u
1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, and other compo-
nents of membrane roofing system.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
EPDM Roofing Membrane: ASTM 04637, Type II, scrim or fabric internally reinforced
uniform, flexible sheet made from EPDM, and as follows:
u
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
u
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
Cel.otex Corporation.
Firestone Building Products Company.
GAF Materials Corporation
Johns Manville International, Inc.
Versico Inc.
~
U
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
2. Thickness: 45 mils, nominal, reinforced or 60 mils unreinforced.
3. Exposed Face Color; Black.
2.02
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofiilg system manufacturer for intended
use and compatible with membrane roofing.
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet vac limits of authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application.
C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding 'adhesive.
D, Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch-
wide minimum. butyl splice tape with release film,
E. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard single-component sealant.
F. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 53 23 - 4
G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum
bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
H. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-
resistanCe provisions inFMG4470, designed for' fastening membrane to substrate, and
acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, in-seam
sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories.
2.03 BASE-SHEET MATERIALS
A. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, SBS-modified asphalt"impregnated and -coated
sheet, with glass-fiber-reinforcing mat, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides.
2.04 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Provide preformed. roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and
referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses
indicated.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass~fiber mat facer
on both major surfaces.
1. Aged H-vaJue shall be.as designated at mean temperatures indicated and as fol-
lows: R 5.6 at 75deg F for 1" thick insulation board.
2. Surface Burning CharaCteristics: Maximum flame spread of 25.
3. Compressive Strength: 2.0 psi per ASTM D 1621-94 Test Method for Compres-
sive Properties of Rigia Cellular Plastics,
4. Dimensional Stability: Less than 2.0 percent change in length, width and thick-
ness per ASTM b 2126-94 Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics
to Thermal and Humid Aging.
5. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. AlliedSignallnc.; Commercial Roofing Systems.
b. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
c. Celotex Corporation.
d. Firestone Building Products Company.
e. GAF Materials Corp.
f. Johns Manville International, Inc.
g. RMAK
C. Contractor's Option: Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV,
1.6-lb/cu. ft. minimum density, square edged.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. DiversiFoam Products.
b. Dow Chemical Company.
c. Owens Corning.
D. Tapered Insulation: Where low slope is not built in to the roof structure, provide factory-
tapered insulation boards fabric::ated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Fabricate with taper as indicted per .ft. in the 24" dimension.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 53 23 - 5
1-'
U
E.
Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes
where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
u
2.05 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
o
A.
General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer
for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.
u
B.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-
resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate,
and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
[j
C.
Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4
inch thick.
u
1.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
o
a.
b.
c.
"Dens-Deck"; Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
"Strataguard"; Owens Corning.
"Securock"; USG.
2.06
ASPHAL T MATERIALS
u
o
A. Roofing Asphalt: [ASTM 0'312, Type III or IV] [ASTM D6152, SEBS modifted].
B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
2.07 WALKWAYS
r i
u
A. Walkway Roof Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, 24 by 24 inch concrete units
with minimum 5;000 psi compressive strength; square edged, factory cast for use as roof
pavers; absorption not greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no breakage and maximum
1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance.
u
U
U
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing in-
stallation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.
u
u
u
u
u
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling
or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work
is taking place or when rain is forecast
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water
from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when
rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoin-
ing roofing.
3.02
BASE-SHEET I NST ALLA TION
A. Install lapped base sheet course, extending sheet over and terminating beyond cants.
Attach base sheet as follows:
1. Mechanically fasten to substrate.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 53 23 - 6
B. Install a second lapped base. sheet course, extending sheet over and terminating beyond
cants. Attach base sheet as follows:
1. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt
2. Adhere to substrate in a uniform coating of cold-applied adhesive.
3.03
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed
to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing
roof insulation.
C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D. Install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of pre-
vious layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.
E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush
and does not restrict flow of water.
F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight Hne with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding
1/4 inch with insulation.
1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
G. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:
1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of3/4gaL/1 00 sq. ft.
and allow primer todl)'.
2. Sefeach layer ofinsulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied
within plus or minus 25 deg F of equiviscous temperature.
3. Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluid~applied adhesive.
H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous' straight lines with end
joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof
deck.
1. Fasten insulation and cover board according to requirements in FMG's "Approval
Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
2. Fasten insulation and cover board to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter,
and field of roof.
3. Apply hot roofing asphalt to underside and immediately bond cover board to sub-
strate.
3.04
ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing
system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax
before installing.
1. Roofing membr~ne may be hot-mopped or adhesively applied at Contractor's op-
tion according to Which 'method can be accomplished in prevailing weather.
B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of membrane roofing system manufac-
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 53 23 - 7
u
[I
U
u
u
u
u
[j
u
r .~
u
lJ
3.05
o
u
U
[j".i
. I
U
U
U
3.06
turer's technical personnel.
c.
Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D.
Bonding Adhesive: Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing mem-
brane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roofing
membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane.
E.
Hot Roofing Asphalt: Apply a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt to substrate at tem-
perature and rate required by manufacturer and install roofing membrane. Do not apply
roofing asphalt to splice area of roofing membrane.
F.
Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetra-
tions, and perimeter of roofing.
G.
Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
H.
Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape,
and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manu-
facturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant
and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations.
I.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements.
J.
Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal
roofing membrane in place with clamping ring.
BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates ac-
cording to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and
allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.
c.
Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured
sheet flashing
D.
Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping
sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed
edges of sheet flashing terminations.
E. TermInate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
WALKWAY INSTAllATION
A. Roof-Paver Walkways: Install walkway roof pavers according to manufacturer's written
instructions in locations indicated, to form walkways. Leave 3 inches of space between
adjacent roof pavers.
3.07
PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construc-
tion period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roof-
ing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY GENTER
07 53 23 - 8
copies to Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a
condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and accord-
ing to warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and pro-
cedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
n
U
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
D
o
o
o
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 62 00 - 1
U
D
SECTION 07 62 00 . SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
u
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
u
A.
This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim:
1. Formed roof and wall flashing and trim.
u
B.
Related Sections include the following:
U
LJ
U
U
1. Division 4 Section .Unit Masonry Assemblies" for through"wall flashing, reglets,
and other sheet metal flashing related to masonry assemblies.
2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
3. Division 7 Section "Membrane Roofing" for installing sheet metal flashing and
trim integral with roofing membrane.
4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sheet metal flashing and trim
sealants.
1.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural move-
ment, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling,
leaking, and fastener disengagement.
u
u
j" \
U
B. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration
to building interior.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Identify material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location
in Project.
u
1.
Show details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes,
seams, and dimensions.
Show details for fastening, joining, supporting; and anchoring sheet metal flash-
ing and trim, including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work.
2.
u
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
u
A.
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent re-
quirements are indicated.
U
lJ
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal
flashing and trim materials and fabrications duringtransportalion and handling.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 62 00 - 2
B.
Unload, slore,and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to
prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
c.
Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated
covering Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other mate-
rials that might cause staIning, denting, or other surface damage.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining
construction 10 provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET METALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for
forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14,finished as follows:
1. Mill Finish: Standard one-side bright.
B. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper-bearing lead sheet.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coat-
ings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet
metal flashing and trim installation.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets
and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic
caps or factory-applied coating.
2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gas-
keted, with hex washer head.
3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rIvets.
C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing
tape with release-paper backirig. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, non-
staining tape.
D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASl:M C 920, elastomericsilicone polymer sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and
remain watertight.
E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant,
polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam,..cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted
joints.
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPG-Paint 12, compounded for 15-
mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inerHype noncorrosive compound free of asbes-
tos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. .
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
o
r-
J
.25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 62 00 - 3
H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for ap-
plication.
2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL
u
A.
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommenda-
tions in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions,
metal, and other charaoteristics of item indicated~ Shop fabricate items where practica-
ble. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
u
U
B.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with per-
formance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
C.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning. buckling, and tool
marks and true to line and levels indicated. with exposed edges folded back to form
hems.
u.
u
1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form
seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
lJ
o
D. Sealed Joints: Form non expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elas-
tomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work
cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1
inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.
u
F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet
metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Fabricatecieatsand attachment devices from same material as accessory being an-
chored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
u
(,
U
1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA~s' "Architectural Sheet Metal Man-
ual" and FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application but not less than
thickness of metal being secured.
2.04
LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
u
u
A.
Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Aluminum: 0:0320 inch thick.
B.
Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick.
u
o
C.
Roof-Penetr~tion Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Lead: 4.0 Ib/sq. ft., hard tempered
D.
Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
U'
D
1. Lead: 4.0 Ib/sq. ft., hard tempered.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 62 00 - 4
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual loca-
tions, dimensions and other conditions affecting performarice of work.
1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for' drainage, and se-
curely anchored.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been cor-
rected.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work se-
curely in place, with provisions. for thermal and structural movement Use fasteners, sol-
der, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, ana other miscellaneous
items as required to complete she~t metal flashing and trim system.
1. Torch cutting of sheer metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
So Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by
other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar
metals.
1 . Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof
performance.
c. Install exposed sheet metal flashil)g and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks.
D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform,
neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant
E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim .to fit substrates and to result in watertight perform-
ance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet
metal.
1 . Roof edge cleats and hold~down clips shall be continuous. Sp?ceother cleats
not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs
over fasteners.
F. Expansion Provisions: Provide forthetmal expansion of exposed flashing and trim:
Space movement joints at. a maximum of 10 feet with no joirits allowed w.ithin 24 inches
of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be
used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked
flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints,
G_ Fasteners: Use fasteners. of sizes that will penetrate substrate'not-Iess than 1-1/4 inches
for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
1. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners.
H. Seal joints with sealant as required for watertight construction.
1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not
less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to compJetely cOhceal sealant. When
ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
D-
O.
o.
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
0762 00 - 5
u
u
u
70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting
proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install
sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Sec-
tion "Joint Sealants."
I. Aluminum Flashing: Rivet or weld joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for
strength.
3.03
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
'""'
o
u
A.
General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance require-
ments and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that will be permanently watertight.
B.
Counterflashing: Coordinate rnstallation of counterfiashing with installation of base flash-
ing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend
counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterfiashing joints a minimum of 4
inches and bed with sealant.
lJ
u
u
1. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of anchor and washer at 36-inch cen-
ters.
C.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with instal-
lation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:
o
~
U
1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping
with flashing.
2. Seal with sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead
flashing on vent piping .
3.04
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
(.
U
U
U
U
U
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
u
U'
o
o
o
o
o
D
0,
o
o
o
o
o
'0
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310.
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 84 '13 - 1
u
u
SECTION 07 8413 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
u
~
U
A. Drawings. and general provisions of the Contrac;t, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. ThisSectioJ7l includes through~penetration firestop systems for penetrations through the
following fire-resistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings
containing penetrating items:
u
o
1. Floors.
2. Roofs.
3. walls and partitions.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
u
u
u
1. Mechanical Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations.
2. Electrical Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.
1.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to
resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and
other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated.
u
B. F- and T -Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestopsystems with both F- and
T-ratings as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding
fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to moisture, and physical damage,
provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions
both during and after construction.
I U~i,
I .
U
D.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-
spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as deter-
mined per-ASTM E 84.
r I,
U
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system product indicated.
i U
IU
I ,
IU
1" ..
U
B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each kind of con-
struction condition penetrated and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design des-
ignationof testing ana inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed through-penetration
fjrestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project
and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service per-
formance.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 84 13 - 2
B. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of pene-
tration and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer.
C.
Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetrationfirestop systems that
comply with the following requirements:
1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A
qualified testing and .inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing test-
ing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authori-
ties having jurisdiction.
2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per
ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:.
a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking
of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Projeclsite in original, unopened
containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product
and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified test-
ing and inspecting agency's Classification. marking applicable to Project; curing time; and
mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their dete-
rioration or damage due to moisture. temperature changes, contaminants, or other
causes.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration fires top systems when am-
bient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration
firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensa-
tion, or other causes.
B. Ventilate through-penetration fires top systems per manufacturer's written instructions by
natural means or, where this ,s inadequate, forced~air circulation.
1.08 COORDINATION
A Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become con-
cealed behind other construction Until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector,
if reqwired by authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, prOVide one of the through-
penetration firestop systems indic;:ated for each application in the Through-Penetration
Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3.
B.
M;:mufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
follOWing:
1. AID Fire Protection Systems Inc.
2. Grace Flamesafe Products
o
[j
,0
o
o
O.
o
o
o
V'
o
o
o
o
o
o
O.
o
o
o
u~
(\
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 84 13 - 3
u
o
1..1J'
./
U
2.02
,w
o
u
:':';"r;:
u
u
-
u
2.03
u
u
U
u
u
u
U
3. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.
4. Isolatek InternaUonaL
5. RectorSeal Corporation (The).
6. Specified Technologies Inc.
7. 3M Fire Protection Products.
8. PPD Device
9. Tremco.
10. United States Gypsum Company.
FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetrationfir~stopsystems that are compatible with one
another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating
through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and
field experience.
B. Accessories: Provide,components for each through-penetration firestop system that are
needed to install fill materials. Accessories include. but are not limited to, the following
items:
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a. Slag-Irock-wool-fiber insulation.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing mate-
rials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.
2. Temporary forming materials.
3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.
FILL MATERIALS
A.
Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place con-
crete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a
radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete form-
work, and a neoprene gasket.
8.
Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify
during exposure to moisture.
c.
Firestop Devices: FaGtory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with
intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
D.
Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elas-
tomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet.
E.
Intumescent Putties:. Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no sol-
vents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
F.
Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with alumi-
num foil on one side.
G.
Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 84 13 - 4
cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site
to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortaL
H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable, heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth
cases filled with a combination of mineral~fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and
fire-retardant additives.
I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, 'silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, ex-
pand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
J. Silicone Sealants: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutrakuring
elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other hori-
zonta! surfaces and nonsagformulation for openings in vertical and other sur-
faces requiring a nonslUmping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop sys-
tem limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.
2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Rourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings
in floors and other hprizont.al sl:Jrfaces.
3, Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and
other surfaces.
K. Firestop Bricks: "CP657"; Hilti.
PARTS - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with require-
ments for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions af-
fecting performance,
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration
firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufac-
turer.
1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from conqete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommend.ed in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods.
Confine primers to areas of bond; do not alidw spillage and migration onto exposed sur-
faces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to preventthrough~penetratlon firestopsystems from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that
would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials.
3.03
THROUGH-PENETRATION FI RESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A, General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Re-
quirements" Article and .firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions
and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
o
o
o
o
o
o
6},
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 8413 - 5
u
B.
Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to
support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-
sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
u
1.
After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other ac-
cessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.
i I
U
c.
Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following re-
sults:
1.
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings
and penetrating items.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
u.
2.
Ll
3.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
u
.A.
Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, pre-
printed vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on
both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seek-
ing to remove penetrating items or firestop, systems Include the following information on
labels:
r-
U
U
1.
2.
The words: "Warning--Through-Penetration Firestop System."
Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and in-
specting agency.
u
3.05
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
D
o
u
U
U
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent fo openings as Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop sys-
tem manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure
through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Sub-
stantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out
and remove damaged or deteriorated through~penetration firestop systems immediately
and install new materials to produce through-penetration firestop systems complying with
specified requirements.
3.06
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Penetration sealant:
a.
The RectorSeal Corp., "Novas it K-10 Firestop Mortar on Biotherm
100/200 Firestop Sealant".
3M Fire Protection Products, "Moldable Putty Pads" and "Moldable Putty
Stix"; "Fire Barrier" Caulk, Putty, or Penetrating Sealing Systems.
Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. "FS-ONE", "FS 657", "CP 617" Putty
Pad, "GP 618" Putty Stick, and "CP 672".
Tremco, "Fire-Shield or Fire-Sil; or Tremstop Acrylic"-
I i
U
b
c.
r '
U
d.
c
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 84 13 - 6
e, Specified Technologies, Inc;, "PEN 300 Sealant", "SSS 100 Sealant",
SSP 100 PUtW" , "SSC Collars", "SSP Intumescent Putty Pads", "SSM
Mortar', "SSB Pillows", "LC 150".
f. RectorSeal "Metacaulk"
g. Grace Flamesafe Products "FS900+ Elastomeric Sealant", "FS1900
Intumescent Sealant", "FSP1000 Putty", "FSP1077 and FSP1825 Putty
Pads", FSM22B Fire Rated Mortar"
2. In1umescent sealant for use at openings and sleeves involving plastic pIpe,
insulated pipe or'flexible cable.
a. The RectorSeal Corp:, "Biostop 500 Intumescent Fires10p Caulk".
b. 3M Fire Protection Produc1s, "Fire Barrier" Caulk or Putty, FS-195 Wrap
Strip, and C8-195 Composite Sheet
c. PPD Device, "FS 611A",
d. Hiltf Construction Chemicals, Int., "FS ONE", "F8 611A", "FS 657", "FS
642" and "FS 643.;' Firestop Collars.
e. Tremco, "Tremstqp MCR/WS or Tremstop WBM".
f. RectorSeal "Metacaulk"
g. Specified Technologies, Inc" "SSS100 Sealant", "SSP100 Putty", "SSP
Intumescent Putty Pads", "SSW Intumescent Red Wrap Strip", "SSC
Collars",.
h. Grace Flamesafe Products "FS1900 Intumescent Sealant", "FSB
Intumescent Bag or FSPIL Intumescent Pillow", "FSP1000 Intumescent
Putty", "FSP1077 and FSP1825 Intumescent Putty Pad", "FSWS
Intumescent Wrap Strip", "FSRC Collar", FSIS Intumescemt Sleeve".
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
,0
Q
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 84 20 - 1
u
o
D
L\
SECTION 07 8420 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, inclUding General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specificatron Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint systems at the following fire-resistance-rated assemblles:
1. Head-of-wall jOints.
L~
U
D
I
U
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems"for systems instaHed
in openings in walls and floors with and without penetrating items.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive joint sealants.
1.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: For joints "in the following constructions, provide fire-resistive joint systems that
are prodUced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated,
resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of
assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed:
r '
U
1. Fire-resistance-rated walls with fire-protection-rated openings.
-
U
[j
U
B. Fire Resis1ance of Joint Systems: Assembly ratings indicated, bu1 with assembly ratings
not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions in which
joints are located, as determined by UL 2079.
1.04
SUBM ITT ALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
u
u
u
B. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system, show each kind of cons1ruction con-
dition in which joints are installed and relationships to adjoining construction. Include fire-
resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each
condition indicated.
105
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint systems for each kind of joint and construc-
tion condition indicated through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with
the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requiremen1s" Article:
u
o
1.
Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing
testing and follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems accept-
able to authorities having jurisdiction.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 84 20 - 2
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original~ unopened containers
Dr packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applica-
ble to Project and with intact and legible manufacturers" labels identifyin~ product and
manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instruc-
tions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or
damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
1.07 PROJ.ECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or
substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufac-
turers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer!s written instructions by natural
means or, if this is inadequate, forced-air circulation
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Do not cover up fire-resistive joint system installations that will become conceal.ed behind
other construction until Own!:lr's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by
authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each instaflation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to. compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
a. Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:
1) AiD Fire Protection Systems Inc.
2) Hilti, Inc.
3) ISOLATEK International.
4) RectorSeal Corporation (The).
5) Specified Technologies Inc.
6) 3M Fire Prbtectibn Products.
7) Tremco, Inc.
8) United States Gypsum Company.
b. Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems:
1) Specified Technologies jnc.
2) United States Gypsum Company.
3) Grace
4) Hilti, Inc.
5) Specified Technologies Inc.
6) 3M Fire Protection Products.
2.02 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS, GENERAL
o
o
o
o
o
Q
o
o
o
o
0,
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
U
lJ
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 84 20 - 3
["
u
A.
Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint sub-
strates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint
system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
u
B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including forming mate-
rials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Re-
quirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manu-
facturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indi-
cated.
(i
U
QJ
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
u
o
u
u
o
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with require-
ments for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to
comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the follow-
ing requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere
with adhesion of- fill materials.
2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing
optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from clean-
ing operation,
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
tJ
U
B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C,
Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system
from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and
that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods used to remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape
as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resis~ive joint system's seal with substrates.
(' ,
U
u
u
o
3.03
INSTAllATION
A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Require-
ments" Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instruc-
tions for products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to sup-
port fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-
sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated,
C.
Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the fol-
lowing results:
u
1.
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials
as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated,
-j',
W
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 84 20 - 4
2, Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.
3, For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.04
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to in-
spect fire-resistive joint systems and to prepare inspection reports,
1. Inspecting agency will state in each report whether inspected fire~resistiye joint
systems comply with or deviate from requirements.
B. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after in-
spection reports are issued and inspecting agency has approved installed fire-resistive
joint systems.
C. If deficiencies are found, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with
requirements.
3.05
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials th'at are approved in Writing by fire-resistive joiritsystem manufactur-
ers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure
fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite sLich protection, cut out and re-
move damaged or 'deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new
materials to produce fire-resistive jOint systems complying with specified requirements.
3.06
FIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Head of wall conditions where top of wall abuts fire rated deck and/or fire rated
beams.
a. Specified Technologies, Inc" "AS ElastorriericSpray".
b. 3M Fire Protection Products
c. Hilti Construction Chemicals,lnc
d. Grace Ftamesafe Products "FS3000 Firestop Coating", B
2. Head of wall conditions where top of rated wall is indicated to stop at ceiling or
bottom of joists.
a. Firestop Bricks: "CP65?"; Hilti.
3. Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems for use at' perimeter joints between curtain
wall assemblies and fire"rated floor assemblies:
a Specified Technologies,lnc, "ES Elastomeric Sealant", "AS Elastomeric
Spray.'.
b, 3M Fire Protection Products, "Fire Barrier-Spray",
c. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc
d, Grace Flamesafe Products "FS3000 Firestop Coating".
o
o
o
o
o
Q
o
.0
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
1J
u
U
iU
I
10
U
U'
U
U
D
Q
.u
U
( \
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 84 20 - 5
END OF SECTION
b i
U
o
U
U'
U
U
o
o
o
o
w
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 92 00 - 1
u
U
'l
U
D
o
D
Q
U
W
o
SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and. Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the applications indicated In the Joint-Sealant
Schedule at the end of Part 3 and as indicated an drawings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for masonry control and expansion
joint fillers and gaskets.
2. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-
resistance-rated construction.
3. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight con-
tinuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and wa-
ter-resistant continuous joint seats without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
u
o
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufadurer's color charts consisting of strips of cured
sealants showing the full range of colors available for eaCh product exposed to view.
c. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
(r
LJ
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed
for installation of elastameric sealants required forthis Project.
u
U.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
u
o
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted
by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 92 00 - 2
from joint substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are com-
patible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and applica-
tion, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
2.02 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied ,chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing
A$TM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint
substrates.
1. Stain- Test-Response Characteristics: Where. elastomeric sealants are specified
to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone
testing according to' ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates
indicated for Project.
B. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant:
t. Products:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.
b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS 1700.
c. Tremco; Tremsil 200 Clear.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and N$ (nonsag),
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G. A, and, as applicable to joint substrates in-
dicated, O.
C. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant:
1. Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrolll.
b. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex -2c NS TG.
c. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 2.
d. Tremco; Dym~ric 240,240 FC.
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 50.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joiht substrates in-
dicated, O.
2.03 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, GradeNF_
B. Products:
o
D
o
o
o
o
o
M
U
o
o
,Q
o
o
o
,0
o
o
o
o
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 92 00 - 3
u
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac.
Tremco; Tremflex 834.
.0
2.04
EXTERIOR EXPANSION JOINTS - PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS
u
U
Q
o
A.
Preformed Foam Sealant: MBnufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-
cell foam sealant that is manufactured from high-density urethane foam impregnated with
a nondrying, water-repellent agent; is factory produced in precompressed sizes in roll or
stick form to fit joint widths indicated; is coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive ad-
hesive and covered with protective wrapping; develops a watertight and airtight seal
when compressed to the degree specified by manufacturer; and complies with the follow-
mg:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for exterior expansion joints is based on
"Colorseal"; EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd. Subject to compliance with require-
ments, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the follow-
ing:
....-,
U
U
a. EMSEALJoint Systems.
b."BSCW Series"; Balco.
2. Properties: Permanently elastic. mildew resistant, nonmigratory. nonstaining,
and compatible with joint substrates and other joint sealants.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to match
brick.
u
.U
U.
U
o
2.05
JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are com-
patible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for
applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based Or) field experience and laboratory
testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed~cell material with a surface
skin) 0 (open-cell material). and of size and density to control sealant depth and other-
wise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
C. Bond~Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid. inflexible joint-filler materials
or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Pro-
vide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
u
0'
U
0,
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhe-
sion of sealant to joint substrates indicated. as determined from preconstruction joint-
sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials. free of oily residues or other substances capable
of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and
formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
c.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining. nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 92 00 - 4
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions af-
fecting joint-sealant performance.
B" Proceed with installation only'after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following require-
ments:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhe-
sion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coat-
ings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant
manufacturer), old jointsei:!lants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, wa-
ter, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding,blast cleaning, me-
chanical abrading, or:a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound
substrate capable of'developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove
loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blow-
ing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cteaners'or other means that do not
stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of
joint sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joir:1t substrates based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written
instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or mi-
gration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealarit with ad-
joining surfaces that otherwiSe would be permanently stained or damaged by such con-
tact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immedi-
ately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.03
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with jointcsealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for
products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919
for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications,
and conditions indicated.
D, Install sealant backings of type indicated to support Sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants rela-
o
o
o
o
o
Q
Q
o
o
o
o
o
o
,0
o
o
o
o
,0
u
lJ
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 92 00 - 5
u
tive to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
u
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant appli-
cation and replace them with dry materials.
( ,
U
f"l
L
E.
Install band-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
F.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
.'.......'
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
u
U
G.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth,
uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact
and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
u
tJ
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that
do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless oth-
erwise indicated.
U
I" t
u
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
3.04
INSTAllATION OF EXTERIOR EXPANSION JOINTS
o
u
.U
A. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after
removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pLiIl or stretch material, producing seal
continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient tem-
peratures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat
to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
3.05
CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint seal-
ants and of products in which joints occur.
3.06 PROTECTION
u
o
A. Protect joint sealants during and atter curing period from contact with contaminating sub-
stances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at timt;1 of Substantial Completion. If, de-
spite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistin-
guishable from original work.
u
u
3.07
JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joints in all exterior and interior similar and dissimilar materials in movement joints, in
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
07 92 00 - 6
non-traffic areas', except as noted otherwise:
1. Use Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant.
B. Joints at all plumbing fixtures, counter tops, vanities, etc.:
1. Use One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant.
C. Joints in all interior similar and dissimilar materials, in non-traffic areas, non moveable
joints:
1. Use Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant.
D. Joints at copings:
1 . Use Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant.
E. Joints in all exterior building expansion joints:
1. Use Pre-Formed Joint Sealants.
END OF SECTION
o
w
o
o
D-
O
G
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
r1
U
o
o
o
u
u
u
u
( I
I,
t:l
:U
U
U
D,
U
o
U
o
o
u
o
D
U
U
tJ)
s=
o
c
z
-
~
c
z
<:(
en
0::
o
o
c
I
00
z
o
--
en
-
>
-
c
o
o
o
o
,0
o
o
o!
0'
o
0,
o
'0
,0,
o
o
o
o
o
.U
.-
"
, I
U
u
[]
u
I ' .
u
u
(
u
U
I.."
[1....
I' \
LJ
.U
U
U
D.
U
u
U"
, ,i"
U
D
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
08 11 00 - 1
SECTION 08 11 00 ~ STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02
1.01
RELA. TED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3,
4.
Steel doors,
Steel door frames.
Borrowed-light frames.
Fire-rated'deor and frame assemblies.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies"for installing anchors and grout-
ing frames In masonry ccmstruction.
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Naming Products)" for door
hardware and weather stripping.
Divisiqn 08 Section "Glazing" for glass in glazed openings.
Division 09 Section "Painting" for field painting factory-primed doors and frames.
2.
3.
4.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1.04
A.
Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type,
level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compli-
ance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details.
3. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles.
4. Details and tocations of reinforcement anq preparations for hardware.
5. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections.
6. Coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
c.
Door Schedul.e: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing
schedule for doors and frames
D. Oversize Construction Certificates: For door assemblies required to be fire-protection
rated and exceeding size limitations of labeled assemblies.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent re-
quirements are indicated.
B. Fire"Rated Doof Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and la-
beled by a testing ahd inspecting agency acceptable' to authorities having jurisdiction, for
fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
08 11 00 - 2
1.
Doors that have been tested with a surface mounted astragal must include GJ-
COR door coordinator.
Positive Pressure: Comply with State and Local codes and the following:
2.
a. UBC Standard 7-2.
b. UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
c. Individual doors, frames, hardware arid. related components shall be
tested as compatible with the other components of the door assembly.
C. Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257..
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during tran-
sit and job storage. Provide additional pr:otection to prevent damage to finish of factory-
finished doors and frames.
B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if dam-
age is found. Minor damages mciy be repaired provided refinished items match new work
and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be re-
paired as directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch-
high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a
humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Pro-
vide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked aoors to permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Steel Doors and Frames:
a. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
b. Ceca Door ProdLlcts; a United Dominion Company.
c. Curries Company_
d. Kewanee Corporation (The).
e. Republic Builders Products.
f. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (0$), Type B; free of
scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
B.
Cold~Ro!led Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or
ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (OS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets for exterior doors and frames: ASTM A 653/A 653M,
Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 zinc-iron-allpy (galvannealed) coating;
stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
o
o
o
o
o
Q
[}
o
Q
G
U
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
r~
U
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
08 11 00 - 3
2.03 DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated.
u
B.
Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referenc-
ing ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250A for physical-endurance level:
u
[J
U
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).
minimum 18-gage faces..
C.
Exterior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referenc-
ing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:
1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seam-
less), minimum 16-gage faces.
D.
Vision Lite Systems: Manufacturer's standard kits consisting of glass lite moldings to ac-
commodate glass thickness and size of vision lite indicated.
u
2.04 FRAMES
tJ
A.
General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other
openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
o
B.
Frames of 16 gauge steel sheet for interior openings.
C. Frames of 14 gauge steel sheet for exterior openings.
u
D.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three si-
lencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door
frames.
II
U
E. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch- thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to
close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other
materials might obstruct hardware operation.
~
U
U
U
U
U
F. Supports arid Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch- thick, electrolytic zinc-
coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.
1. Wall Anchors in. Masonry Construction: 0.177 -inch- diameter, steel wire comply-
ing with ASTMA 510 may be used in place of steel sheet.
G. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items
are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. Class C or 0 as ap-
plicable.
H. Coordinator: For doors that have been tested with surface mounted astragal, provide GJ-
COR door coordinator.
2.05
FABRICATION
u
A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be
rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where prac-
tical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant Clearly identify work that cannot be
permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project
site.
~
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
08 11 00 - 4
o
B.
Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate
doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges
of doors flush as an integral part of door construction. or by addition of O.053-inch- thick,
metallic-coated steel channe-Is with channel webs placed even with top and bottom
edges.
o
o
o
o
o
o
~
o
c.
Interior Door Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and
rails of nonflush units, from the following material:
1. Cold-rolled steel sheet
0_
Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door
complying with SOl standards.
E.
Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, ex-
cept not more than 1/4 inch between pairs of doors_ Not more than 314 inch at bottom.
F.
Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80.
G.
Tolerances: Comply with SOl 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames."
H.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings
from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet
I.
Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads
for exposed screws and bolts.
J.
Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or
scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies
and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies.
o
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value of
0.41 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or better.
o
o
'0
o
K.
Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive rTlortised and concealed
hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware
supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A 115 Series
specifications for door and frame 'preparation for hardware.
1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and
provisions for fastening 'in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.
L.
Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown.
1_ Fabricate all frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners.
Provide temporarY spreader bars.
o
o
M.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface.applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for
surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site
N.
Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to
ANSIA250.8.
o
D
o.
Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from O.032-inch- thick steel sheet.
1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
08 11 00 - 5
u
c
2.
interior doors for glass, Ibuvers, and other panels in doors.
Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and
other panels in doors,
o
U
lJ
o
P. Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated.
206 FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer com-
plying with ANSI A250.1 0 for acceptance criteria.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings,
manufacturer's data, and as specified.
[j
B.
Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SOl 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set
frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent an-
chors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and
spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
c
1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before con-
struction of enclosing walls and ceilings.
2. In masonry construction, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install ad-
jacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike
jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped
anchors.
3. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
4. For oversized openings, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs.
u
o
u
C.
Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in
frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with
SOl 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G.
o
u
u
[J
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80.
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged
areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer.
B, Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings
from doors and frames.
END OF SECTION
o
o
u
[)
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
08 71 00 - 1
u
SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED)
PART 1 - GENERAL
u
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
u
A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, im:luding General and Supplementary
Conditions and DiVision 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
u
[J
A
This Section inciudes the following:
1. Commercial door hardware for doors.
2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections.
3. Electrified door hardware.
B. Related Sections include the following:
[J
1.
Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames. for astra gals provided as part of a
fire-rated labeled assembly and for door silencers provided as part of the frame.
D
C.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinat-
ing, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section.
u
1.
Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by Owner.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
o
A.
Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes.
[J
o
o
B.
Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following:
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differ-
entiate between manufacturer-installed and field~installed wiring. Include the fol-
lowing:
a. System schematic.
b. Point-to-point wiring diagram.
c. Riser diagram.
d.Elevation of each door.
u
u
2. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and access control system.
C.
Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing
fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well.as procedures and diagrams. Coor-
dinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure
proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware"
D
U
1.
Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Se-
quence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."
OrganiZation: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets
indicating complete deSignations of every item required for each door or opening.
2.
a_
Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware
Schedule.
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
08 71 00 - 2
3.
Content: Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware
item.
b. Manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of. each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both
on floor plans. and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes containedih schedule.
f. Mounting locations for door hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location,
sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems.
4.
Submittal Sequ~nce: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possi-
ble date, particularly where ClRproval of the Door Hardware Schedule must pre-
cede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule.
Include Product Data, Samples; Shop Drawings of other work affected by door
hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review ofthe Door
Hardware Schedule..
D.
Keying Schedule: Prepared bY or l.jnder the supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's fi-
nal keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key
set to unique door designations.
E.
Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware simi-
lar in material, design, and. extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Supplier Qualifications: Door hardWare supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's
vicinity and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available
during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about
door hardware and keying.
1. Electrified Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: An experier:1ced door hard-
ware supplier who has completed projects with electrified door hardware similar
in material, design, and exte.nt to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful incservice performance, and
who is acceptable to manufacturer of primary materials.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for electrified door hardware,
including Shop DraWings, based on testing and engineering analysis of
manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to tho.se indicated for
this Project.
2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardWare and keying schedules.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manu-
facturer, unless otherwise indicated.
1 . Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door
hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that are listed to perform
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
08 71 00 - 3
u
D
U
U
o
U
o
[J
u
u
o
u
u
1.05
u
o
1.06
u
A.
u
u
8.
electrical modifications, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authori-
ties having jurisdiction, are acceptable.
D.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessi-
bility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADMG)."
1. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors:
a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 Ibf to release the
latch. Locks shall not require the use ofa key, tool, or special knowledge
for: operation.
b. Delayed-Egress Locks: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a
force not more than 15 Ibf for not more than 3 seconds.
c. Door Closers: Not more than 30 Ibf to set door in motion and not more
than 15 Ibf to open door to minimum required width.
d. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high.
2. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Arti-
cle 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with
NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to au-
thorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 252.
1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure.
F.
Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Incorporate keying conference decisions into final
keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security re-
quired, and plans for future expansion.
2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram.
3. Requirements for key control system.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware deliv-
ered to Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hard-
ware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
COORDINATION
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and
other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop
Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and in-
stalling door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door
hardware with connections to power supplies, access control system and fire alarm sys-
tem.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
08 71 00 - 4
1.07 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance,
and removal and replacement of door hardware.
B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full
maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preven-
tive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defectivecorllponents, lubrication,
cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts
and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Sec-
tion and the Door Hardware Schedule.
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and
named manufacturer's products.
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are
listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing mini-
mum requirements.
2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these stan-
dards and requirements for description, quality, and function.
2.02 HINGES AND PIVOTS
A Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Hinges:
a. Hager Companies (HAG).
b. McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK).
c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (8TH).
d. Ives; an Ingersoll..:Rand Company (IVS).
2. Continuous Geared Hinges:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Hager Companies (HAG).
McKinney Products Company; Oiv. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK).
Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM).
Roton(ROT).
Select (SEL).
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
Butts and Hinges: BHMA A 156.1.
Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMAA156.7.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
'0
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
08 71 00 - 5
u
u
C.
Size: Provide the following, unless otherwIse indicated, with hinge widths sized for door
thickness and clearances required:
o
D. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1.
2.
Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainle,ss-steel pIn.
Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin.
u
o
E.
Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated In the Door Hardware Sched-
ule or on Drawings:
1 , Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when lightened into
a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the follow-
ing applications:
u
a.
Outswinging exterior doors.
o
F. Electrified FUl)ctions for Hinges: Comply with the following:
u
1. Electrical Contact: Exposed electrical contacts for transfer of power.
2. Power Transfer: Concealed PTFE'-jacketed wires, secured at each leaf and con-
tinuous through hinge knuckle.
3. Monitoring: Concealed electrical monitoring switch.
4. Power Transfer and Monitoring: Concealed PTFE-jacketed wires, secured at
each leaf and continuous through hinge knuckle, and with concealed electrical
monitoring switch.
u
G.
Continuous-Geared Hinges: Minimum 0.120-inch- thick, hinge leaves with mlnfmum
overall width of 4 inches; .fabricated to full height of door and frame. Finish components
after milling and drilling are complete. Fabricate hinges to template screw locations.
[J
H. Fasteners: Comply with the following:
u
1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped
holes.
2. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws. Finish screw heads to match surface of
hinges.
u
u
o
u
2.03
LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. MechaniCCiI Locks and Latches:
a. Best Lock Corporation (BLC)_
b. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT).
c. 8chlage Lock Company; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH).
u
2.
Electromechanical Locks and Latches:
r1
U
a. Best Lock Corporation (BLC).
b. S;;lrgent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT).
c. Schlage Lock Company; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH).
3. Self-Contained Electronic Locks and Latches:
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
08 71 00 - 6
a. Best Lock Corporation (BLC).
b. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT).
c. Schlage Lock Company; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SOH).
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A 156.2.
2. Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.
3. Electromagnetic Locks: BHMA A156.23.
4. Delayed-Egress Locks: BHMA A 156.24.
5. Exit Locks: BHMA A 156.5.
C. Bored Locks: BHMA Grade t, unless Grade 2 is indicated; Series 4000.
D. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA Grade 1, unless
Grade 2 is indicated; Series 1000.
E. Lock Throw: Comply with te$ting requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled
fire door requirements, and as follows:
1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2"inch latch bolt throw.
2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw.
3. Deadbolts: Minimum l-inch bolt throw.
2.04 ELECTRIFIED LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Electromagnetic Locks: Electrically powered locks scheduled.
B. Exit Locks: Surface-mounted dead bolts or latchbolts; with battery-powered alarm that
sounds when unauthorized use of door occurs; housed in m'etal case. Provide red-and-
white pressure-sensitive lettering reading "PUSH TO OPEN--ALARM WILL SOUND."
2.05 DOOR BOLTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements; provide products by one of the
following:
1. Bolts:
a. Door ControlslnternaHonal (DCI).
b. Hager Companies (HAG).
c.lves; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Surface Bolts: BHMAA 156.16.
2. Automatic and Self"Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3.
3. Manual Flush Bdlts: BHMA A 156.16.
C. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bdlts to comply with labeled
fire door requirements, and as follows:
1. Fire-Rated Surface Bolts: Minimum 1-inch throw; listed and labeled for fire-rated
doors.
2. Mortise Flush Bolts: Minimum 3/4-inch throw.
2.06 EXIT DEVICES
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
08 71 00 - 7
IU
I
U
ID
I 0
U
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Grade 1, Premium.
a Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD)
B. Standard: BHMAA156.3.
1. BHMA Grade: Grade 1, unless Grade 2. is indicated.
2.07
CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cylinders:
o
a.
b.
c.
Best Lock Corporation (BLC).
Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT).
Schlage Lock Company; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH).
u
B.
Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Cylinders: BHMA A 156.5.
u
c.
Cylinder Grade: BHMA Grade 1, unless Grade 2 is indicated.
D.
Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with
the following:
u
1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and us-
able with other manufacturers' cylinders.
o
[j
U
D
E.
Construction Keying: Comply with the following:
1. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by perma-
nent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.
a. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.
F.
Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a factory-registered keying system
complying with the following requirements:
o
u
1. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master
key, and a grand master key.
2. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing sys-
tem.
G.
Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following:
1. Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following:
u
u
a.
b.
c.
Cylinder Change Keys: Three.
Masler Keys: Five.
Grand Master Keys: Five.
2.08 OPERATING TRIM
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
08 71 00 - 8
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated(BM).
2. Hager Companies (HAG).
3. Ives; an Ingersoll~Rand Company (IV8).
4. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (8TH).
B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A 156.6.
2.09 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with' requirements, provide products' by one of the
following:
1. Coordinators:
a. Door Controls International (DCI).
b. Hager Companies (HAG).
c. Ives; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).
d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
2. Removable Mullions: same manufacturer as for exit devices.
3. Astragals:
a. Hager Companies (HAG).
b. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP).
c. Pemko MamufacturingCo., Inc. (PEM).
d. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
e. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO).
B. Standards: Comply with th,e following:
1. Coordinators: BHMA M 59,3,
2. Removable Mullions; BHMA A 156.3.
2.10 CLOSERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Surface-Mounted Closers,- Grade 1, Premium:
a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN).
2. Closer Holder Release Devices:
a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN).
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Closers: BHMA A156.4.
2. Closer Holder Release Devices: BHMA A 156.15.
C. Surface Closers: BHMA Grade 1, unless Grade 2 is indicated.
2.11 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
I
ru
lJ
U
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
0871 00 - 9
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Protective Trim Units:
a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM).
b. Hager Companies (HAG).
c. Ives; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).
d. Rockwood (ROC).
8. Standard: Comply with BHMA A 156.6.
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
U
D
C. Materials: Fabricate protection plates from the following:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.050 inch thick; beveled top and 2 sides.
0_ Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units con-
sisting of either machine or self-tapping screws.
E. Furnish protection plates sized 1-1/2 inches less than door width on push side and 1/2
inch less than door width on pull side, by height specified ih Door Hardware Schedule.
2.12
STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (8M).
2. Door Controls International (DC I).
3. Hager Companies (HAG).
4. Ives; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).
5. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN).
6. Norton Door Controls; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (NDC).
7. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT).
8. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (Y AL).
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A 156.16.
2. Mechanical Door Holders: BHMA A 156.16.
3. Electromagnetic Door Holders' BHMA A 156.15.
4. Combination Overhead Holders and Stops: BHMAA156.B.
C. BHMA Grade 1, unless Grade 2 is indicated_
2.13
DOOR GASKETING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Door Gasketing and Door Bottoms:
a. Hager Companies (HAG).
b. National-Guard Products, Inc. (NGP).
c. Pemko Manufacturing Coo. Inc. (PEM).
d. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
e. Ultra Industries; a Macklanburg-Duncan Company (UL T).
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
0871 00 - 10
B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.22.
C. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provIde
smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. ProvIde
noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Perimeter Gasketillg: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and
frame.
2. Meeting Stile Gasketlng: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are
closed.
3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is
closed.
D. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for
smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283. .
E. Smoke"Labeled Gasketing: Asst;rnblies complying with NFPA 1Q5 that are listed and la-
beled by a testing and inspectihg~gency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for
smoke-control ratings indicated, based on testing accordIng to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20"minute-rated doors and on smoke-
labeled doors.
F. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: AssemblIes complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and Inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire
ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 10C or NFPA 252.
G. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspect-
ing agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.
2.14
THRESHOLDS
A. Manufacturers: SUbject to compliance WIth requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Hager Companies (HAG).
2. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP).
3. Pemko ManufacturIng Co., Inc. (PEM).
4. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
5. Rixson-Firemark. Inc.; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (RIX).
6. Ultra Industries; a Macklanburg:Duncan Company (UL T).
B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A 156.21.
2.15
FIRE DEPARTMENT KEY RETRIEVAL BOX:
A. Provide hinged lockable secure box for building keys in accordance With local fire de-
partment policy_
1. Product: "3200 RMK"; Knox-Box.
2.16
FABRICATION
A.
Manufacturer's Nameplate: 09 not provide manufacturers' products that have manufac-
turer's name or trade name displayed In a visible location (omit removable nameplates)
except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Archi-
tect.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
08 71 00 - 11
u
u
1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
u
[J
lJ
U
B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method
indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness.
Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units
and BHMA A 156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or
forming methods if different from specified standard.
C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates
generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws accord-
ing to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phil-
lips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless oth-
erwise indicated.
2.17
FINISHES
A Standard: Comply with BHMA A 156.18.
u
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
u
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces
are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other com-
ponents are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assem-
bled or jnstalled to minimize contrast.
o
PART 3 - EXECUTION
r -1
U
U
3.01
EXAMINATION
A Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
instaflation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construc-
tion, and other conditionsaffecling performance.
u
u
u
[J
o
B. Examine, roughing"in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring con-
nectionsbefore electrified door hardware installation.
c. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A 115 series.
1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to
SOl 107.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable
publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regula-
tions:
u
L
Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Archi-
tectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
u
B.
Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
08 71 00 - 12
Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that
are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and rein-
stallation of. surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sec-
tions. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on sub-
strates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb"and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attach-
mentsubstrates as necessary for proper installation and operatiori.
2. Drill and countersink units thahare not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.
Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C.
Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if hot indicated, above
accessible ceilings. Verify location with Architect.
1.
Configuration: Provide the least number of power supplies required to ade-
quately serve doors with electrified door hardware.
D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical qoors in full bed of sealant
complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Fire Department Key Retrieval Box: Install fire department key retrieval box in location
approved by local fire department.
3.04
ADJUSTING
A.
Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each
door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be
adjusted to operate as intendecj. Adjust door control devices to compensate for'final op"
eration of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility
requirements.
1.
Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close
freely from an open positionof30 degrees.
Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly
engage lock bolt.
Door Closers: Adjustsweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees,
the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch,
measured to the leading edge of the dOOL
2.
3.
B. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Oompletion,
Instarler shall perform the following:
1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure func-
tion of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.
2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance pro-
cedures,
3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty de'-
sign, materials, or installation of door hardware units,
3.05
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B.
Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
rJ.'
~
(J
u
u
u
[j
u
u
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
08 71 00 - 13
3.06 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance per-
sonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes.
3.07 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Provide finish hardware for each door to comply with hardware set numbers indicated in
Door Schedule and the schedure of hardware sets.
END OF SECTION
r'
U
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
U
I U
I
iU
u
u
[j
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
U)
W
J:
UJ
-
Z
-
LL
II
m
Z
o
-
U)
-
>
-
C
'U
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 50 00 - 1
u
SECTION 09 50 00 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
u
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
u
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
u
u
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Acoustical ceiling panels.
2. Acoustical ceiling suspension systems.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
u
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
u
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetra-
tions and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
1. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
2. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 fool.
C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish re-
quired, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square samples of each type, color, pattern, and
texture.
2 Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch-
long Samples of each type, finish, and color.
D. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of Acoustical Ceiling Panel and each type of Sus-
pension System through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with
the following requirements:
1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide. acoustical panel ceil-
ings identical to those of assem blies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by
UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having ju-
risdiction,
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following
surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264:
u
u
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 50 00 - 2
site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space
where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature ex-
tremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabi-
lized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are en-
closed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry~ work Clbove ceilings is
complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels
indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.07
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, indudinglight fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.08
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity in-
stalled.
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal
to 2.0 percent of qtlantiW installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
for product selection:
1. Products: Specifications are based on products manufactured by Armstrong.
Another listed manufacturer's product of a similar and Elquivalent nature will be
acceptable when, in the Architect's sole judgment, differences do not detract
from the design concept or intended performance.
B. Manufacturers of Acol:Jstical Panels: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products of one of the folloWing manufacturers.
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. The Celotex Corporation.
3. USG Interiors, Inc.
C.
Manufacturers of Susp~nsion Systems: Subject to compliance with requirements, pro-
vide products of one of the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Chicago Meiallic Corporation.
3. Donn/USG Interior, Inc.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
I U'
I '
: 1
![j
ILJ
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 50 00 - 3
4. National Rolling Mills, Inc.
2.02 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
u
u
A.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration in-
dicated lhatcomply with ASTM E 1264 classificalions as designated by lypes, patterns,
acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for
each product type.
u
2.03
HIGH-DENSITY, CERAMIC- AND MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Product: Ceramaguard, Fine Fissured
u
1. Classification:. Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Type XX, other
types; described as high-density, ceramic- and mineral-base panels wilh scrub-
bable finish, resistant to heat, moisture, and corrosive fumes, Pattern: CD (perfo-
rated, small holes and fissured) or CE (perforated, small holes and lightly tex-
tured).
2. Color: White.
3. LR Not less than 0.80.
4. Retaining other than first option in paragraph above and first paragraph below
risks a proprietary specification.
5. NRC: Not less than 0.55.
6. Edge Detail: Square.
7. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
8. Size: 24 by 24 inches.
u
u
u
u
2.04
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply
with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
u
u
u
B.
Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Melal Finishes Manual for Archi-
tectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
1. High+-!umidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Clas-
sification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are
indicated.
r
U
C.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Ta-
ble 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.
u
u
u
u
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following require-
ments:.
1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
2.05
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACQUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
A. Product: Prelude
1. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 50 00 - 4
runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc
coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than
G30 coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on
flanges.
a. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
b. Face Design: Flat, flush.
c. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.
d. Coordinate:finish with metal type selected.
e. Cap Finish: Painted white.
2.06 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A.
Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or,if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical
panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same
material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system run-
ners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acousti-
cal panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for c9mpliancewith requirements
specified in this and other Sections, that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
acoustical panel ceilings.
S. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish. layout of acoustical panels to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-halfcwidth panels at bor-
ders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636, use Standard 25-
2 and seismic requirements inqicated; per manufacturer's written instructions and
CISeA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and 'free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension
system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizon-
tal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to
support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension
memb.ers and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supple-
mental suspension mernbers and hangers to support ceiling loads within per-
formance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with
a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
U
D
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 50 00 - 5
u
5.
inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for sub-
strate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or ele-
vated temperatures.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fas-
ten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, poslinstalled mechanical or adhesive
anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach' hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Space hangers not more than 48 inches O.c. along each member supported di-
rectly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8
inches from ends of each member.
u
u
6.
7.
8.
u
u
c.
Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of
four tight turns. Suspend bracing from buil<;ling's structural members as required for
hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs.
Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-placeor postinstalled anchors.
u
D.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area
and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
u
1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and
not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a
tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
u
u
U
lJ
U
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension sys-
tem runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to
provide a neat, precise fit.
1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by
flanges of suspension system runners and moldings.
3.04
CLEANING
LJ
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for clean-
ing and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that
cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of dam-
age.
u
u
END OF SECTION
u
u
u
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 67 23 - 1
i r
u
SECTION 09 67 23 - RESINOUS MEZZANINE FLOORING
u
1.01
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
u
1.02
u
u
u
u
1.03
u
u
u
[j
f .
U
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, incliJOing General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1. Resinous epoxy coating.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete substrates to receive
resinous flooring.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical data,
installation instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component re-
quired.
B.
Samples for Verification: Of each resinous flooring system required, 6 inches square,
applied by Installer for this Project to a rigid backing, in color, texture, and finish indi-
cated. Where finishes rnvolve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets
showing the full range of variations expected.
C.
Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with speci-
fied requirements.
D.
Material Tesl Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and inter-
preting test results of the resinous flooring's reaction to chemicals and other reagents and
substantiating compliance with requirements.
E.
Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in the maintenance manuals speci-
fied in Division 1.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
u
u
u
u
u
C.
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (applicator) who has specialized
in installing resinous flooring similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
this Project and who is acceptable to resinous flooring manufacturer.
1_ Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous floorIng manufacturer
as qualified to install resinous flooring systems specified.
8.
Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins,
hardening agents, and sealing or finish coats, thro1l9h one\ source from a single manufac-
turer. Provide secondary materials including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and
repair materials of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary mate-
rials.
Field Samples: On floor area selected by Architect, provide full-thickness resInous f1oor-
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 67 23 - 2
ing system samples thatar~ 'atleast 48 inches. square to demonstrate texture, color,
thickness, chemical res isla nCf;l, cleanability, and other features of each resinous flooring
system required. Simulate finished lightirig conditions for review of in-place field sam-
ples.
1. If field samples are unacceptable, make adjustments to comply with require-
ments and apply additional samples until field samples are approved.
2. After field samples are approved, these surfaces will be used to evaluate resin-
ous flooring.
3, Obtain Architect's approval of field samples before applying resinous flooring.
4. Final approval of colors will be from field samples, not samples submitted for
verification.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with
other components.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration
from moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental effects.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instruc-
tions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other
conditions affecting resinous flooring installation.
B. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application ar;)d for not less than 24 hours
after application, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period,
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product byane of the following:
1 . General Polymers
2. Hallemite product line of RBG Industries, Inc.
3. Selby
4. Tnemec
5. Valspar
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Resinous Mezzanine Flooring: Resinous floor surfacing $yslem consisting of primer; ep-
oxy waterproof membrane, and epoxy resin coating.
B.
Patching and Fill Material: Resii10us product of or approved by resinous flooring manu-
facturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
c.
Joint Sealant: Type recommended or produced by resinous flooring manufacturer for
type of service and joint condition indicated.
2.03
RESINOUS FLOORING
A. Primer: Manufacturer's standard two~component penetrating moisture"tolerant epoxy
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 67 23 - 3
u
u
B.
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
PART 3 - EXECUTION
u
u
u
301
PREPARATION
primer.
Resinous Coating: Provide epoxy resinous coating system complying with the following:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: The design for urethane waterproof membrane is
based on "Stonkote GS4"; Stonhard. Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide the named product or a comparable product by listed manufacturer.
Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors and patterns produced for resinous flooring complying with requirements
indicated.
System Thickness: Nominal 15 mil- 75 mil for a total nominal system thickness
of 40 mil - 1 mm.
Base: 4-inch- high integral cove base.
Components: Provide manufacturer's standard general purpose, 100% solids,
two-component coating.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a. Epoxy resinous coating.
b. Curing agent.
6.
Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following mini-
mum physical property requirements when tested according to standard test
methods indicated:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Tensile Strength: 1,200 psi per ASTM D 412.
Elongation: 200% per ASTM D 412.
Hardness: 70, Shore D per ASTM D 2240.
Bond Strength: >400 psi, 100 percent concrete failure per ACt 503R.
Cure Rate Allow: 12 hours for foot traffic; 24 hours for normal operations
at 77 degrees F.
A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to resinous flooring manufacturer's writ-
ten instructions for substrate indicated. Provide crean, dry, and neutral substrate for res-
inous flooring, application.
B. Coqcrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflores-
cence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contami-
nates incompatible with resinous flooring.
u
u
u
u
u
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform. tests recommended by manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
Moisture Testing:
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission
rate of 3 Ib of water/1 000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation
only after substrates pass testing.
Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements, unless manufacturer's written instruc-
tions are more stringent.
Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, con-
25.310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 61 23 - 4
o
o
tains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vac- 0
uum pickup. .
C.
Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous floor-
ing manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflect-
ing through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.02
APPLlCA nON
A.
General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's writ-
ten instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.
1.
Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous
flooring system to substrate and optimum intercoat adhesion.
Cure 'resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.
At substrate expansion and isolation joints, provide joint in resinous flooring to
comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations.
2.
3.
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C. Apply coating using a rubber squeegee and a medium nap roller to uniformly distribute
the material and promote a srnooth surface at manufacturer's recommended spreading
rate.
3.03
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction pe-
riod. Use protectiVe methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended
in writing by resinous flooring manUfacturer.
B.
Clean resinous flooring not more than 4 days before dates scheduled fOr inspections in-
tended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each Project ?rea. Use cleaning
materials and procedures recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 84 33 - 1
SECTION 09 84 33 - ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS. METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
u
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A.
This section includes metal acoustical wall panels.
u
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide metal acoustical wall panels that are tested in accordance with ASTM C-423 to
have minimum noise reduction coefficient (NRC) of 1.00 or greater.
u
u
u
1.04
u
u
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for acoustical panels, including
plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
C.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating acoustical panels com-
ply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
D.
Maintenance Data: For acoustical panels and facings to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1,
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
u
u
( .
U
u
1.06
u
u
u
1.07
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing metal acoustical pan-
els similar to those Indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E 548.
c.
Source Limitations for Acoustical Wall Panels: Obtain acoustical panels from one source
with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical prop-
erties.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect acoustical panels from excessive moisture when shipping, storing, and handling.
Deliver in unopened bundles and store in a dry place with adequate air circulation. Do
not deliver" material to building until wet-work, such as concrete and plaster, has been
completed and cured to a condition of equilibrium. Protect panel edges from impact.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
(' .,
U
A. Field Measurements: Verify wall surface dimensions by field measurements before fabri-
cation and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule
with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 84 33 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: The design for perforated metal acoustical wall panels is based
on "Model KNP"; Kinetics Noise Control. Subject to compliance with requirements, pro-
vide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Industrial Acoustics Company.
2. Eckel Noise Control.
2.02
METAL ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS, GENERA~
A. Form panels to required shapes and sizes. Provide components in sizes and profiles In-
dicated, but not less than that needed to comply wilh requirements indicated for acousti-
cal and structural performance.
B. Provide necessary rebates, lugs, and brackets 10 assemble units and to attach to other
work. Drill and tap for required fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. Use concealed
fasteners where possible.
C. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to
weather to exclude water penetration.
D. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris.
E. Assemble panels in the shop. Cle;3rly mark units for reassembly and coordinated instal-
lation.
2.03
PERFORATED METAL ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS:
A.
Melal Acoustical Wall Panels: Sound insulated wall panels constructed with perforated
aluminum facing.
1. Thickness: 2 inches.
2. Size: As indicated on the drawings or, if nol indicated, as follows:
a. Indoor Panels: Manufacturer's standard 2' by 4'
b. Outdoor Panels: Manufacturer's standard 2' by 12'.
3. Construction: 0.032 inch aluminum face, perforated with 3/32 inch holes on 3/16
inch staggered cellters, providing 23% open area.
a. Provide 0.040 aluminum channel/stiffener framing.
b. Provide 2 inches thick, 2:5 pcf density, mineral wool sound absorber en-
cased in 2 mil thick black PVC embossed vinyl.
4.
Panel Backs: Panel backs for outdoor installation shall also be faced with the
perforated aJuminumto keep the polyethyler]e-ene<ased fiberglass fill in place.
Provide weep holes at bottom of exterior panels to allow any water that enters
the panels to drain out.
5.
8. Mounting Accessories: Top Z-clip and boltom J-channel for 2" space from face of wall.
1; Provide manufacturer's recommended fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 84 33 - 3
u
[J
3.01
INSTALLATION
u
A. Install acoustical wall panels in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, in lo-
cations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in align-
ment with other panels, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at
penetrations. Comply with panel manufacturer's written instructions for installation of
panels using type of mounting accessories indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended
by manufacturer.
1. Space panels out from the back-up wall surface by at least 2".
u
c 1
U
U
3.02
CLEANING
A. Clean panels on completion of installation according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from acoustical wall panel instal-
lation, on completion of the Work, and leave areas of installation in a neat and clean con-
dition.
3.03 PROTECTION
u
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and Installer, that ensure acoustical wall panels are without damage or deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion.
u
u
END OF SECTION
u
u
u
[ I
U
u
u
u
u
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
ri
U
25310
CARMEL CfTY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 91 00 - 1
u
SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
{ .
U
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
u
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Spedfication Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
u
A.
This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and inte-
rior items and surfaces.
I .
U
U
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in ad-
dition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or
material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifi-
cally mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or sur-
faces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and
finishes available.
u
1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts,
hangers, exposed steel and iron supports,. and surfaces of mechanical and elec-
trical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.
u
u
u
C. Do not paint factory prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, oper-
ating parts, and Ul, FMG, or other code-required labels.
D. Related Sections include the following:
u
u
u
u
1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel.
2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.
3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and
frames.
4. Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings" for coating of exterior stairs.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simu-
late actual conditions.
1. Submit two Samples on 8-1/2" x 11" solid substrate for Architect's review of color
and texture only.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I f
u
A.
Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated.for this Project, whose work has
resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
u
u
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain fillers and primers for each coating system from the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 9 1 '00 - 2
C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish .sample for each
type of coating and substrate required. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals.
1.
Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for
application of each type of coating and substrate.
a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100sq ft
b. Small Areas and Items: Architect may designate items or areas re-
quired.
2.
Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the. completed Work,
after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated.
Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface.
a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to
evaluate coating systems of a similar nature.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and con-
tainers bearing manufacturer's name and label.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a
minimum ambient temperature of45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condi-
tion, free of foreign materials and residue.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are
between 50 and 90 deg F.
B, Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 per-
cent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet sur-
faces.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied.
Identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional 3 percent, but .not less than 1 gal. or
1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of
one of the following manufacturers:
1. Benjamin Moore &..Co. (Benjamin Moore).
2. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado).
3. Duron Paints
4. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints).
5. M, A. Bruder & Saris, Ihc. (M. A B. Paint).
6. Porter Paints (Porter)
7. PPG Industries, .Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints).
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
D.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
r '
u
r-'
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 91 00 - 3
u
u
8. Pratt & Lambert Paints
9. Sherwin-Williams Co. (ShelWin-Williams).
2.02
PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
u
u
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service
and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material QU91ity: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating
types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for appli-
cation indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identifi-
cation will not be acceptable.
u
u
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to desig-
nate colQrs or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required
to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Fur-
nish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed
substitutions.
u
("""
U
C. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations or as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full r.ange.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
u
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with AppHcator present, for compliance with
requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4.
o
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been cor-
rected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of- pain1ing will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
conditions within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information
on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified
over substrates primed by others.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, light-
ing fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is
.impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied
protection before'surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items re-
moved using workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of sub-
stances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before
cleaning.
1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the clean-
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 91 00 - 4
ing process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
c.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufac-
turer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1.
2.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
Oementitious Materials: 'Prepare concrete unit masonry to be painted. Remove
efflorescence, chalk, dust dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as re-
quired to remove 'glaze. . If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve cur-
ing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
a.
Use abrasive blast~c1eaning methods if recommended by paint manufac-
turer.
Determine alkaliriity and moisture content of surfaces by performing ap-
propriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish
paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not
paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufac-
turer's written instructions.
b.
3.
Ferrous Metals: Cjean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been
shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign sub-
stances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's
recommendations.
a.
Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufac-
turer.
Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment
wash coat before priming.
Touch up bare areas and 'showapplied prime coats that have been dam-
aged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufac-
turer, and touch .up with same primer as the shop coat.
b.
c
4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non petroleum-based sol-
vents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment
from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
D.
Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's writ-
ten instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary,
remove surface film and strain material before using.
3 Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended
limits.
E.
Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when
multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the fin-
ish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each
separate coat.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
GeneraL Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators
and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
o
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 91 00 - 5
u
o
u
u
B.
u
u
u
c.
o
u
u
r "
U
u
D.
lJ
U
u
E.
U
L
F.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint sched-
ules.
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or condi-
tions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in
fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar
components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to main-
tain system integrity and provide desired protection.
5. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior
faces.
6. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
Exterior Items to be Painted:
1 , Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, paint exterior primed steel doors,
frames and lintels.
2. Paint exposed electrical conduit and other mechanical and electrical appurte-
nances attached to painted walls.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before sub- .
sequent surface deterioration.
1.
The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of ap-
plication method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured
as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth,
even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between ap-
plications.
Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup
painted.
If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply
additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give
special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed
fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not
recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or
feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat
of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
2.
3.
4.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and c;oatings by brush, roller, spray, or other appli-
cators according to manufacturer's written instructions,
1.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of ap-
propriate size for surface or item being painted.
Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recom-
mended by manufacturer for material and texture required.
Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recom-
mended by manufacturer for material and texture required.
2.
3.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's rec-
ommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film
thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete
coverage with pores filled.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 91 00 - 6
o
o
o
o
o
3.04
3.05
3,06
3.07
G. Prime Coats: Before applying. finis!) coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that IS required to be painted or finished and that has not been
prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction
spots or unsealed areas in first coat appear$, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through
or other defects due to insufficient sealing:
H. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a
smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness,
spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections
will not be acceptable.
1. Provide satin finish for final coats unless noted otherwise.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
L Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.
CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other dis-
carded paint materials from Project site.
1. After compfetlng painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove
spattered paint by washing and scraping withbut scratching or damaging adja-
cent finished surfaces.
PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Ar-
chitect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their
work.
1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces. Comply With procedures specified in PDCA P1.
EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide the following paint systems based on Sherwin Williams to establish
quality standard for the various substrates, as indicated.
1. Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Metal:
a. Acrylic Semi-Glo$s Finish:
1) Primer: 1 coat SW DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish B66W1
2) Finish: 2 coats SW DTM Acrylic Semi~Gloss B66c200
o
o
o
o
2. Concrete Masonry Unit:
a. Acrylic Latex Satin Finish:
1) Primer: 1 coat SW Heavy Duty Block Filler B42W46
2) Finish: 2 coats SW Super Paint Exterior Latex FlatA80 Series
INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
u
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 91 00 - 7
A. Interior Finishes: Provide the following finishes unless noted otherwise on the drawings:
1. Flat: Ceilings and bulkheads.
2. Eggshell (Satin): Walls.
3. Semigloss: Steel doors, frames and other metal.
f I
LJ
B. General: Provide the following paint systems based on Sherwin Williams to establish
quality standard for the various substrates, as indicated.
1. Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Metal:
u
a. Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish:
1) Primer: 1 coat SW DTM Acrylic Primer/Fin ish B66W 1
2) Finish: 2 coats SW ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss
B31 Series
u
o
2.
Ferrous Structure:
u
a. Acrylic Dryfall Flat Finish:
1) Primer: Spot prime as required with SW DTM - Acrylic
Primer/Finish B66W1
2) Finish: 1 coat SW Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall Flat B42W1
3.
Concrete Masonry Unit:
u
u
a.
Acyrlic Latex Eg-Shel Enamel Finish:
1) Primer: 1 coat SW Heavy Duty Block Filler B42W46
2) Finish: 2 coats SW ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel B20W200
END OF SECTION
u
u
u
u
u
u
I~ )
U
u
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Q
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
u
u
2531 0 09 97 00 - 1
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
SECTION 09 97 00 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, ALIPHATIC POLYURETHANE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
u
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, C1pply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
u
A.
This Section includes aliphatic polyurethane coatings for use on exposed exterior steel
stairs.
u
U
U
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Steel Stairs" for shop priming steel stairs.
2. Division 5 Section "Formed-Metal Fabrications" for shop-primed ferrous metal.
3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for general field painting.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data' For each coating system indicated.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simu-
late actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.
u
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
u
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed high-
performance coating system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated
for Project and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance.
u
u
u
[j
u
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers and undercoat materials for each coating system
from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and con-
tainers.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a
minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain 'containers used in storage in a
clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove
oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and
work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling,
mixing, and applying coatings.
u
u
u
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air tem-
peratures are between 45 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 per-
cent; al temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
099700 - 2
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra high-performance coating materials from the same pro<;fuction run as mate-
rials applied and in quantities described below. Package coating materials in unopened,
factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with. labels describing. contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. or 1 case, as
appropriate, of each material and color.applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of
one of the following manufacturers:
1. Carboline
2. DuPont Company, High Performance Coatings (DuPont).
3. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec).
2.02 COATINGS MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, undercoats, and finish7coat materials that are
compatible with one another and substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's highest grade of the various high-performance
coatings specified. Materials not displaying manufacturer's product identification are not
acceptable.
2.03 COLORS
A. Colors: As indicated on drawings by manufacturer's designations.
2.04 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SYSTEMS SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide the following aliphatic polyurethane coating systems based on Tnemec
to establish quality standard for the various substrates, as indicated.
B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior f~rrous-metal surfac.es:
1. High-Gloss Finish: One finish coat over an intermediate coat and a primer.
Coating applicator shall verify that sand or shot blast preparation has been exe-
cuted at shop on samedayas primer.
a. Primer: Zinc-rich primer applied at spreading rate recommended by
manufacturer.
1) Tnemec: Series 394 PerimaPrime Zinc.
b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy applied at spreading rate recommended by
manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 3.0 to 8.0 mils.
1) Tnemec: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxolinell Polyamide Epoxy.
c. Topcoat (High-Gloss): Aliphatic polyurethane enamel applied at spread-
ing rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Q
o
o
o
,0
o
o
o
u
u
o
o
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 97 00 - 3
1.5 to 4.0 mils.
1) Tnemec: Series 74 Endura-Shield.
G. Open-grate treads may be galvanized and powder coated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
u
u
o
u
A With Applicator present, examine substrates and conditions under which high-
performance coatings will be applied, for compliance with coating application require-
ments.
1. Apply coatings only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and sur-
faces to receive coatings are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of application is construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces within
that particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers or other coatings are pro-
vided to ensure compatibility of total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish
information on characteristics of specified finish materials to ensure compatible primers.
3.02
SHOP PREPARATION
u
o
u
A. Cleaning: Before applying high-performance coatings, clean substrates of substances
that could impair bond of coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1. Schedule cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminates from
cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
B. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale.
u
1. Clean using methods recommended in writing by coating manufacturer.
2. Blast clean according to SSPC-SP6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning"
and prime same day.
3.03
FIELD PREPARATION
u
u
A.
Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare coaling materials according to manufac-
turer's written instructions.
u
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying coatings in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as re-
quired during application. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove film
and, if necessary, strain coating malerial before using.
3. Use only the type of thinners approved by manufacturer and only within recom-
mended limits.
r'
U
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats
of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but
provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
u
u
3.04
APPLICATION
A. General: Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instruc-
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
09 97 00 - 4
tions.
1. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the material being applied.
2. Do not apply high-performance coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture,
scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film.
3. Provide finish coats compatible with primers used.
B. Application Procedures: Apply coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no thinner than manufacturer's rec-
ommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as rec-
ommended by manufactureL
D. Prime Coats: Shop prime on same day as preparation.
1. Recaat primed and sealed substrates if there is evidence of suction spots or un-
sealed areas in first coat, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other
defects caused by insufficient sealing.
E. Completed Work: Match, approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements.
3.05
CLEANING
A.
Cleanup: At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other dis-
carded materials from Project site.
1.
After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spat-
tered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or dam-
age adjacent finished surfaces.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades, whether being coated or not, against damage from coating
operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved
by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. After completing
coating operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to
protect their work.
2. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced coated surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in
PDCA P1 .
END OF SECTION
o
o
u
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
0-
o
o
o
u
I ~I
u
/"
U
( ,
U
Q
I
U
o
u
o
r T
U
U)
w
-
I-
-
...J
<C
-
o
w
c..
en
-
u
u
u
u
u
I
i I
U
U
U
o
~
r '
LJ
z
o
-
(J)
-
>
-
C
u
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Q
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
10 14 00 - 1
SECTION 10 14 00 - SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
u
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
u,
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
( ,
U
A
This Section includes the following:
u'
1.
2.
3
Panel signs.
Dimensional characters (letters and numbers) [and logos] [for exterior use).
Signage accessories.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
u
1. "Mechanical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for mechanical
equipment.
2. "Electrical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equip-
ment.
3. "Interior Lighting" for illuminated exit signs.
u
u
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individ-
ual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.
u
u
u
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members
and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout,
spacing,. reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, let-
tering, artwork, and braille layout.
C.
Sarnples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign material indicated that involves color
selection.
o
D.
Maintenance Data:. For signage cleaning and maintenance requirements to include in
maintenance manuals.
u
U.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of signage manufacturer for instal-
lation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
( ,
U
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufac-
turer.
r i,
U
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and
with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS
u
A.
Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
10 14 00 - 2
which they are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings,
1,06 COORDINATION
A. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise, installers of an-
chorage devices about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices and
similar items to be used for attaching signs.
1. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, furnish templates
for installation of anchorage devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PANEL SIGNS
A. General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials,
thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction,
B. Manufacturers:
1. Ace Sign Systems, Inc.
2, ACS Sign Systems
3. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
4. Andco Industries Corp.
5. ASI Sign Systems, Inc,
6. Best Manufacturing Co.
7. Essential Architectural Signs
8. SignCraft Industries, Muncie, Indiana
9. Sign Solutions, Whiteland, Indiana
10. JarOb, Inc,
C,
Phenolic-Backed Photopolymer Sheet Provide light-sensitive, water-wash photopolymer
face layer bonded to a phenolic base layer to produce a composite sheet with overall,
face-layer, and base-layer thicknesses, respectively, of 0.160 inch, 0.040 inch, and
0,120 inch; and a Type 0 Shore durometer hardness of 80.
1. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may
be incorporated into Work includes, but is not limited to, "Jet-388 Phenolic Inte-
rior Signage" by JetUSA.
D.
Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished
to comply with the following requirements:
1. Edge Condition: Square cut.
2. Corner Condition: Square.
E.
Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with requirements indicated
in the Sign Schedule for size, style, spacing, content, mounting height and location, mate-
rial, finishes, and colors of sign age.
F.
Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy complying
with ADA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A 117. f Text shall be accompanied by
Grade 2 braille. Produce preCisely formed characters with square Gut edges free from
burrs and cut marks.
1.
Panel Material: Photopolymer.
o
o
o
o
o
U
.0
0,
o
o
o
o
U
D
o
o
o
o
o
u
U
r "
U
0'
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
101400 - 3
2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.
G. Colored Coatings: For copy colors, provide Pantone Matching System (PMS) colored
coatings, including inks and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for
optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for application intended.
UI
A.
2.02 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS
Cast Characters: Form individual letters and numbers by casting. Produce characters
with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from
pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to
receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style,
and size.
u
u
u
u
u
B.
C.
u
u
2.03
ACCESSORIES
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Ace Sign Systems, Inc.
ACSSigri Systems
ARK. Ramos.
ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
Charleston Industries, Inc.
Gemini Incorporated.
Southwell Co. (The).
SignCraft Industries, Muncie, Indiana
Sign Solutions, Whiteland, Indiana
Essential Architectural Signs
Jarob, Inc.
Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended by
sign manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated.
1. Material: Aluminum.
A. Mounting Methods: Use double-sided vinyl tape fabricated from materials that are not
corrosive to sign material and mounting surface.
o
u
u
u
B. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot~dip galvanized anchors and inserts
for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed
steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as re-
quired, to be set into concrete or masonry work.
2.04
FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations;for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
u
u
o
2.05
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard clear anodic coating, 0018 mm or thicker,
over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish.
B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel complying with paint
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
10 14 00 - 4
manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with re-
quirements for installationtolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces areal elevations indicated or re-
quired to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other dele-
terious matter.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of
types described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, arid at heights. indicated, with sign surfaces free from
distortfon and other defects in appearance.
2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of doorwhere
applicable. Where notindicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs
on nearest adjacentwalls. Locate to allow approachwithin 3 inches of sign with-
out encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.
B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces' using methods indicated
below:
1. Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape to mount signs to smooth,
nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.
C. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods recom-
mended in writing by manufacturer for character form, type of mounting, wall construc-
tion, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish
character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.
1. Projected Mouhting: Mount characters at projection distance from wall surface
indicated, or if not indicated, %".
3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfacesa.;::cording to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.
3.04 SIGN SCHEDULE
A. Rooms:
1. Provide five room signs.
2.. Material: Photopolymer
3. Copy: Tactile and braille,
4. Character Style: Helvetica.
5. Background Finish/Color: Selected by Architectfrorn manufacturer's full range.
o
o
D
o
o
o
D
o
o
o
o
o
.0
o
o
D.
Q
o
o
[j
u
f"'
u
U
U
U
w.
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
101400-5
6. Character Finish/Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
l. Text/Message: Room name as shown on plans.
8. Text for Toilet Rooms: According to requirements in the ADA or of authorities
having jurisdiction, whichever are more stringent.
9. Sizes:
a. Sign: 8" x 8",
b. Character: Minimum 1-inch-high characters.
B. Exterior Signage: As indicated or, if not ~ndicated, 8-inch high letters with the following
text: CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER.
END OF SECTION
u
u
r)
U
o
u
u
u
o
u
(;
U
o
o
o
o
o
o
,Q
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
u
U:
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
10 28 13 - 1
)'
u
,G
U
U
U
U
SECTION 102813 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.01 SUMMARY
A This Section includes the following:
1 . T oiletand bath accessories.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details; material descriptions and thicknesses, di-
mensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for
each type of accessory specified.
u
B.
Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate prepa-
ration instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices.
u
u
u
o
u
(....
u
U
D
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room
of each accessory required. Use designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory
Schedule and room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule.
D. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Divi-
sion 1. Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory
unit and for units exposed to view in same areas; unless otherwise approved by Archi-
tect.
B. Product- Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes, dimen~
sions, capacities, and performance, are established by specific products indicated in the
Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule.
1.04 COORDINATION
A Coordinate accessory locations with other work to'prevent interference with clearances
required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, clean-
ing, and servioing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
U'
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide accessories by one of
the following:
f r
U
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
10 28 13 - 2
1. Toilet and Bath Accessories:
a. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
b. American Specialties, Inc.
c. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
d. Bradley Corporation.
e. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indi-
cated for each designation in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule on drawings.
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with NO.4 finish (satin), in O.0312-inch (0.8-
mm) minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), rods,
shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; ASTM B 30, castings.
C. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate. service),
nickel plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal.
D. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6,0 mm thick, with sil-
vering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating Complying with
FS DD-M-411.
E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices~ ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fab-
rication.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper
and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
2.03
FABRICATION
A. GenerClI: One, maximum 1-1I2-inch-diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo,
as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior sur-
face not exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof
label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with
tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with
continuous stainless-steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible.
C. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded
construction, without mitered corners, Hang doors and access panels with full~jength,
stainless-steel hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed.
D. Framed Glass-Mirror Units: Fabrkateframes for glass-mirror units to accommodate
glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits
rigid, tamper-resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation.
1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) and
full mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an
acceptable filler material.
E. Mirror-Unit Hangers: Provide manufacturer's standard mirror~uhit mounting system that
permits rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation.
o
~
o
m,
o
o
o
o
o
o
,0
o
D
o
o
n
U
o
o
o
u
u
25310
CARMEL CITY CENTER - ENERGY CENTER
10 28 13 - 3
u
F.
Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resup-
plying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
u
3.01
INSTALLATION
u
A.
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners ap-
propriateto substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units
level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
u
B.
Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, tog-
gle bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according
to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated.
u
u
u
C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf (1112 N), when tested
according to method in ASTM F 446.
3.02
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms
function properly. Replace damaged or defective items
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
U
D
o
o
U~
0.
U
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommenda-
tions.
END OF SECTION
0-
o
u